VRV Iiis Minivrv Sibe34 802

SiENBE34-802
Service
Manual
RXYSQ4-5-6PA7Y1B, PA7V1B
R-410A
HEAT Pump 50Hz
SiENBE34-802
R-410A
Heat Pump
50Hz
1. Introduction ........................................................................................... vi
1.1 Safety Cautions ....................................................................................... vi
1.2 PREFACE ................................................................................................x
Part 1 General Information ........................................................... 1

1. Model Names of Indoor/Outdoor Units....................................................2
2. External Appearance...............................................................................3
2.1 Indoor Units ..............................................................................................3
3. Capacity Range.......................................................................................4
Part 2 Specifications .................................................................... 5

1. Specifications ..........................................................................................6
1.1 Outdoor Units ...........................................................................................6
1.2 Indoor Units ............................................................................................10
Part 3 List of Electrical and Functional Parts............................ 29

1. List of Electrical and Functional Parts ...................................................30
1.1 Outdoor Unit ...........................................................................................30
1.2 Indoor Unit..............................................................................................32
Part 4 Refrigerant Circuit ........................................................... 39

1. Refrigerant Circuit............................................................................................40
1.1 Outdoor Unit ...........................................................................................40
2. Functional Parts Layout ........................................................................44
2.1 RXYSQ4 / 5 / 6PA7Y1B .........................................................................44
2.2 RXYSQ4 / 5 / 6PA7V1B .........................................................................45
Part 5 Function............................................................................ 47
1. Operation Mode.......................................................................................48
2. Basic Control ...................................................................................................49
2.1 Normal Operation ...................................................................................49
2.2 Compressor PI Control...........................................................................50
2.3 Electronic Expansion Valve PI Control...................................................51
2.4 Cooling Operation Fan Control...............................................................52
3. Special Control ................................................................................................53
3.1 Startup Control .......................................................................................53
3.2 Oil Return Operation ..............................................................................54
3.3 Defrosting Operation ..............................................................................56
3.4 Pump-down Residual Operation ............................................................57
Table of Contents i
SiENBE34-802
3.5 Restart Standby......................................................................................58

3.6 Stopping Operation ................................................................................59
4. Protection Control ............................................................................................60
4.1 High Pressure Protection Control...........................................................60
4.2 Low Pressure Protection Control............................................................61
4.3 Discharge Pipe Protection Control .........................................................62
4.4 Inverter Protection Control .....................................................................63
5. Other Control ...................................................................................................64
5.1 Demand Operation .................................................................................64
5.2 Heating Operation Prohibition ................................................................64
6. Outline of Control (Indoor Unit) .............................................................65
6.1 Drain Pump Control................................................................................65
6.2 Louver Control for Preventing Ceiling Dirt..............................................67
6.3 Thermostat Sensor in Remote Control...................................................68
6.4 Freeze Prevention ..................................................................................70
6.5 View of Operations of Swing Flaps ........................................................71
6.6 Electronic Expansion Valve Control .......................................................72
6.7 Hot Start Control (In Heating Operation Only)........................................72
Part 6 Test Operation ................................................................. 73

1. Test Operation .................................................................................................74
1.1 Procedure and Outline ...........................................................................74
1.2 Operation when Power is Turned On .....................................................85
2. Outdoor Unit PC Board Layout ........................................................................86
3. Field Setting.....................................................................................................87
3.1 Field Setting from remote control ...........................................................87
3.2 Field Setting from Outdoor Unit............................................................104
Part 7 Troubleshooting ............................................................. 123

1. Symptom-based Troubleshooting .......................................................125
2. Troubleshooting by Remote Control ...................................................128
2.1 The INSPECTION / TEST Button.........................................................128
2.2 Self-diagnosis by Wired Remote Control .............................................129
2.3 Self-diagnosis by Wireless Remote Control .........................................130
2.4 Operation of the Remote Control’s Inspection / Test Operation Button.....132
2.5 Remote Control Service Mode .............................................................133
2.6 Remote Control Self-Diagnosis Function .............................................135
3. Troubleshooting by Indication on the Remote Control ........................142
3.1 “A0” Indoor Unit: Error of External Protection Device ...........................142
3.2 “A1” Indoor Unit: PC Board Defect ........................................................143
3.3 “A3” Indoor Unit: Malfunction of Drain Level Control System (S1L)......144
3.4 “A6” Indoor Unit: Fan Motor (M1F) Lock, Overload ..............................146
3.5 “A7” Indoor Unit: Malfunction of Swing Flap Motor (M1S) ....................147
3.6 Abnormal Power Supply Voltage..........................................................149
3.7 “A9” Indoor Unit: Malfunction of Moving Part of Electronic
Expansion Valve (Y1E) ........................................................................150
3.8 “AF” Indoor Unit: Drain Level above Limit .............................................152
3.9 “AJ” Indoor Unit: Malfunction of Capacity Determination Device..........153
3.10 “C1” Indoor Unit: Failure of Transmission
(Between Indoor unit PC Board and Fan PC Board)............................154
ii Table of Contents
SiENBE34-802
3.11 “C4” Indoor Unit: Malfunction of Thermistor (R2T) for Heat Exchanger 156
3.12 “C5” Indoor Unit: Malfunction of Thermistor (R3T) for Gas Pipes .........157
3.13 “C6” Indoor Unit: Failure of Combination
3.14 “C9” Indoor Unit: Malfunction of Thermistor (R1T) for Suction Air ........159
3.15 “CA” Indoor Unit: Malfunction of Thermistor for Discharge Air ..............160
3.16 “CC” Indoor Unit: Malfunction of Humidity Sensor System ....................161
3.17 “CJ” Indoor Unit: Malfunction of Thermostat Sensor in Remote Control ....162
3.18 “E1” Outdoor Unit: PC Board Defect......................................................163
3.19 “E3” Outdoor Unit: Actuation of High Pressure Switch..........................164
3.20 “E4” Outdoor Unit: Actuation of Low Pressure Sensor .........................166
3.21 “E5” Inverter Compressor Motor Lock...................................................168
3.22 “E7” Malfunction of Outdoor Unit Fan Motor .........................................169
3.23 “E9” Outdoor Unit: Malfunction of Moving Part of Electronic
Expansion Valve (Y1E, Y3E)................................................................170
3.24 “F3” Outdoor Unit: Abnormal Discharge Pipe Temperature..................172
3.25 “F6” Outdoor Unit: Refrigerant Overcharged ........................................173
3.26 “H9” Outdoor Unit: Malfunction of Thermistor (R1T) for Outdoor Air ....174
3.27 “J3” Outdoor Unit: Malfunction of Discharge Pipe Thermistor (R2T)....175
3.28 “J5” Outdoor Unit: Malfunction of Thermistor (R3T, R5T)
for Suction Pipe 1, 2 .............................................................................176
3.29 “J6” Outdoor Unit: Malfunction of Thermistor (R6T).............................177
3.30 “J7” Outdoor Unit: Malfunction of Thermistor (R7T) for
Outdoor Unit Liquid Pipe ......................................................................178
3.32 “JA” Outdoor Unit: Malfunction of High Pressure Sensor .....................180
3.33 “JC” Outdoor Unit: Malfunction of Low Pressure Sensor ......................181
3.34 “L1” Outdoor Unit: Malfunction of PC Board ..........................................182
3.35 “L4” Outdoor Unit: Malfunction of Inverter Radiating Fin Temperature Rise 183
3.36 “L5” Outdoor Unit: Inverter Compressor Abnormal...............................184
3.37 “L8” Outdoor Unit: Inverter Current Abnormal ......................................185
3.38 “L9” Outdoor Unit: Inverter Start up Error .............................................186
3.39 “LC” Outdoor Unit: Malfunction of Transmission between Inverter
and Control PC Board ..........................................................................187
3.40 “P1” Outdoor Unit: High Voltage of Capacitor in Main Inverter Circuit...188
3.41 “U0” Low Pressure Drop Due to Refrigerant Shortage or
Electronic Expansion Valve Failure......................................................189
3.42 “U2” Power Supply Insufficient or Instantaneous Failure......................191
3.43 “U3” Check Operation not Executed .....................................................193
3.44 “U4” Malfunction of Transmission between Indoor Units and Outdoor Units 194
3.45 “U5” Malfunction of Transmission between Remote Control and Indoor Unit 196
3.46 “U8” Malfunction of Transmission between Main and Sub Remote Controls 197
3.47 “U9” Malfunction of Transmission between Indoor and Outdoor
Units in the Same System ....................................................................198
3.48 “UA” Excessive Number of Indoor Units................................................200
3.49 “UC” Address Duplication of Central Remote Control ...........................201
3.50 “UE” Malfunction of Transmission between Central Remote Control
and Indoor Unit.....................................................................................202
3.51 “UF” System is not Set yet ....................................................................203
3.52 “UH” Malfunction of System, Refrigerant System Address Undefined ..204
Table of Contents iii

SiENBE34-802
4. Troubleshooting by Indication on the Centralized Remote Control ...............205

4.1 “UE” Malfunction of Transmission between Centralized Remote
Control and Indoor Unit ........................................................................205
4.2 “M1” PC Board Defect ............................................................................206
4.3 “M8” Malfunction of Transmission between Optional Controllers
for Centralized Control .........................................................................207
4.4 “MA” Improper Combination of Optional Controllers for Centralized Control 208
4.5 “MC” Address Duplication, Improper Setting..........................................210
5. Troubleshooting by Indication on the Unified ON/OFF Controller .................211
5.1 Operation Lamp Blinks .........................................................................211
5.2 Display “Under Host Computer Integrate Control” Blinks
(Repeats Single Blink)..........................................................................213
(Repeats Double Blink) ........................................................................216
Part 8 Appendix......................................................................... 221

1. Piping Diagrams..................................................................................222
1.1 Outdoor Unit .........................................................................................222
1.2 Indoor Unit............................................................................................224
2. Wiring Diagrams..................................................................................227
2.1 Outdoor Unit .........................................................................................227
2.2 Field Wiring ..........................................................................................229
2.3 Indoor Unit............................................................................................231
3. Option List .....................................................................................................246
3.1 Option List of Controllers......................................................................246
3.2 Option List of Outdoor Unit...................................................................248
4. Example of connection........................................................................249
5. Thermistor Resistance / Temperature Characteristics ..................................251
6. Pressure Sensor ............................................................................................253
7. Method of Replacing the Inverter’s Power Transistors Modules ...................254
Part 9 Precautions for New Refrigerant (R-410A) .................... 257

1. Precautions for New Refrigerant (R-410A) ....................................................258
1.1 Outline ..................................................................................................258
1.2 Refrigerant Cylinders............................................................................260
1.3 Service Tools........................................................................................261
Index ............................................................................................. i
Drawings & Flow Charts ............................................................... iii
iv Table of Contents
Introduction SiENBE34-802
1. Introduction
1.1 Safety Cautions
Cautions and Be sure to read the following safety cautions before conducting repair work.
Warnings The caution items are classified into “ Warning” and “ Caution”. The “ Warning”
items are especially important since they can lead to death or serious injury if they are not
followed closely. The “ Caution” items can also lead to serious accidents under some
conditions if they are not followed. Therefore, be sure to observe all the safety caution items
described below.
About the pictograms
This symbol indicates an item for which caution must be exercised.
The pictogram shows the item to which attention must be paid.
This symbol indicates a prohibited action.
The prohibited item or action is shown inside or near the symbol.
This symbol indicates an action that must be taken, or an instruction.
The instruction is shown inside or near the symbol.
After the repair work is complete, be sure to conduct a test operation to ensure that the
equipment operates normally, and explain the cautions for operating the product to the
customer
1.1.1 Caution in Repair
Warning
Be sure to disconnect the power cable plug from the plug socket before
disassembling the equipment for a repair.
Working on the equipment that is connected to a power supply can cause an
electrical shook.
If it is necessary to supply power to the equipment to conduct the repair or
inspecting the circuits, do not touch any electrically charged sections of the
equipment.
If the refrigerant gas discharges during the repair work, do not touch the
discharging refrigerant gas.
The refrigerant gas can cause frostbite.
When disconnecting the suction or discharge pipe of the compressor at the

welded section, release the refrigerant gas completely at a well-ventilated
place first.
If there is a gas remaining inside the compressor, the refrigerant gas or
refrigerating machine oil discharges when the pipe is disconnected, and it can
cause injury.
If the refrigerant gas leaks during the repair work, ventilate the area. The
refrigerant gas can generate toxic gases when it contacts flames.
The step-up capacitor supplies high-voltage electricity to the electrical

components of the outdoor unit.
Be sure to discharge the capacitor completely before conducting repair work.
A charged capacitor can cause an electrical shock.
Do not start or stop the air conditioner operation by plugging or unplugging the
power cable plug.
Plugging or unplugging the power cable plug to operate the equipment can
cause an electrical shock or fire.
vi
SiENBE34-802 Introduction
Caution
Do not repair the electrical components with wet hands.
Working on the equipment with wet hands can cause an electrical shock.
Do not clean the air conditioner by splashing water.

Washing the unit with water can cause an electrical shock.
Be sure to provide the grounding when repairing the equipment in a humid or

wet place, to avoid electrical shocks.
Be sure to turn off the power switch and unplug the power cable when cleaning
the equipment.
The internal fan rotates at a high speed, and cause injury.
Do not tilt the unit when removing it.

The water inside the unit can spill and wet the furniture and floor.
Be sure to check that the refrigerating cycle section has cooled down
sufficiently before conducting repair work.
Working on the unit when the refrigerating cycle section is hot can cause burns.
Use the welder in a well-ventilated place.
Using the welder in an enclosed room can cause oxygen deficiency.
1.1.2 Cautions Regarding Products after Repair

Warning
Be sure to use parts listed in the service parts list of the applicable model and
appropriate tools to conduct repair work. Never attempt to modify the
equipment.
The use of inappropriate parts or tools can cause an electrical shock,
excessive heat generation or fire.
When relocating the equipment, make sure that the new installation site has
sufficient strength to withstand the weight of the equipment.
If the installation site does not have sufficient strength and if the installation
work is not conducted securely, the equipment can fall and cause injury.
Be sure to install the product correctly by using the provided standard For integral units
installation frame. only
Incorrect use of the installation frame and improper installation can cause the
equipment to fall, resulting in injury.
Be sure to install the product securely in the installation frame mounted on a For integral units
window frame. only
If the unit is not securely mounted, it can fall and cause injury.
Be sure to use an exclusive power circuit for the equipment, and follow the
technical standards related to the electrical equipment, the internal wiring
regulations and the instruction manual for installation when conducting
electrical work.
Insufficient power circuit capacity and improper electrical work can cause an
electrical shock or fire.
vii
Warning
Be sure to use the specified cable to connect between the indoor and outdoor
units. Make the connections securely and route the cable properly so that there
is no force pulling the cable at the connection terminals.
Improper connections can cause excessive heat generation or fire.
When connecting the cable between the indoor and outdoor units, make sure
that the terminal cover does not lift off or dismount because of the cable.
If the cover is not mounted properly, the terminal connection section can cause
an electrical shock, excessive heat generation or fire.
Do not damage or modify the power cable.
Damaged or modified power cable can cause an electrical shock or fire.
Placing heavy items on the power cable, and heating or pulling the power cable
can damage the cable.
Do not mix air or gas other than the specified refrigerant (R-410A) in the
refrigerant system.
If air enters the refrigerating system, an excessively high pressure results,
causing equipment damage and injury.
If the refrigerant gas leaks, be sure to locate the leak and repair it before
charging the refrigerant. After charging refrigerant, make sure that there is no
refrigerant leak.
If the leak cannot be located and the repair work must be stopped, be sure to
perform pump-down and close the service valve, to prevent the refrigerant gas
from leaking into the room. The refrigerant gas itself is harmless, but it can
generate toxic gases when it contacts flames, such as fan and other heaters,
stoves and ranges.
When replacing the coin battery in the Remote Control, be sure to disposed of
the old battery to prevent children from swallowing it.
If a child swallows the coin battery, see a doctor immediately.
Caution
Installation of a leakage breaker is necessary in some cases depending on the
conditions of the installation site, to prevent electrical shocks.
Do not install the equipment in a place where there is a possibility of
combustible gas leaks.
If a combustible gas leaks and remains around the unit, it can cause a fire.
Be sure to install the packing and seal on the installation frame properly. For integral units
If the packing and seal are not installed properly, water can enter the room and only
wet the furniture and floor.
1.1.3 Inspection after Repair

Warning
Check to make sure that the power cable plug is not dirty or loose, then insert
the plug into a power outlet all the way.
If the plug has dust or loose connection, it can cause an electrical shock or fire.
If the power cable and lead wires have scratches or deteriorated, be sure to
replace them.
Damaged cable and wires can cause an electrical shock, excessive heat
generation or fire.
Do not use a joined power cable or extension cable, or share the same power
outlet with other electrical appliances, since it can cause an electrical shock,
excessive heat generation or fire.
viii
SiENBE34-802 Introduction
Caution
Check to see if the parts and wires are mounted and connected properly, and
if the connections at the soldered or crimped terminals are secure.
Improper installation and connections can cause excessive heat generation,
fire or an electrical shock.
If the installation platform or frame has corroded, replace it.
Corroded installation platform or frame can cause the unit to fall, resulting in
injury.
Check the grounding, and repair it if the equipment is not properly grounded.
Improper grounding can cause an electrical shock.
Be sure to measure the insulation resistance after the repair, and make sure
that the resistance is 1 Mohm or higher.
Faulty insulation can cause an electrical shock.
Be sure to check the drainage of the indoor unit after the repair.
Faulty drainage can cause the water to enter the room and wet the furniture
and floor.
1.1.4 Using Icons

Icons are used to attract the attention of the reader to specific information. The meaning of each
icon is described in the table below:
1.1.5 Using Icons List

Icon Type of Description
Information
Note A “note” provides information that is not indispensable, but may
nevertheless be valuable to the reader, such as tips and tricks.
Note:
Caution A “caution” is used when there is danger that the reader, through
incorrect manipulation, may damage equipment, loose data, get
Caution an unexpected result or has to restart (part of) a procedure.
Warning A “warning” is used when there is danger of personal injury.

Warning
Reference A “reference” guides the reader to other places in this binder or

in this manual, where he/she will find additional information on a
specific topic.
ix
1.2 PREFACE
Thank you for your continued patronage of Daikin products.
This is the new service manual for Daikin's Year 2008 VRVIII-S series Heat Pump System.
Daikin offers a wide range of models to respond to building and office air conditioning needs.
We are confident that customers will be able to find the models that best suit their needs.
This service manual contains information regarding the servicing of VRVIII-S series R-410A
Heat Pump System.
July, 2008
After Sales Service Division
x
SiENBE34-802
Part 1
General Information
1. Model Names of Indoor/Outdoor Units....................................................2

2. External Appearance...............................................................................3
2.1 Indoor Units ..............................................................................................3
3. Capacity Range.......................................................................................4
General Information 1
Model Names of Indoor/Outdoor Units SiENBE34-802
1. Model Names of Indoor/Outdoor Units

*Indoor Units
Type Model Name Power Supply
Ceiling Mounted
Cassette Type FXCQ 20M 25M 32M 40M 50M 63M 80M — 125M V3
(Double Flow)
Ceiling Mounted
Cassette Type FXFQ 20P 25P 32P 40P 50P 63P 80P 100P 125P VE
(Round Flow)
600×600 Ceiling
Mounted Cassette FXZQ 20M 25M 32M 40M 50M — — — — V1
Type (Mult Flow)
Ceiling Mounted
Cassette Corner FXKQ — 25MA 32MA 40MA — 63MA — — —
Type
VE
FXDQ 20P 25P 32P 40NA 50NA 63NA — — —
Slim Ceiling
Mounted Duct
Type FXDQ- 20M8 25M8 — — — — — — — V3
M8
Ceiling Mounted FXSQ 20M 25M 32M 40M 50M 63M 80M 100M 125M V3
Built-In Type
Ceiling Mounted FXMQ — — — 40P 50P 63P 80P 100P 125P

Duct Type
Ceiling Suspended FXHQ — — 32MA — — 63MA — 100MA —

Type
Wall Mounted FXAQ 20MA 25MA 32MA 40MA 50MA 63MA — — — VE

Type
Floor Standing FXLQ 20MA 25MA 32MA 40MA 50MA 63MA — — —

Type
Concealed Floor FXNQ 20MA 25MA 32MA 40MA 50MA 63MA — — —

Standing Type
Ceiling Suspended
Cassette Type FXUQ — — — — — — 71MA 100MA 125MA V1
BEVQ-
Connection Unit — — — — — — 71MA 100MA 125MA VE
M(A)
Note: BEV unit is required for FXUQ only.
VE :1φ, 220~240V, 50Hz, 1φ, 220V, 60Hz
V1 :1φ, 220~240V, 50Hz
V3 :1φ, 230V, 50Hz
Outdoor Units
Series Model Name Power Supply
Inverter Heat Pump RXYSQ 4PA 5PA 6PA Y1, V1
Y1 :3φ, 380~415V, 50Hz

V1 :1φ, 220~240V, 50Hz
2 General Information
SiENBE34-802 External Appearance
2. External Appearance
2.1 Indoor Units
Ceiling Mounted Cassette Type (Double Flow) Ceiling Mounted Duct Type
FXCQ20M8 FXMQ40P
FXCQ25M8 FXMQ50P
FXCQ32M8 FXMQ63P
FXCQ40M8 FXMQ80P
FXCQ50M8 FXMQ100P
FXCQ63M8 FXMQ125P
FXCQ80M8
FXCQ125M8
Ceiling Mounted Cassette Type (Round Flow) Ceiling Suspended Type
FXFQ20P7 FXHQ32MA
FXFQ25P7 FXHQ63MA
FXFQ32P7 FXHQ100MA
FXFQ40P7
FXFQ50P7
FXFQ63P7
FXFQ80P7
FXFQ100P7
FXFQ125P7
600×600 Ceiling Mounted Wall Mounted Type
Cassette Type (Multi Flow)
FXAQ20MA
FXZQ20M8 FXAQ25MA
FXZQ25M8 FXAQ32MA
FXZQ32M8 FXAQ40MA
FXZQ40M8 FXAQ50MA
FXZQ50M8 FXAQ63MA
Ceiling Mounted Cassette Corner Type Floor Standing Type

FXKQ25MA FXLQ20MA
FXKQ32MA FXLQ25MA
FXKQ40MA FXLQ32MA
FXKQ63MA FXLQ40MA
FXLQ50MA
FXLQ63MA
Slim Ceiling Mounted Duct Type Concealed Floor Standing Type

FXDQ20P FXNQ20MA
FXDQ25P FXNQ25MA
FXDQ32P FXNQ32MA
FXDQ40NA FXNQ40MA
FXDQ50NA FXNQ50MA
FXDQ63NA FXNQ63MA
Ceiling Concealed Type (small) Ceiling Suspended Cassette Type

(Connection Unit Series)
FXDQ20M8
FXDQ25M8 FXUQ71MA + BEVQ71MA
FXUQ100MA + BEVQ100MA
FXUQ125MA + BEVQ125MA
Connection Unit
Ceiling Mounted Built-In Type
FXSQ20M
FXSQ25M
FXSQ32M
FXSQ40M
FXSQ50M
FXSQ63M
FXSQ80M
FXSQ100M
FXSQ125M
General Information 3
Capacity Range SiENBE34-802
3. Capacity Range
Outdoor Units
Capacity Range 4HP 5HP 6HP
RXYSQ 4PA 5PA 6PA
No of Indoor
Units to be 6 8 9
Connected
Total Capacity
Index of Indoor 50~130 62.5~162.5 70~182
Units to be
Connected
Indoor Units
Capacity Range 0.8HP 1HP 1.25HP 1.6HP 2HP 2.5HP 3.2HP 4HP 5HP
Capacity Index 20 25 31.25 40 50 62.5 80 100 125
Ceiling Mounted
Cassette Type FXCQ 20M 25M 32M 40M 50M 63M 80M — 125M
(Double Flow)
Ceiling Mounted
Cassette Type FXFQ 20P 25P 32P 40P 50P 63P 80P 100P 125P
(Round Flow)
600×600 Ceiling
Mounted Cassette FXZQ 20M 25M 32M 40M 50M — — — —
Type (Multi Flow)
Ceiling Mounted
Cassette Corner Type FXKQ — 25MA 32MA 40MA — 63MA — — —
FXDQ 20P 25P 32P 40NA 50NA 63NA — — —

Slim Ceiling Mounted
Duct Type
FXDQ-M8 20M8 25M8 — — — — — — —
Ceiling Mounted
Built-In Type FXSQ 20M 25M 32M 40M 50M 63M 80M 100M 125M
Ceiling Mounted
Duct Type FXMQ — — — 40P 50P 63P 80P 100P 125P
Ceiling Suspended
Type FXHQ — — 32MA — — 63MA — 100MA —
Wall Mounted Type FXAQ 20MA 25MA 32MA 40MA 50MA 63MA — — —
Floor Standing Type FXLQ 20MA 25MA 32MA 40MA 50MA 63MA — — —
Concealed Floor
Standing Type FXNQ 20MA 25MA 32MA 40MA 50MA 63MA — — —
Ceiling Suspended
Cassette Type FXUQ — — — — — — 71MA 100MA 125MA
4 General Information
SiENBE34-802
Part 2
Specifications
1. Specifications ..........................................................................................6
1.1 Outdoor Units ...........................................................................................6
1.2 Indoor Units ............................................................................................10
Specifications 5
Specifications SiENBE34-802
1. Specifications
1.1 Outdoor Units
Heat Pump 50Hz <RXYSQ-PA7Y1B>
1-1 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS RXYSQ4PA7Y1B RXYSQ5PA7Y1B RXYSQ6PA7Y1B
Cooling kW 11.2 14.0 15.5
Capacity
Heating kW 12.5 16.0 18.0
Cooling 3.88 3.88 3.33
COP
Heating 4.43 4.03 3.83
Capacity range HP 4 5 6
PED category Category I
Max n° of indoor units to be connected 6 8 9
Indoor index Minimum 50 62.5 70
connection Maximum 130 162.5 182
Colour Daikin White
Casing
Material Painted galvanised steel
Height mm 1,524
Packing Width mm 980 980 980
Depth mm 420 420 420
Dimensions
Height mm 1,345
Unit Width mm 900 900 900
Depth mm 320 320 320
Unit kg 120 120 120
Weight
Packed Unit kg 130 130 130
Material Carton, wood + EPS
Packing
Weight kg 8 8 8
Length mm 857 857 857
Nr of Rows 2 2 2
Fin Pitch mm 2 2 2
Dimensions
Nr of Passes 10 10 10
Heat Face Area m² 1,131
Exchanger
Nr of Stages 60 60 60
Tube type Hi-XSS (8)
Fin type Non-symmetric waffle louvre
Fin
Treatment Corrosion resistant
Type Propeller
Quantity 2 2 2
Air Flow Rate Cooling m³/min 106 106 106
Fan (nominal at 230V) Heating m³/min 102 105 105
Discharge direction Horizontal
Quantity 2 2 2
Motor
Model Brushless DC motor
Speed Cooling rpm 850/815
Motor
(nominal) Heating rpm 820/785 840/805 840/805
Drive Direct drive
Fan Motor
Output motor W 70 70 70
Quantity 1 1 1
Quantity 1 1 1
Model JT100G-VDLYR
Type Hermetically sealed scroll compressor
Compressor Speed rpm 6,480
Motor
Motor Output kW 2.5 3.0 3.5
Starting Method Direct on line
Crankcase W
33 33 33
Heater
Cooling Standard Min °CDB -5 -5 -5
Cooling Max °CDB 46 46 46
Operation
Range Min °CWB -20 -20 -20
Heating
Max °CWB 15.5 15.5 15.5
6 Specifications
SiENBE34-802 Specifications
1-1 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS RXYSQ4PA7Y1B RXYSQ5PA7Y1B RXYSQ6PA7Y1B

Sound Power
dBA 66 67 69
(Nominal)
Cooling Sound
Pressure dBA 50 51 53
Sound level
(Nominal)
Sound
Heating Pressure dBA 52 53 55
(Nominal)
Name R-410A
Charge kg 4.0 4.0 4.0
Refrigerant
Control Expansion valve (electronic type)
Nr of Circuits 1 1 1
Refrigerant Name Daphne FVC68D
Oil Charged Volume l 1.5 1.5 1.5
Type Flare connection
Liquid
(OD) Diameter
mm 9.52 9.52 9.52
(OD)
Type Flare connection Flare connection Braze connection
Gas Diameter
Piping (OD) mm 15.9 15.9 19.1
connections
Quantity 3 3 3
Drain Diameter
mm 26 × 3
(OD)
Heat Insulation Both liquid and gas pipes
Max total length m 300 300 300
Defrost Method Reversed cycle
Defrost Control Sensor for outdoor heat exchanger temperature
Capacity Control Method Inverter controlled
Capacity Control 24 to 100
Safety devices HPS, Fan motor thermal protection, Inverter overload protector, PC board fuse
Installation manual, Operation manual,
Standard Accessories Installation manual, Operation manual
Connection pipes
Nominal cooling capacities are based on : indoor temperature : 27°CDB, 19°CWB, outdoor temperature : 35°CDB,
equivalent refrigerant piping : 5m, level difference : 0m.
Nominal heating capacities are based on: indoor temperature: 20°CDB, outdoor temperature: 7°CDB, 6°CWB, equivalent
refrigerant piping: 5m, level difference: 0m.
Notes
Sound power level is an absolute value that a sound source generates.
Sound pressure level is a relative value, depending on the distance and acoustic environment. For more details, please
refer to sound level drawings.
Sound values are measured in a semi-anechoic room.
Specifications 7
Heat pump 50Hz <RXYSQ-PA7V1B>

1-1 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS RXYSQ4PA7V1B RXYSQ5PA7V1B RXYSQ6PA7V1B
Cooling kW 11.2 14.0 15.5
Capacity
Heating kW 12.5 16.0 18.0
Cooling 3.99 3.99 3.42
COP
Heating 4.56 4.15 3.94
Capacity range HP 4 5 6
PED category Category I
Max n° of indoor units to be connected 6 8 9
Indoor index Minimum 50 62.5 70
connection Maximum 130 162.5 182
Colour Daikin White
Casing
Material Painted galvanised steel
Height mm 1,524
Depth mm 420 420 420
Dimensions
Height mm 1,345
Depth mm 320 320 320
Unit kg 120 120 120
Weight
Material Carton, wood + EPS
Packing
Weight kg 8 8 8
Length mm 857 857 857
Nr of Rows 2 2 2
Fin Pitch mm 2 2 2
Dimensions
Nr of Passes 10 10 10
Heat Face Area m² 1,131
Exchanger
Fin type Non-symmetric waffle louvre
Fin
Treatment Corrosion resistant
Type Propeller
Quantity 2 2 2
Air Flow Rate Cooling m³/min 106 106 106
Fan (nominal at 230V) Heating m³/min 102 105 105
Discharge direction Horizontal
Quantity 2 2 2
Motor
Model Brushless DC motor
Speed Cooling rpm 850/815
Motor (nominal) Heating rpm 820/785 840/805 840/805
Drive Direct drive
Fan Motor
Output motor W 70 70 70
Quantity 1 1 1
Quantity 1 1 1
Model JT100G-VDL
Type Hermetically sealed scroll compressor
Compressor Speed rpm 6,480
Motor
Motor Output kW 2.5 3.0 3.5
Starting Method Direct on line
Crankcase W 33 33 33
Heater
Cooling Standard Min °CDB -5 -5 -5
Cooling Max °CDB 46 46 46
Operation
Min °CWB -20 -20 -20
Range Heating
Max °CWB 15.5 15.5 15.5
Sound Power dBA 66 67 69
Cooling
Sound Level Sound Pressure dBA 50 51 53
Heating Sound Pressure dBA 52 53 55
8 Specifications
1-1 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS RXYSQ4PA7V1B RXYSQ5PA7V1B RXYSQ6PA7V1B

Name R-410A
Charge kg 4.0 4.0 4.0
Refrigerant
Control Expansion valve (electronic type)
N× of circuits 1 1 1
Refrigerant Name Daphne FVC68D
Oil Charged Volume l 1.5 1.5 1.5
Liquid
(OD) Diameter
(OD) mm 9.52 9.52 9.52
Type Flare connection Flare connection Braze connection

Gas Diameter
Piping mm 15.9 15.9 19.1
(OD)
connections
Quantity 3 3 3
Drain Diameter
mm 26 × 3
(OD)
Max total length m 300 300 300
Defrost Method Reversed cycle
Defrost Control Sensor for outdoor heat exchanger temperature
Capacity Control Method Inverter controlled
Capacity Control 24 to 100
Safety devices HPS, Fan motor thermal protection, Inverter overload protector, PC board fuse
Installation manual, Operation manual,
Standard Accessories Installation manual, Operation manual
Connection pipes
8 meter 1
Notes
Sound pressure
Sound values
Sound values are measured in a semi-anechoic room.
Specifications 9
1.2 Indoor Units

Ceiling Mounted Cassette Type (Double Flow)
1-1 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FXCQ20M8V3B FXCQ25M8V3B FXCQ32M8V3B FXCQ40M8V3B FXCQ50M8V3B
Nominal Cooling kW 2.20 2.80 3.60 4.50 5.60
Capacity Heating kW 2.50 3.20 4.00 5.00 6.30
Power input Cooling kW 0.077 0.092 0.092 0.130 0.130
(Nominal) Heating kW 0.044 0.059 0.059 0.097 0.097
Colour Non painted
Casing
Material Galvanised steel
Height mm 405 405 405 405 405
Packing Width mm 1060 1060 1060 1280 1280
Depth mm 665 665 665 665 665
Dimensions
Height mm 305 305 305 305 305
Unit Width mm 780 780 780 995 995
Depth mm 600 600 600 600 600
Unit kg 26 26 26 31 32
Weight
Packed Unit kg 30 30 30 37 38
Required Ceiling Void mm 350 350 350 350 350
Length mm 475×2 475×2 475×2 690×2 475×2
Nr of Rows 2×2
Fin Pitch mm 1.50 1.50 1.50 1.50 1.50
Nr of Passes 3×2
Dimensions
Face Area m² 0.1×2 0.1×2 0.1×2 0.145×2 0.145×2
Heat
Exchanger Nr of Stages 10×2
Empty Tubeplate
6
Hole
Fin type Symmetric waffle louvre
Fin
Treatment Hydrophilic
Type Sirocco fan
Fan
Quantity 1 1 1 2 2
High m³/min 7.0 9.0 9.0 12.0 12.0
Cooling
Low m³/min 5.0 6.5 6.5 9.0 9.0
Air Flow Rate
High m³/min 7.0 9.0 9.0 12.0 12.0
Heating
Low m³/min 5.0 6.5 6.5 9.0 9.0
Quantity 1 1 1 1 1
Steps Phase cut control
Fan Motor Output
W 10 15 15 20 20
(high)
Drive Direct drive
Refrigerant Name R-410A
Sound
Sound Level Cooling power dBA 45.0 50.0 50.0 50.0 50.0
(nominal)
Sound High dBA 33.0 35.0 35.0 35.5 35.5
Cooling
Pressure Low dBA 28.0 29.0 29.0 30.5 30.5
Sound High dBA 33.0 35.0 35.0 35.5 35.5
Heating
Pressure Low dBA 28.0 29.0 29.0 30.5 30.5
Liquid (OD)
Diameter mm 6.35 6.35 6.35 6.35 6.35
Piping Type Flare connection
Gas
connections Diameter mm 12.7 12.7 12.7 12.7 12.7
Drain Diameter mm 32 32 32 32 32
Model BYBC32GJW1 BYBC32GJW1 BYBC32GJW1 BYBC50GJW1 BYBC50GJW1
Colour White (10Y9/0,5)
Decoration Height mm 53 53 53 53 53
Panel Dimensions Width mm 1030 1030 1030 1245 1245
Depth mm 680 680 680 680 680
Weight kg 8.0 8.0 8.0 8.5 8.5
Drain-up Height mm 600 600 600 600 600
10 Specifications
1-1 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FXCQ20M8V3B FXCQ25M8V3B FXCQ32M8V3B FXCQ40M8V3B FXCQ50M8V3B

Air Filter Resin net with mold resistance
Air direction control Up and downwards
Refrigerant control Electronic expansion valve
Temperature control Microprocessor thermostat for cooling and heating
Safety devices PC board fuse, Fan motor thermal fuse, Drain pump fuse
Screws for fixing the paper pattern for installation, Washer for hanging bracket, Installation and operation manual, Paper
Standard Accessories
pattern for installation, Insulation for fitting, Drain hose
Nominal cooling capacities are based on : indoor temperature : 270CDB, 190CWB, outdoor temperature : 350CDB,
Notes Nominal heating capacities are based on : indoor temperature : 200CDB, outdoor temperature : 70CDB, 60CWB,
Capacities are net, including a deduction for cooling (an addition for heating) for indoor fan motor heat.
Specifications 11
Ceiling Mounted Cassette Type (Double Flow)

1-1 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FXCQ63M8V3B FXCQ80M8V3B FXCQ125M8V3B
Nominal Cooling kW 7.10 9.00 14.00
Capacity Heating kW 8.00 10.00 16.00
Power input Cooling kW 0.161 0.209 0.256
(Nominal) Heating kW 0.126 0.176 0.223
Colour Non painted
Casing
Height mm 405 405 405
Depth mm 665 645 645
Dimensions
Height mm 305 305 305
Unit Width mm 1180 1670 1670
Depth mm 600 600 600
Unit kg 35 47 48
Weight
Required Ceiling Void mm 350 350 350
Length mm 875×2 1365 1365
Nr of Rows 2×2
Fin Pitch mm 1.50 1.50 1.50
Dimensions Nr of Passes 6×2 5×2 6

Face Area m² 0.184×2 0.287×2 0.287×2
Heat
Exchanger Nr of Stages 10×2
Empty Tubeplate
8
Hole
Fin
Type Sirocco fan
Fan
Quantity 2 3 3
High m³/min 16.5 26.0 33.0
Cooling
Low m³/min 13.0 21.0 25.0
Air Flow Rate
High m³/min 16.5 26.0 33.0
Heating
Low m³/min 13.0 21.0 25.0
Quantity 1 1 1
Steps Phase cut control
Fan Motor Output
(high) W 30 50 85
Drive Direct drive

Sound
Sound Level Cooling power dBA 52.0 54.0 60.0
(nominal)
Sound High dBA 38.0 40.0 45.0
Cooling Pressure Low dBA 33.0 35.0 39.0
Heating
Pressure Low dBA 33.0 35.0 39.0
Liquid (OD)
Diameter mm 9.5 9.5 9.5
Gas
connections Diameter mm 15.9 15.9 15.9
Drain Diameter mm 32 32 32
Model BYBC63GJW1 BYBC125GJW1 BYBC125GJW1
Decoration Height mm 53 53 53
Panel Dimensions Width mm 1430 1920 1920
Depth mm 680 680 680
Weight kg 9.5 12.0 12.0
Drain-up Height mm 600 600 600
PC board fuse, Fan motor thermal fuse,
Safety devices Drain pump fuse PC board fuse, Fan motor thermal protector, Drain pump fuse
Screws for fixing the paper pattern for installation, Washer for hanging bracket, Clamps, Installation and operation manual,
Paper pattern for installation, Insulation for fitting, Drain hose
Notes Nominal heating capacities are based on : indoor temperature : 20°CDB, outdoor temperature : 7°CDB, 6°CWB,
12 Specifications
Ceiling Mounted Cassette Type (Round-flow)

1-1 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FXFQ20P7VEB FXFQ25P7VEB FXFQ32P7VEB FXFQ40P7VEB FXFQ50P7VEB
Cooling kW 2.2 2.8 3.6 4.5 5.6
Capacity
Heating kW 2.5 3.2 4.0 5.0 6.3
Cooling kW 0.053 0.053 0.053 0.063 0.083
Power Input
Heating kW 0.045 0.045 0.045 0.055 0.067
Casing Material Galvanised steel
Height mm 220 220 220 220 220
Packing Width mm 882 882 882 882 882
Depth mm 882 882 882 882 882
Dimensions
Height mm 204 204 204 204 204
Unit Width mm 840 840 840 840 840
Depth mm 840 840 840 840 840
Unit kg 20.0 20.0 20.0 20.0 21.0
Weight
Packed Unit kg 24.0 24.0 24.0 24.0 26.0
Inside mm 2,096
Dimensions Length
Outside mm 2,152
Nr of Rows 2 2 2 2 2
Fin Pitch mm 1.2 1.2 1.2 1.2 1.2
Nr of Passes 2 2 3 3 7
Heat Dimensions Face Area m² 0.267 0.267 0.267 0.267 0.357
Exchanger
Nr of Stages 6 6 6 6 8
Empty Tubeplate
4 4
Hole
Fin Fin type Cross fin coil (Multi louver fins and Hi-XSS tubes)
Type Turbo fan
Fan
Quantity 1 1 1 1 1
High m³/min 12.5 12.5 12.5 13.5 15.5
Cooling
Low m³/min 9.0 9.0 9.0 9.0 10.0
Air Flow Rate
High m³/min 12.5 12.5 12.5 13.5 15.0
Heating
Low m³/min 9.0 9.0 9.0 9.0 9.5
Model QTS48D11M
Fan Motor Steps 2 2 2 2 2

Output
W 56 56 56 56 56
(high)
Sound
Sound Level Cooling power dBA 49 49 49 50 51
(nominal)
Sound High dBA 31 31 31 32 33
Cooling Pressure Low dBA 28 28 28 28 28
Sound High dBA 31 31 31 32 33
Heating
Pressure Low dBA 28 28 28 28 28
Liquid (OD)
Diameter mm 6.35 6.4 6.4 6.4 6.4
Piping Gas
Diameter mm 12.7 12.7 12.7 12.7 12.7
connections
Drain Diameter mm VP25 (I.D. 25/O.D. 32)
Heat Insulation Foamed polystyrene/polyethylene
Sound absorbing insulation (Foamed Polyurethane)
Model BYCQ140CW1
Colour RAL9010
Depth mm 950 950 950 950 950
Weight kg 5.5 5.5 5.5 5.5 5.5
Installation and operation manual, Drain hose, Washer for hanging bracket, Screws, Sealing Pads, Insulation for fitting,
Clamp for drain hose, Installation guide, Drain sealing pad
The sound pressure values are mentioned for a unit installed with rear suction
The sound power level is an absolute value indicating the power wich a sound source generates.
Notes equivalent refrigerant piping : 5m, level difference : 0m.
Nominal heating capacities are based on : indoor temperature : 20°CDB, outdoor temperature : 7°CDB, 6°CWB,
equivalent refrigerant piping : 5m (horizontal)
Specifications 13
Ceiling Mounted Cassette Type (Round-flow)

1-1 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FXFQ63P7VEB FXFQ80P7VEB FXFQ100P7VEB FXFQ125P7VEB
Cooling kW 7.1 9.0 11.2 14.0
Capacity
Heating kW 8.0 10.0 12.5 16.0
Cooling kW 0.095 0.120 0.173 0.258
Power Input
Heating kW 0.114 0.108 0.176 0.246
Height mm 220 262 262 304
Packing Width mm 882 882 882 882
Depth mm 882 882 882 882
Dimensions
Height mm 204 246 246 288
Unit Width mm 840 840 840 840
Depth mm 840 840 840 840
Unit kg 21.0 24.0 24.0 26.0
Weight
Packed Unit kg 26.0 28.0 28.0 31.0
Inside mm 2,096
Dimensions Length
Outside mm 2,152
Nr of Rows 2 2 2 2
Fin Pitch mm 1.2 1.2 1.2 1.2
Heat Dimensions Nr of Passes 7 9 9 11
Exchanger Face Area m² 0.357 0.446 0.446 0.535
Nr of Stages 8 10 10 12
Fin Fin type Cross fin coil (Multi louver fins and Hi-XSS tubes)
Type Turbo fan
Fan
Quantity 1 1 1 1
High m³/min 16.5 23.5 26.5 33.0
Cooling
Low m³/min 11.0 14.5 17.0 20.0
Air Flow Rate
High m³/min 17.5 23.5 28.0 33.0
Heating
Low m³/min 12.0 14.5 17.5 20.0
Model QTS48D11M QTS48C15M QTS48C15M QTS48C15M
Steps 2 2 2 2
Fan Motor
Output W 56 120 120 120
(high)
Sound
Sound Level Cooling power dBA 52 55 58 61
(nominal)
Sound High dBA 34 38 41 44
Cooling Pressure Low dBA 29 32 33 34
Sound High dBA 36 38 42 44
Heating
Pressure Low dBA 30 32 34 34
Liquid (OD)
Diameter mm 9.5 9.5 9.5 9.5
Piping Gas
Diameter mm 15.9 15.9 15.9 15.9
connections
Sound absorbing insulation (Foamed Polyurethane)
Model BYCQ140CW1
Colour RAL9010
Decoration Height mm 50 50 50 50
Panel Dimensions Width mm 950 950 950 950
Depth mm 950 950 950 950
Weight kg 5.5 5.5 5.5 5.5
Installation and operation manual, Drain hose, Washer for hanging bracket, Screws, Sealing Pads, Insulation for fitting,
Clamp for drain hose, Installation guide, Drain sealing pad
The sound power level is an absolute value indicating the power wich a sound source generates.
Notes equivalent refrigerant piping : 5m, level difference : 0m.
14 Specifications
600×600 Ceiling Mounted Cassette Type (Multi Flow)

1-1 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FXZQ20M8V1B FXZQ25M8V1B FXZQ32M8V1B FXZQ40M8V1B FXZQ50M8V1B
Nominal Cooling kW 2.20 2.80 3.60 4.50 5.60
Capacity Heating kW 2.50 3.20 4.00 5.00 6.30
Height mm 286 286 286 286 286
Dimensions Unit Width mm 575 575 575 575 575
Depth mm 575 575 575 575 575
Weight Unit kg 18 18 18 18 18
Heat Fin Pitch mm 1.50 1.50 1.50 1.50 1.50
Dimensions
Exchanger Face Area m² 0.269 0.269 0.269 0.269 0.269
Nr of Stages 10 10 10 10 10
Type Turbo fan
Fan
Quantity 1 1 1 1 1
High m³/min 9.00 9.00 9.50 11.00 14.00
Air Flow Rate Cooling
Low m³/min 7.00 7.00 7.50 8.00 10.00
Quantity 1 1 1 1 1
Model QTS32C15M
Fan Motor Output
W 55 55 55 55 55
(high)
Drive Direct drive
Sound
(nominal)
Sound High dBA 30.0 30.0 32.0 36.0 41.0
Cooling
Pressure Low dBA 25.0 25.0 26.0 28.0 33.0
Liquid (OD)
Diameter mm 6.4 6.4 6.4 6.4 6.4
Gas
Model BYFQ60B7W1
Colour White (Ral 9010)
Depth mm 700 700 700 700 700
Weight kg 2.7 2.7 2.7 2.7 2.7
Safety devices PC board fuse, Fan motor thermal protector
Installation and operation manual, Paper pattern for installation, Drain hose, Clamp metal, Washer fixing plate,
Sealing Pads, Clamps, Screws, Washer for hanger bracket, Insulation for fitting
equivalent refrigerant piping : 7,5m (horizontal)
equivalent refrigerant piping : 7.5m (horizontal)
Specifications 15
Ceiling Mounted Cassette Corner Type

1-1 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FXKQ25MAVE FXKQ32MAVE FXKQ40MAVE FXKQ63MAVE
Nominal Cooling kW 2.80 3.60 4.50 7.10
Capacity Heating kW 3.20 4.00 5.00 8.00
Power input Cooling kW 0.066 0.066 0.076 0.105
(Nominal) Heating kW 0.046 0.046 0.056 0.085
Height mm 215 215 215 215
Dimensions Unit Width mm 1110 1110 1110 1310
Depth mm 710 710 710 710
Weight Unit kg 31 31 31 34
Nr of Rows 2 2 2 3
Heat Fin Pitch mm 1.75 1.75 1.75 1.75
Dimensions
Type Sirocco fan
Fan
Quantity 1 1 1 1
High m³/min 11.00 11.00 13.00 18.00
Low m³/min 9.00 9.00 10.00 15.00
Quantity 1 1 1 1
Model 3D12H1AN1V1 3D12H1AN1V1 3D12H1AP1V1 4D12H1AJ1V1
Fan Motor Output
W 15 15 20 45
(high)
Drive Direct drive
Sound High dBA 38.0 38.0 40.0 42.0
Cooling
Pressure Low dBA 33.0 33.0 34.0 37.0
Liquid (OD)
Diameter mm 6.4 6.4 6.4 9.5
Gas
connections Diameter mm 12.7 12.7 12.7 15.9
Drain Diameter mm 32 32 32 32
Heat Insulation Foamed Polyethylene
Model BYK45FJW1 BYK45FJW1 BYK45FJW1 BYK71FJW1
Colour White
Depth mm 800 800 800 800
Weight kg 8.5 8.5 8.5 9.5
Safety devices PC board fuse, Drain pump fuse, Fan motor thermal
Installation and operation manual, Metal clamp for drain hose, Clamps, Insulation for hangar bracket,
Standard Accessories Positioning Jig for Installation, Paper pattern for installation, Drain hose, Insulation for fitting, Sealing Pads, Screws,
Washer, Air Outlet blocking pad
Notes equivalent refrigerant piping : 7.5m (horizontal)
Sound pressure levels are measured at 220V
16 Specifications
Slim Ceiling Mounted Duct Type

1-1 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FXDQ20PVE FXDQ25PVE FXDQ32PVE FXDQ40NAVE FXDQ50NAVE FXDQ63NAVE
Nominal Cooling kW 2.20 2.80 3.60 4.50 5.60 7.10
Capacity Heating kW 2.50 3.20 4.00 5.00 6.30 8.00
Power input Cooling kW 0.086 0.086 0.089 0.160 0.165 0.181
(Nominal) Heating kW 0.067 0.067 0.070 0.147 0.152 0.168
Casing Material Galvanised steel plate
Height mm 200 200 200 200 200 200
Dimensions Unit Width mm 700 700 700 900 900 1100
Depth mm 620 620 620 620 620 620
Weight Unit kg 23.0 23.0 23.0 27.0 28.0 31.0
Nr of Rows 2 2 3 3 3 3
Fin Pitch mm 1.50 1.50 1.50 1.50 1.50 1.50
Heat Dimensions
Face Area m² 0.126 0.126 0.126 0.176 0.176 0.227
Exchanger
Nr of Stages 12 12 12 12 12 12
Fin Fin type Cross fin coil
Type Sirocco fan
Fan
Quantity 1 1 1 1 1 1
High m³/min 8.0 8.0 8.0 10.50 12.50 16.50
Low m³/min 6.4 6.4 6.4 8.50 10.00 13.00
External static High Pa 30 30 30 44 44 44
pressure Standard Pa 10 10 10 15 15 15
Fan Output
W 62 62 62 62 130 130
Motor (high)
Drive Direct drive
Sound High dBA 33.0 33.0 33.0 34.0 35.0 36.0
Cooling
Pressure Low dBA 29.0 29.0 29.0 30.0 31.0 32.0
Liquid (OD)
Diameter mm 6.4 6.4 6.4 6.4 6.4 9.5
connections Gas
Diameter mm 12.7 12.7 12.7 12.7 12.7 15.9
Air Filter Removable/washable/Mildew proof
Safety devices Fuse, Fan motor thermal protector
Installation and operation manual, Drain hose, Sealing Pads, Clamps, Washer, Insulation for fitting, Clamp metal,
Washer fixing plate, Screws for duct flanges, Air filter
Notes Capacities are net, including a deduction for cooling (an addition for heating) for indoor fan motor heat.
External static pressure can be changed by the remote control.
The operation sound levels are conversion values in anechoic chamber. In practice, sound levels tend to be higher
than the specified values due to ambient noise or reflection. When the suction place is changed to bottom suction,
sound level will increase by approximately 5dBA.
Specifications 17
Slim Ceiling Mounted Duct Type (with Drain Pump)

1-1 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FXDQ20M8V3B FXDQ25M8V3B
Nominal Cooling kW 2.20 2.80
Capacity Heating kW 2.50 3.20
Power input Cooling kW 0.050 0.050
(Nominal) Heating kW 0.050 0.050
Colour Non painted
Casing
Height mm 301 301
Packing Width mm 584 584
Depth mm 753 753
Dimensions
Height mm 230 230
Unit Width mm 502 502
Depth mm 652 652
Unit kg 17 17
Weight
Packed Unit kg 18 18
Required Ceiling Void mm 250 250
Length mm 430 430
Nr of Rows 2 2
Fin Pitch mm 1.40 1.40
Nr of Passes 2 2
Dimensions
Face Area m² 0.108 0.108
Heat
Exchanger Nr of Stages 12 12
Empty Tubeplate
4
Hole
Fin
Type Sirocco fan
Fan
Quantity 1 1
High m³/min 6.70 7.40
Cooling
Low m³/min 5.20 5.80
Air Flow Rate
High m³/min 6.70 7.40
Heating
Low m³/min 5.20 5.80
Quantity 1 1
Steps step motor
Fan Motor Output
W 10 10
(high)
Drive Direct drive
Sound
Sound Level Cooling power dBA 50.0 50.0
(nominal)
Sound High dBA 37.0 37.0
Cooling
Pressure Low dBA 32.0 32.0
Sound High dBA 37.0 37.0
Heating
Pressure Low dBA 32.0 32.0
Liquid (OD)
Diameter mm 6.4 6.4
connections Gas
Diameter mm 12.7 12.7
Drain Diameter mm 27.2 27.2
Standard Accessories Installation and operation manual, Fuse, Caution for servicing sticker, Suction air filter
18 Specifications
Ceiling Mounted Built-in Type

1-1 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FXSQ20M8V3B FXSQ25M8V3B FXSQ32M8V3B FXSQ40M8V3B FXSQ50M8V3B
Capacity Cooling kW 2.20 2.80 3.60 4.50 5.60
(Conditions
specified in 1) Heating kW 2.50 3.20 4.00 5.00 6.30
Colour Non painted
Casing
Height mm 354 354 354 354 354
Packing Width mm 742 742 742 892 892
Depth mm 936 936 936 936 936
Dimensions
Height mm 300 300 300 300 300
Unit Width mm 550 550 550 700 700
Depth mm 800 800 800 800 800
Unit kg 30 30 30 30 31
Weight
Packed Unit kg 34 34 34 34 35
Required Ceiling Void mm 350 350 350 350 350
Length mm 300 300 300 450 450
Fin Pitch mm 1.75 1.75 1.75 1.75 1.75
Dimensions Nr of Passes 3 3 3 4 4
Heat Face Area m² 0.088 0.088 0.088 0.132 0.132
Exchanger Nr of Stages 14 14 14 14 14
Empty Tubeplate Hole 14
Fin
Type Sirocco fan
Fan
Quantity 1 1 1 1 1
High m³/min 9.00 9.00 9.50 11.50 15.00
Cooling
Low m³/min 6.50 6.50 7.00 9.00 11.00
Air Flow Rate
High m³/min 9.00 9.00 9.50 11.50 15.00
Heating
Low m³/min 6.50 6.50 7.00 9.00 11.00
High Pa 125 125 104 116 136
External static
pressure Standard Pa 105 105 88 98 114
Low Pa 96 96 78 85 99
Quantity 1 1 1 1 1
Fan Model D18H3AA1V1 D18H3AA1V1 D18H3AA1V1 D18H2AC1V1 D18H2AB1V1
Motor Steps step motor
Output
W 50 50 50 65 85
(high)
Drive Direct drive
Sound
(nominal)
Sound High dBA 32.0 32.0 33.0 33.0 35.0
Cooling
Pressure Low dBA 28.0 28.0 28.0 29.0 31.0
Sound High dBA 32.0 32.0 33.0 33.0 35.0
Heating
Pressure Low dBA 28.0 28.0 28.0 29.0 31.0
Liquid (OD)
Diameter mm 6.35 6.35 6.35 6.35 6.35
Gas
Model BYBS32DJW1 BYBS32DJW1 BYBS32DJW1 BYBS45DJW1 BYBS45DJW1
Depth mm 500 500 500 500 500
Weight kg 3 3 3 3.5 3.5
Drain-up Height mm 600 600 600 600 600
Safety devices PC board fuse, Drain pump fuse, Fan motor thermal fuse
Metal clamp for drain hose, Paper pattern for installation, Drain hose, Insulation for fitting, Washer for hanger bracket,
Screws for duct flanges, Screws for fixing the paper pattern for installation, Fuse, Installation and operation manual
The external static pressure is changeable : change the connectors inside the electrical box, this pressure means :
Notes High static pressure -standard - low static pressure
High static pressure -standard
Specifications 19
Ceiling Mounted Built-in Type

1-1 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FXSQ63M8V3B FXSQ80M8V3B FXSQ100M8V3B FXSQ125M8V3B
Capacity Cooling kW 7.10 9.00 11.20 14.00
(Conditions
specified in 1) Heating kW 8.00 10.00 12.50 16.00
Power input Cooling kW 0.189 0.234 0.242 0.321
(Nominal) Heating kW 0.169 0.214 0.222 0.301
Colour Non painted
Casing
Height mm 354 356 356 356
Packing Width mm 1192 1596 1596 1596
Depth mm 936 938 938 938
Dimensions
Height mm 300 300 300 300
Unit Width mm 1000 1400 1400 1400
Depth mm 800 800 800 800
Unit kg 41 51 51 52
Weight
Packed Unit kg 47 58 58 59
Required Ceiling Void mm 350 350 350 350
Length mm 750 1150 1150 1150
Nr of Rows 3 3 3 3
Fin Pitch mm 1.75 1.75 1.75 1.75
Dimensions
Nr of Passes 7 10 10 10
Heat
Fin
Type Sirocco fan
Fan
Quantity 2 3 3 3
High m³/min 21.00 27.00 28.00 38.00
Cooling
Low m³/min 15.50 20.00 20.50 28.00
Air Flow Rate
High m³/min 21.00 27.00 28.00 38.00
Heating
Low m³/min 15.50 20.00 20.50 28.00
High Pa 123 141 141 109
External static
Standard Pa 111 125 125 93
pressure
Low Pa 98
Quantity 1 1 1 1
Fan Model 2D18H2AB1V1 3D18H2AH1V1 3D18H2AH1V1 3D18H2AG1V1
Steps step motor
Motor
Output W
125 135 135 225
(high)
Drive Direct drive
Sound
Sound Level Cooling power dBA 56.0 55.0 56.0 65.0
(nominal)
Sound High dBA 35.0 37.0 38.0 40.0
Cooling
Pressure Low dBA 30.0 31.0 33.0 35.0
Sound High dBA 35.0 37.0 38.0 40.0
Heating Pressure Low dBA 30.0 31.0 33.0 35.0
Liquid (OD)
Diameter mm 9.5 9.5 9.5 9.5
connections Gas
Diameter mm 15.9 15.9 15.9 15.9
Drain Diameter mm 32 32 32 32
Model BYBS71DJW1 BYBS125DJW1 BYBS125DJW1 BYBS125DJW1
Depth mm 500 500 500 500
Weight kg 4.5 6.5 6.5 6.5
Drain-up Height mm 600 600 600 600
PC board fuse, Drain pump
Safety devices fuse, Fan motor thermal fuse PC board fuse, Drain pump fuse, Fan motor thermal protector
Metal clamp for drain hose, Paper pattern for installation, Drain hose, Insulation for fitting, Washer for hanger bracket,
Screws for duct flanges, Screws for fixing the paper pattern for installation, Fuse, Installation and operation manual
Notes High static pressure -standard - low static pressure
High static pressure -standard
20 Specifications
Ceiling Mounted Duct Type

1-1 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FXMQ40PVE FXMQ50PVE FXMQ63PVE FXMQ80PVE FXMQ100PVE FXMQ125PVE
Cooling kW 4.5 5.6 7.1 9.0 11.2 14.0
Capacity
Heating kW 5.0 6.3 8.0 10.0 12.5 16.0
0.194 (1) 0.215 (1) 0.230 (1) 0.298 (1) 0.376 (1) 0.461 (1)
Cooling kW
Power Input 0.193 (2) 0.214 (2) 0.229 (2) 0.297 (2) 0.375 (2) 0.460 (2)
Heating kW 0.182 0.203 0.218 0.286 0.364 0.449
Height mm 300 300 300 300 300 300
Dimensions Unit Width mm 700 1,000 1,000 1,000 1,400 1,400
Depth mm 700 700 700 700 700 700
Weight Unit kg 28 36 36 36 46 46
Nr of Rows 3 3 3 3 3 3
Heat Fin Pitch mm 1.75 1.75 1.75 1.75 1.75 1.75
Dimensions
Exchanger Face Area m² 0.148 0.249 0.249 0.249 0.383 0.383
Nr of Stages 16 16 16 16 16 16
Fan Type Sirocco fan
High high m³/min 16 18 19.5 25 32 39
Air Flow Rate Cooling High m³/min 13 16.5 17.5 22.5 27 33
Low m³/min 11 15 16 20 23 28
High Pa 160 200 200 200 200 200
External static Standard Pa 100 100 100 100 100 100
pressure
Low Pa 30 50 50 50 50 50
Fan
Output
W 140 350 350 350 350 350
Motor (high)
Drive Direct drive
Liquid (OD)
Diameter mm 6.35 9.52 9.52 9.52 9.52 9.52
connections Gas
Diameter mm 12.7 15.9 15.9 15.9 15.9 15.9
Safety devices Fuse, Fan driver overload protector
Operation manual, Installation manual, Drain hose, Sealing pads, Clamps, Washer, Screws, Insulation for fitting,
Clamp metal, Air discharge flange, Air suction flange
Nominal cooling capacities are based on following conditions: return air temperature: 27°CDB/19°CWB; outdoor
temperature: 35°CDB; standard external static pressure: 100Pa; equivalent refrigerant piping: 7.5m (horizontal)
Nominal heating capacities are based on following conditions: return air temperature: 20°CDB; outdoor temperature:
7°CDB/6°CWB; standard external static pressure: 100Pa; equivalent refrigerant piping: 7.5m (horizontal)
Notes
External static pressure is changeable in 13 or 14 stages within the ( ) range by the remote control.
Air filter is not standard accessory, but please mount it in the duct system of the suction side. Select its colorimetric
method(gravity method) 50% or more.
Specifications 21
Ceiling Suspended Type

1-1 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FXHQ32MAVE FXHQ63MAVE FXHQ100MAVE
Nominal Cooling kW 3.60 7.10 11.20
Capacity Heating kW 4.00 8.00 12.50
Casing Colour White (10Y9/0,5)
Height mm 195 195 195
Dimensions Unit Width mm 960 1160 1400
Depth mm 680 680 680
Weight Unit kg 24 28 33
Nr of Rows 2 3 3
Heat Fin Pitch mm 1.75 1.75 1.75
Dimensions
Exchanger Face Area m² 0.182 0.233 0.293
Type Sirocco fan
Fan
Quantity 1 1 1
High m³/min 12.00 17.50 25.00
Low m³/min 10.00 14.00 19.50
Quantity 1 1 1
Model 3D12K1AA1 4D12K1AA1 3D12K2AA1
Fan Motor Output
W 62 62 130
(high)
Drive Direct drive
Cooling
Liquid (OD)
Gas
Drain Diameter mm 26 26 26
Heat Insulation Glass wool
Installation and operation manual, Drain hose, Paper pattern for installation, Clamp metal, Insulation for fitting
Clamps, Washer
22 Specifications
Wall Mounted Type

1-1 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FXAQ20MAVE FXAQ25MAVE FXAQ32MAVE FXAQ40MAVE FXAQ50MAVE FXAQ63MAVE
Casing Colour white (3.0Y8.5/0.5)
Height mm 290 290 290 290 290 290
Depth mm 230 230 230 230 230 230
Weight Unit kg 11 11 11 14 14 14
Nr of Rows 2 2 2 2 2 2
Heat Fin Pitch mm 1.40 1.40 1.40 1.40 1.40 1.40
Dimensions
Nr of Stages 14 14 14 14 14 14
Type Cross flow fan
Fan
Quantity 1 1 1 1
High m³/min 7.50 8.00 9.00 12.00 15.00 19.00
Low m³/min 4.50 5.00 5.50 9.00 12.00 14.00
Model QCL9661M QCL9661M QCL9661M QCL9686M QCL9686M QCL9686M
Fan Motor Output
W 40 40 40 43 43 43
(high)
Drive Direct drive
Sound High dBA 35.0 36.0 37.0 39.0 42.0 46.0
Cooling
Pressure Low dBA 29.0 29.0 29.0 34.0 36.0 39.0
Liquid (OD)
Diameter mm 6.4 6.4 6.4 6.4 6.35 9.5
Gas
connections Diameter mm 12.7 12.7 12.7 12.7 12.7 15.9
Drain Diameter mm 18 18 18 18 18 18
Air Filter Washable resin net
Safety devices PC board fuse
Standard Accessories Installation and operation manual, Installation panel, Paper pattern for installation, Insulation tape, Clamps, Screws
Specifications 23
Floor Standing Type

1-1 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FXLQ20MAVE FXLQ25MAVE FXLQ32MAVE FXLQ40MAVE FXLQ50MAVE FXLQ63MAVE
Casing Colour Ivory white (5Y7,5/1)
Height mm 600 600 600 600 600 600
Depth mm 222 222 222 222 222 222
Weight Unit kg 25 25 30 30 36 36
Nr of Rows 3 3 3 3 3 3
Heat Fin Pitch mm 1.50 1.50 1.50 1.50 1.50 1.50
Dimensions
Nr of Stages 14 14 14 14 14 14
Type Sirocco fan
Fan
High m³/min 7.00 7.00 8.00 11.00 14.00 16.00
Low m³/min 6.00 6.00 6.00 8.50 11.00 12.00
Model D14B20 D14B20 2D14B13 2D14B13 2D14B20 2D14B20
Fan Motor Output
W 15 15 25 25 35 35
(high)
Drive Direct drive
Sound High dBA 35.0 35.0 35.0 38.0 39.0 40.0
Cooling
Pressure Low dBA 32.0 32.0 32.0 33.0 34.0 35.0
Liquid (OD)
Diameter mm 6.4 6.4 6.4 6.4 6.4 9.5
Gas
Drain Diameter mm O.D. 21
Heat Insulation Glass Fiber/Urethane Foam
Standard Accessories Installation and operation manual, Insulation for fitting, Drain hose, Clamps, Screws, Level adjustment screw, Washer
Capacities are net, includinga deduction for cooling (an addition for heating) for indoor fan motor heat.
24 Specifications
Concealed Floor Standing Type

1-1 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FXNQ20MAVE FXNQ25MAVE FXNQ32MAVE FXNQ40MAVE FXNQ50MAVE FXNQ63MAVE
Height mm 610 610 610 610 610 610
Depth mm 220 220 220 220 220 220
Weight Unit kg 19 19 23 23 27 27
Nr of Rows 3 3 3 3 3 3
Heat Fin Pitch mm 1.50 1.50 1.50 1.50 1.50 1.50
Dimensions
Nr of Stages 14 14 14 14 14 14
Type Sirocco fan
Fan
High m³/min 7.00 7.00 8.00 11.00 14.00 16.00
Low m³/min 6.00 6.00 6.00 8.50 11.00 12.00
Model D14B20 D14B20 2D14B13 2D14B13 2D14B20 2D14B20
Fan Motor Output
W 15 15 25 25 35 35
(high)
Drive Direct drive
Sound High dBA 35.0 35.0 35.0 38.0 39.0 40.0
Cooling
Pressure Low dBA 32.0 32.0 32.0 33.0 34.0 35.0
Liquid (OD)
Diameter mm 6.4 6.4 6.4 6.4 6.4 9.5
Gas
Drain Diameter mm O.D. 21
Heat Insulation Glass Fiber/Urethane Foam
Standard Accessories Installation and operation manual, Insulation for fitting, Drain hose, Clamps, Screws, Washer, Level adjustment screw
Specifications 25
Ceiling Suspended Cassette Type

1-1 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FXUQ71MAV1 FXUQ100MAV1 FXUQ125MAV1
Colour White
Casing
Material Resin
Height mm 230 295 295
Depth mm 960 960 960
Dimensions
Height mm 165 230 230
Depth mm 895 895 895
Unit kg 25 31 31
Weight
Length mm 2101 2101 2101
Nr of Rows 3 3 3
Fin Pitch mm 1.50 1.50 1.50
Nr of Passes 8 8 12
Heat Dimensions
Exchanger Face Area m² 0.265 0.353 0.353
Nr of Stages 6 8 8
Empty Tubeplate
4
Hole
Fin Fin type Cross fin coil (Multi louver fins and N-hix tubes)
Type Turbo fan
Fan
Quantity 1 1 1
High m³/min 19.00 29.00 32.00
Cooling
Low m³/min 14.00 21.00 23.00
Air Flow Rate
High m³/min 19.00 29.00 32.00
Heating
Low m³/min 14.00 21.00 23.00
Steps 2 2 2
Fan Motor Output
W 45 90 90
(high)
Sound
Sound Level Cooling power dBA 56.0 59.0 60.0
(nominal)
Cooling
Heating
Liquid (OD)
Gas
Drain Diameter mm I.D. 20/O.D. 26
Heat Insulation Heat resistant foamed polyethylene, regular foamed polyethylene
Safety devices Fan motor thermal protector
Standard Accessories Installation and operation manual, Drain hose, Clamp metal, Insulation for fitting, Sealing Pads, Clamps, Washer
26 Specifications
BEV Units
11-1-1Technical Specifications BEVQ71MAVE BEVQ100MAVE BEVQ125MAVE
Height mm 100 100 100
Dimensions Packing Width mm 350 350 350
Depth mm 225 225 225
Sound absorbing thermal insulation material Flame and heat resistant foamed polyetherene
Weight Unit kg 3.0 3.0 3.5
Liquid (OD)
Indoor Units
Gas
Diameter mm 15.9 15.9 15.9
Liquid (OD)
Outdoor Unit
Suction gas Type Flare connection
(OD) Diameter mm 15.9 15.9 15.9
Standard
Item Installation manual, Gas piping connections, Insulation for fitting, Sealing material, Clamps
Accessories
Specifications 27
28 Specifications
SiENBE34-802
Part 3
List of Electrical and
Functional Parts
1. List of Electrical and Functional Parts ...................................................30

1.1 Outdoor Unit ...........................................................................................30
1.2 Indoor Unit..............................................................................................32
List of Electrical and Functional Parts 29

List of Electrical and Functional Parts SiENBE34-802
1. List of Electrical and Functional Parts

1.1 Outdoor Unit
RXYSQ4 / 5 / 6PA7Y1B
Model Remark
Item Name Symbol
4HP 5HP 6HP (PCB terminal)
Type JT1G-VDLYR Relay
Inverter M1C
Compressor Output 2.5kW 3.0kW 3.5kW A2P X102A
Crankcase heater (INV) E1HC 33W A1P X28A
Motor M1F·M2F 0.07kW —
Fan motor
Over-current relay — 3.2A —
Electronic expansion Cooling 480pls
Y1E A1P X21A
valve (Main) Heating PI control
Electronic expansion Cooling PI control
Functional Y3E A1P X22A
valve (Subcool) Heating PI control
parts
4 way valve Y1S STF-0404G A1P X25A
Solenoid valve (Hot gas) Y2S TEV1620DQ2 A1P X26A
Solenoid valve (Unload circuit) Y3S TEV1620DQ2 A1P X27A
ACB-4UB10
Pressure switch (INV) S1PH A1P X32A
Pressure- OFF: 4.0+0/-0.15MPa ON: 3.0±0.15MPa
related parts Pressure sensor (HP) S1NPH PS8051A 0~4.15MPa A1P X17A
Pressure sensor (LP) S1NPL PS8051A –0.05~1.7MPa A1P X18A
For outdoor air R1T 3.5~360kΩ A1P X11A
For discharge pipe R2T 5.0~640kΩ A1P X12A 1-2Pin
For suction pipe 1 R3T 3.5~360kΩ A1P X12A 3-4Pin
For subcooling heat
Main exchanger R4T 3.5~360kΩ A1P X12A 5-6Pin
Thermistor PCB
For heat exchanger R6T 3.5~360kΩ A1P X13A 1-2Pin
For liquid pipe 1 R7T 3.5~360kΩ A1P X13A 3-4Pin
Others Fuse (A1P) F1U AC250V 6.3A Time lag fuse —
30 List of Electrical and Functional Parts

SiENBE34-802 List of Electrical and Functional Parts
RXYSQ4 / 5 / 6PA7V1B
Model Remark
Item Name Symbol
4HP 5HP 6HP (PCB terminal)
Type JT100G-VDL Relay
Inverter M1C
Compressor Output 2.5kW 3.0kW 3.5kW A1P
Crankcase heater (INV) E1HC 33W A1P X28A
Motor M1F·M2F 0.07kW —
Fan motor
Over-current relay — 3.2A —
Electronic expansion Cooling 480pls
Y1E A1P X21A
valve (Main) Heating PI control
Electronic expansion Cooling PI control
Functional Y3E A1P X22A
valve (Subcool) Heating PI control
parts
4 way valve Y1S STF-0404G A1P X25A
Solenoid valve (Hot gas) Y2S TEV1620DQ2 A1P X26A
Solenoid valve (Unload circuit) Y3S TEV1620DQ2 A1P X27A
ACB-4UB10
Pressure switch (INV) S1PH A1P X32A
Pressure- OFF: 4.0+0/-0.15MPa ON: 3.0±0.15MPa
related parts Pressure sensor (HP) S1NPH PS8051A 0~4.15MPa A1P X17A
Pressure sensor (LP) S1NPL PS8051A –0.05~1.7MPa A1P X18A
For outdoor air R1T 3.5~360kΩ A1P X11A
For discharge pipe R2T 5.0~640kΩ A1P X12A 1-2Pin
For heat exchanger R4T 3.5~360kΩ A1P X12A 5-6Pin
Main
Thermistor PCB For suction pipe 2 R5T 3.5~360kΩ A1P X12A 7-8Pin
For subcooling heat R6T 3.5~360kΩ A1P X13A 1-2Pin
exchanger
Others Fuse (A1P) F1U AC250V 6.3A Time lag fuse —

1.2 Indoor Unit

Model
Parts Name Symbol FXFQ20 FXFQ25 FXFQ32 FXFQ40 FXFQ50 FXFQ63 FXFQ80 FXFQ FXFQ Remark
100 125
PVE PVE PVE PVE PVE PVE PVE PVE PVE
Wired Remote Control BRC1D52
Remote Option
Control Infrared remote
control BRC7F532
Fan Motor M1F Thermal Proctector : OFF : 108±5 (ON : 96±15)

AC220-240V (50Hz) AC220V (60Hz)
Drain Pump M1P PLD-12230DM
Motors
Thermal Fuse 145°C
MP35HCA[3P007482-1]
Swing Motor M1S Stepping Motor DC16V
Thermistor (Suction Air) R1T In PC board A4P or wired Remote Control
Thermistor (for Heat ST8605-5 φ8 L1000
Thermistors Exchanger High Temp.)
R3T 20kΩ (25°C)
Thermistor (Heat R2T ST8602A-5 φ6 L1000
Exchanger) 20kΩ (25°C)
Float Switch S1L FS-0211B
Fuse F1U 250V 5A φ5.2
Others
Thermal Fuse TFu —
Transformer T1R —
Model
Parts Name Symbol FXCQ FXCQ FXCQ FXCQ FXCQ FXCQ FXCQ FXCQ Remark
125
20MV3 25MV3 32MV3 40MV3 50MV3 63MV3 80MV3 MV3
Remote
Control Infrared remote Option
control BRC7C62
AC 220~240V 50Hz
1φ10W 1φ15W 1φ20W 1φ30W 1φ50W 1φ85W
Fan Motor M1F
Thermal protector 135°C : OFF
Thermal Fuse 152°C — 87°C : ON
Motors
AC220-240V (50Hz) AC220V (60Hz)
Thermal Fuse 145°C
MT8-L[3PA07509-1]
Swing Motor M1S
AC200~240V
ST8601-6 φ4 L1250
Thermistor (Suction Air) R1T 20kΩ (25°C)
Thermistors Thermistor (for Heat R3T ST8605-6 φ8 L1250

Exchanger High Temp.) 20kΩ (25°C)
Others Fuse F1U 250V 5A φ5.2
Transformer T1R TR22H21R8

Model
Parts Name Symbol FXZQ FXZQ FXZQ FXZQ FXZQ Remark
20MV1 25MV1 32MV1 40MV1 50MV1
Remote
Control Infrared remote Option
BRC7E530
control
AC 220~240V 50Hz
Fan Motor M1F 1φ55W 4P
Thermal Fuse OFF : 130±5 / ON : 80±20
Capacitor, fan motor C1 4.0μ F 400VAC
Motors
AC220-240V (50Hz)
Thermal Fuse 145°C
MP35HCA [3P080801-1]
Swing Motor M1S
AC200~240V
ST8601A-1 φ4 L250
Thermistor (for Heat
Thermistors Exchanger High Temp.) R3T ST8605-3 φ8 L630
20kΩ (25°C)
Thermistor (Heat ST8602A-3 φ6 L630
R2T
Float Switch S1L FS-0211
Model
Parts Name Symbol FXKQ FXKQ FXKQ FXKQ Remark
25MAVE 32MAVE 40MAVE 63MAVE
Wired Remote Control BRC1D52 Option
Remote
Control Infrared remote BRC4C61
control
AC 220~240V 50Hz
Fan Motor M1F 1φ15W 4P 1φ20W 4P 1φ45W 4P

Thermal protector 120°C : OFF 105°C :
Thermal Fuse 146°C ON
Motors
AC 220-240V (50Hz)
Thermal Fuse 145°C
Swing Motor M1S MP35HCA [3P080801-1]

AC200~240V
ST8601-13 φ4 L630
Thermistor (Suction Air) R1T
20kΩ (25°C)
Thermistors Thermistor (for Heat

ST8605-7 φ8 L1600
Exchanger High Temp.) R3T
20kΩ (25°C)
Thermistor (Heat ST8602A-7 φ6 L1600
Exchanger) R2T 20kΩ (25°C)

Model
Parts Name Symbol FXDQ FXDQ FXDQ FXDQ FXDQ FXDQ Remark
20 PVE 25PVE 32PVE 40NAVE 50NAVE 63NAVE
Remote
Infrared remote Option
Control BRC4C62
control
AC 220~240V 50Hz
Fan Motor M1F 1φ62W 1φ130W

Thermal protector
Motors 130°C: OFF, 83°C: ON
AC220-240V (50Hz)
Drain Pump M1P PLD-12230DM ∗
Thermal Fuse 145°C
Thermistor (Suction Air) R1T ST8601-1 φ4 L=250

20kΩ (25°C)
Thermistor (for Heat ST8605-4 φ8 L=800
Thermistors Exchanger High Temp.) R3T
20kΩ (25°C)
Thermistor (Heat ST8602A-4 φ6 L=800
Float Switch S1L FS-0211E ∗
Model
Parts Name Symbol FXDQ FXDQ Remark
20M8V3B 25M8V3B
Remote
Control BRC4C62
control
AC 200~240V 50/60Hz
1φ10W4P
Motors Fan Motor M1F
Thermal protector
135°C: OFF, 87°C: ON
ST8601-4 φ4 L=800
20kΩ (25°C)

ST8605-7 φ8 L=1600
Exchanger High Temp.) R3T 20kΩ (25°C)
Thermistor (Heat R2T ST8602A-6 φ6 L=1250
Fuse F1U 250V 10A
Others

Model
Parts Name Symbol FXSQ FXSQ FXSQ FXSQ FXSQ FXSQ FXSQ FXSQ FXSQ Remark
20 25 32 40 50 63 80 100 125
MV3 MV3 MV3 MV3 MV3 MV3 MV3 MV3 MV3
Remote Option
control BRC4C62
AC 220~240V 50Hz
1φ125
Fan Motor M1F 1φ50W 1φ65W 1φ85W W 1φ225W
Motors Thermal Fuse 152°C Thermal protector

135°C : OFF 87°C : ON
AC220-240V (50Hz)
Thermal Fuse 145°C
ST8601-4 φ4 L800
20kΩ (25°C)

ST8605-7 φ8 L1600
Model
Parts Name Symbol FXMQ FXMQ FXMQ FXMQ FXMQ FXMQ Remark
40PVE 50PVE 63PVE 80PVE 100PVE 125PVE
Wired Remote Control BRC1C62
Remote
control BRC4C65
Fan Motor M1F DC280V 140W 8P DC373V 350W 8P

Motors AC220-240V (50/60Hz)
Thermal protector 145°C
ST8601-3 φ L630

ST8605-14 φ8 L1000
Thermistor (for Heat ST8602A-6 φ8 L1250
Fuse (A1P) F1U 250V 3.15A
Others F3U·
Fuse (A2P, A3P) 250V 6.3A
F4U
Fuse (A2P) F2U 250V 5A —

Model
Parts Name Symbol FXHQ FXHQ FXHQ Remark
32MAVE 63MAVE 100MAVE
Remote Wired Remote Control BRC1D52 Option
Control Wireless Control BRC7E63W
AC 220~240V/220V 50Hz/60Hz
Motors Thermal protector 130°C : OFF 80°C : ON

Capacitor for Fan Motor C1R 3.0μF-400V 9.0μF-400V
MT8-L[3P058751-1]
Swing Motor M1S
AC200~240V
ST8601A-1 φ4 L250
Thermistors Exchanger High Temp.) R3T ST8605-6 φ8 L = 1250 ST8605-6 φ8 L = 1250
20kΩ (25°C) 20kΩ (25°C)
Thermistor (Heat ST8602A-6 φ6 L = 1250 ST8602A-6 φ6 L = 1250
R2T
Exchanger) 20kΩ (25°C) 20kΩ (25°C)
Others
Model
Parts Name Symbol FXAQ FXAQ FXAQ FXAQ FXAQ FXAQ Remark
20MAVE 25MAVE 32MAVE 40MAVE 50MAVE 63MAVE
Remote
Control BRC7E618
control
AC 220~240V 50Hz
Motors Thermal protector 130°C : OFF 80°C : ON
Swing Motor M1S MP24 [3SB40333-1] MSFBC20C21 [3SB40550-1]

AC200~240V AC200~240V
Thermistor (Suction Air) R1T ST8601-2 φ4 L400

20kΩ (25°C)
Thermistors Thermistor (for Heat R3T ST8605-2 φ8 L400

Exchanger High Temp.) 20kΩ (25°C)
Thermistor (for Heat R2T ST8602-2 φ6 L400
Float Switch S1L OPTION
Others

Model
Parts Name Symbol FXLQ FXLQ FXLQ FXLQ FXLQ FXLQ Remark
Remote Option
control BRC4C62
AC 220~240V 50Hz
Fan Motor M1F 1φ15W 1φ25W 1φ35W
Motors
Thermal protector 135°C : OFF 120°C : ON
Capacitor for Fan Motor C1R 1.0μF-400V 0.5μF-400V 1.0μF-400V 1.5μF-400V 2.0μF-400V
Thermistor (Suction Air) R1T ST8601-6 φ4 L1250

20kΩ (25°C)
Thermistors Exchanger High Temp.) R3T ST8605-9 φ8 L2500
20kΩ (25°C)
Thermistor (for Heat R2T ST8602A-9 φ6 L2500
Fuse F1U AC250V 5A
Others
Model
Parts Name Symbol FXNQ FXNQ FXNQ FXNQ FXNQ FXNQ Remark
Remote
Control BRC4C62
control
AC 220~240V 50Hz
Fan Motor M1F 1φ15W 1φ25W 1φ35W
Motors
Thermal protector 135°C : OFF 120°C : ON
Capacitor for Fan Motor C1R 1.0μF-400V 0.5μF-400V 1.0μF-400V 1.5μF-400V 2.0μF-400V
ST8601-6 φ4 L1250
20kΩ (25°C)
Thermistor (for Heat ST8605-9 φ8 L2500
Thermistors Exchanger High Temp.) R3T
20kΩ (25°C)
Thermistor (for Heat ST8602A-9 φ6 L2500
R2T
Fuse F1U AC250V 5A
Others
Model
Parts Name Symbol Remark
FXUQ71MAV1 FXUQ100MAV1 FXUQ125MAV1
Wired Remote Control BRC1C62
Remote Option
control BRC7C528W
AC 220~240V 50Hz
Thermal protector 130°C Thermal protector 130°C : OFF 83°C : ON
Motors
AC220-240V (50Hz) AC220V (60Hz)
Drain Pump M1P
PJV-1426
MT8-L[3PA07572-1]
Swing Motor M1S AC200~240V
Thermistor (Suction Air) R1T ST8601-1 φ4 L=250

20kΩ (25°C)
Thermistors
Thermistor (Heat ST8602A-4 φ6 L=800
R2T
Others Float Switch S1L FS-0211B


SiENBE34-802
Part 4
Refrigerant Circuit
1. Refrigerant Circuit .................................................................................40

1.1 Outdoor Unit .................................................................................40
2. Functional Parts Layout ........................................................................44
2.1 RXYSQ4 / 5 / 6PA7Y1B .........................................................................44
2.2 RXYSQ4 / 5 / 6PA7V1B .........................................................................45
Refrigerant Circuit 39
Refrigerant Circuit SiENBE34-802
1. Refrigerant Circuit
1.1 Outdoor Unit
No. in
refrigerant Symbol Name Major Function
system
diagram
Inverter compressor is operated on frequencies between 36 Hz and 195 Hz by using
A M1C Inverter compressor (INV) the inverter.
31 steps
D M1F Inverter fan Since the system is of air heat exchanging type, the fan is operated at 8-step rotation
M2F speed by using the inverter.
Electronic expansion valve While in heating operation, PI control is applied to keep the outlet superheated degree
E Y1E
(Main: EV1) of air heat exchanger constant.
Electronic expansion valve Pl control is applied to keep the outlet superheated degree of subcooling heat
F Y3E (Subcool: EV3) exchanger constant.
G Y2S Solenoid valve (Hot gas: SVP) Used to prevent the low pressure from transient falling.
Solenoid valve (Unload circuit
H Y3S SVUL) Used to the unloading operation of compressor.
M Y1S Four way valve Used to switch the operation mode between cooling and heating.
N S1NPH High pressure sensor Used to detect high pressure.
O S1NPL Low pressure sensor Used to detect low pressure.
HP pressure switch (For INV In order to prevent the increase of high pressure when a malfunction occurs, this
P S1PH switch is activated at high pressure of 4.0 MPa or more to stop the compressor
compressor) operation.
Pressure regulating valve 1 This valve opens at a pressure of 4.0 MPa for prevention of pressure increase, thus
T — resulting in no damage of functional parts due to the increase of pressure in
(Receiver to discharge pipe) transportation or storage.
1 R1T Thermistor (Outdoor air: Ta) Used to detect outdoor temperature, correct discharge pipe temperature, and others.
Thermistor (INV discharge used to detect discharge pipe temperature, make the temperature protection control of
2 R2T pipe: Tdi) compressor, and others.
3 R3T Thermistor used to detect suction pipe temperature, keep the suction superheated degree
(Suction pipe1: Ts1) constant in heating operation, and others.
Thermistor (Subcooling heat
4 R4T Used to control of subcooling electronic expansion valve.
exchanger gas pipe: Tsh)
Thermistor
5 R5T (Suction pipe2: Ts2) Used to the calculation of an internal temperature of compressor etc.
6 R6T Thermistor (Heat exchanger Used to detect liquid pipe temperature of air heat exchanger, determine defrosting
deicer: Tb) operation, and others.
Thermistor
7 R7T Used to detect refrigerant over charge in check operation, and others.
(Liquid pipe1: Tl1)
Thermistor
8 R8T (Liquid pipe2: Tl2) Used to detect refrigerant over charge in check operation, and others.
40 Refrigerant Circuit
SiENBE34-802
Electronic expansion valve
Refrigerant Circuit
Double pipe Electronic
heat exchanger expansion valve 8
F Filter
Subcooling heat E
exchanger
7 T
Heat exchanger
6
Pressure regulating valve
4 1
Filter 3 Service port
D D
Four way
valve
M
Service port High pressure

Low pressure sensor
sensor N
Filter O
Capillary
tube
H
Oil seperator
5 Solenoid valve
Filter Capillary tube Filter
2
Compressor G
A Solenoid valve
Capillary tube
High pressure
switch P
Accumulator
Stop valve (With service port on field piping side ø 7.9 mm flare connection)
C : 3D052628
41
Refrigerant Circuit
Refrigerant Circuit SiENBE34-802
No. in
refrigerant
system Symbol Name Major Function
diagram
Inverter compressor is operated on frequencies between 36 Hz and 195 Hz by using
A M1C Inverter compressor (INV) the inverter.
31 steps
M1F Since the system is of air heat exchanging type, the fan is operated at 8-step rotation
D M2F Inverter fan speed by using the inverter.
E Y1E Electronic expansion valve While in heating operation, PI control is applied to keep the outlet superheated degree
(Main: EV1) of air heat exchanger constant.
Electronic expansion valve Pl control is applied to keep the outlet superheated degree of subcooling heat
F Y3E
(Subcool: EV3) exchanger constant.
G Y2S Solenoid valve (Hot gas: SVP) Used to prevent the low pressure from transient falling.
Solenoid valve (Unload circuit
H Y3S Used to the unloading operation of compressor.
SVUL)
M Y1S Four way valve Used to switch the operation mode between cooling and heating.
N S1NPH High pressure sensor Used to detect high pressure.
O S1NPL Low pressure sensor Used to detect low pressure.
In order to prevent the increase of high pressure when a malfunction occurs, this
P S1PH HP pressure switch (For INV switch is activated at high pressure of 4.0 MPa or more to stop the compressor
compressor)
operation.
This valve opens at a pressure of 4.0 MPa for prevention of pressure increase, thus
T — Pressure regulating valve 1 resulting in no damage of functional parts due to the increase of pressure in
(Receiver to discharge pipe)
transportation or storage.
1 R1T Thermistor (Outdoor air: Ta) Used to detect outdoor temperature, correct discharge pipe temperature, and others.
Thermistor (INV discharge used to detect discharge pipe temperature, make the temperature protection control of
2 R2T
pipe: Tdi) compressor, and others.
Thermistor used to detect suction pipe temperature, keep the suction superheated degree
3 R3T (Suction pipe1: Ts1) constant in heating operation, and others.
4 R4T Thermistor (Heat exchanger Used to detect liquid pipe temperature of air heat exchanger, determine defrosting
deicer: Tb) operation, and others.
Thermistor
5 R5T Used to the calculation of an internal temperature of compressor etc.
(Suction pipe2: Ts2)
Thermistor (Subcooling heat
6 R6T exchanger gas pipe: Tsh) Used to control of subcooling electronic expansion valve.
7 R7T Thermistor Used to detect refrigerant over charge in check operation, and others.
(Liquid pipe1: Tl1)
Thermistor
8 R8T Used to detect refrigerant over charge in check operation, and others.
(Liquid pipe2: Tl2)
SiENBE34-802
Refrigerant Circuit
Double pipe
Electronic
heat exchanger expansion valve
Subcooling heat Filter
exchanger
Heat exchanger
Filter Service port
Four way
valve

Low pressure sensor
sensor
Filter
Capillary
tube
Solenoid valve
Filter Capillary tube
Filter
Compressor
Capillary tube Solenoid valve
High pressure
switch
Accumulator
C : 3D052712
43
Refrigerant Circuit
Functional Parts Layout SiENBE34-802
2. Functional Parts Layout

2.1 RXYSQ4 / 5 / 6PA7Y1B
Birds-eye view
PRESSURE SENSOR (HIGH)

THERMISTOR
LEAD WIRE
(SUBCOOLING GAS PIPE)
S1NPH
RXYSQ-PA7Y1B : R4T
(CONNECTOR COLOR : RED)
(CONNECTOR COLOR : WHITE)
(LOW VOLTAGE)
R3T THERMISTOR (SUCTION 1)

(MARKING COLOR : RED)
SOLENOID VALVE LEAD WIRE

Y2S Y1S 4 WAY VALVE LEAD WIRE
(CONNECTOR COLOR : BLACK) (CONNECTOR COLOR : BLUE)
(HIGH VOLTAGE) (HIGH VOLTAGE)
THERMISTOR (SUCTION 2) S1NPL PRESSURE SENSOR (LOW)

R5T (CONNECTOR COLOR : BLUE)
(MARKING COLOR : GREEN)
SOLENOID VALVE LEAD WIRE

Y3S
(CONNECTOR COLOR : PINK)
(HIGH VOLTAGE)
PRESSURE SWITCH LEAD

WIRE
S1PH
THERMISTOR (DISCHARGE)
R2T Y1E ELECTRONIC EXPANSION VALVE
CRANKCASE HEATER LEAD WIRE R7T THERMISTOR (LIQUID PIPE 1)

E1HC
(CONNECTOR COLOR : GRAY)
(HIGH VOLTAGE)
Y3E ELECTRONIC EXPANSION VALVE

(MARKING COLOR : BLUE)
SiENBE34-802 Functional Parts Layout
2.2 RXYSQ4 / 5 / 6PA7V1B

Birds-eye view
Y2S SOLENOID VALVE

(CONNECTOR COLOR : BLACK)
(HIGH VOLTAGE)
S1NPH PRESSURE SENSOR (HIGH) LEAD WIRE

(CONNECTOR COLOR : RED)
(LOW VOLTAGE)
Y1S 4 WAY VALVE LEAD WIRE

(CONNECTOR COLOR : BLUE)
(HIGH VOLTAGE)


S1NPL PRESSURE SENSOR (LOW)

Y3S SOLENOID VALVE LEAD WIRE

(CONNECTOR COLOR : PINK)
(HIGH VOLTAGE)
S1PH PRESSURE SWITCH LEAD WIRE

R2T THERMISTOR (DISCHARGE)

Y1E ELECTRIC EXPANSION VALVE

E1HC CRANKCASE HEATER LEAD WIRE (CONNECTOR COLOR : WHITE)
(CONNECTOR COLOR : GRAY)
(HIGH VOLTAGE)
Y3E ELECTRIC EXPANSION VALVE
R7T THERMISTOR (LIQUID PIPE 1)

Refrigerant Circuit 45
Functional Parts Layout SiENBE34-802
Back view
R6T THERMISTOR (SUBCOOLING)

(MARKING COLOR : WHITE)


R1T THERMISTOR (AIR)

(MARKING COLOR : YELLOW)
R8T THERMISTOR (LIQUID PIPE 2)

R4T THERMISTOR (HEAT EXCHANGER)

R7T THERMISTOR (LIQUID PIPE 1) (CONNECTOR COLOR : BLUE)
SiENBE34-802
Part 5
Function
1. Operation Mode ....................................................................................48
2. Basic Control.........................................................................................49
2.1 Normal Operation ...................................................................................49
2.2 Compressor PI Control...........................................................................50
2.3 Electronic Expansion Valve PI Control...................................................51
2.4 Cooling Operation Fan Control...............................................................52
3. Special Control......................................................................................53
3.1 Startup Control .......................................................................................53
3.2 Oil Return Operation ..............................................................................54
3.3 Defrosting Operation ..............................................................................56
3.4 Pump-down Residual Operation ............................................................57
3.5 Restart Standby......................................................................................58
3.6 Stopping Operation ................................................................................59
4. Protection Control .................................................................................60
4.1 High Pressure Protection Control...........................................................60
4.2 Low Pressure Protection Control............................................................61
4.3 Discharge Pipe Protection Control .........................................................62
4.4 Inverter Protection Control .....................................................................63
5. Other Control.........................................................................................64
5.1 Demand Operation .................................................................................64
5.2 Heating Operation Prohibition ................................................................64
6. Outline of Control (Indoor Unit) .............................................................65
6.1 Drain Pump Control................................................................................65
6.2 Louver Control for Preventing Ceiling Dirt..............................................67
6.3 Thermostat Sensor in Remote Control...................................................68
6.4 Freeze Prevention ..................................................................................70
6.5 View of Operations of Swing Flaps ........................................................71
6.6 Electronic Expansion Valve Control .......................................................72
6.7 Hot Start Control (In Heating Operation Only)........................................72
Function 47
Operation Mode SiENBE34-802
1. Operation Mode
Operation in
stop mode
Indoor unit stop or Indoor unit thermostat ON

thermostat OFF
Malfunction/Standby
Restart standby
Pressure (Compressor stop)
equalization
prior to startup
Malfunction /
Standby
Indoor unit stop or
Startup control thermostat OFF
• Cooling startup Pump-down
control residual
• Heating startup Indoor unit thermostat ON
operation
control
Malfunction/Standby
Indoor unit stop or

Normal operation thermostat OFF
• Compressor PI control
• Electronic expansion
valve PI control
• Protection control
Cooling or heating
operation
Malfunction /
Standby
Oil return IN Yes

conditions are met. Oil return operation
No
Defrost IN Yes
conditions are met. Defrosting operation
No
Operation Yes
mode change
No Note:
In the event indoor unit stops or the thermostat
turns OFF while in oil return operation or
defrosting operation, pump-down residual
operation is performed on completion of the oil
return operation or defrosting operation.
(V3152)
48 Function
SiENBE34-802 Basic Control
2. Basic Control
2.1 Normal Operation
Cooling Operation
Actuator Operation Remarks
Used for high pressure protection control, low
pressure protection control, discharge pipe
Compressor Compressor PI control temperature protection control, and compressor
operating frequency upper limit control with
inverter protection control.
Outdoor unit fan Cooling fan control ⎯
Four way valve OFF ⎯
Main electronic expansion valve (EV1) 480 pls ⎯
Subcooling electronic expansion valve PI control ⎯
(EV3)
This valve turns on with low pressure protection
Hot gas bypass valve (SVP) OFF control.
Heating Operation
Used for high pressure protection control, low
pressure protection control, discharge pipe
Compressor Compressor PI control temperature protection control, and compressor
operating frequency upper limit control with
inverter protection control.
Outdoor unit fan STEP 7 or 8 ⎯
Four way valve ON ⎯
Main electronic expansion valve (EV1) PI control ⎯
Subcooling electronic expansion valve PI control ⎯
(EV3)
This valve turns on with low pressure protection
Hot gas bypass valve (SVP) OFF control.
HHeating operation is not functional at an outdoor air temperature of 24°CDB or more.
Function 49
Basic Control SiENBE34-802
2.2 Compressor PI Control

Compressor PI Control
Carries out the compressor capacity PI control to maintain Te at constant during cooling
operation and Tc at constant during heating operation to ensure stable unit performance.
[Cooling operation]
Controls compressor capacity to adjust Te to Te : Low pressure equivalent saturation temperature
achieve target value (TeS). (°C)
Te setting (Set in Set-up mode 2) TeS : Target Te value
(Varies depending on Te setting, operating
L M (Normal) H frequency, etc.)
(factory
setting)
3 6 9
[Heating operation]
Controls compressor capacity to adjust Tc to Tc : High pressure equivalent saturation temperature
achieve target value (TcS). (°C)
Tc setting TcS : Target Tc value
(Varies depending on Tc setting, operating
L M (Normal) H frequency, etc.)
(factory
setting)
43 46 49
RXYSQ4 · 5 · 6PA
STn INV(Fullload) INV(Unload) STn INV(Fullload) INV(Unload) STn INV(Fullload) INV(Unload)
1 36.0Hz 11 80.0Hz 21 140.0Hz
2 39.0Hz 12 86.0Hz 22 146.0Hz
3 43.0Hz 13 92.0Hz 23 152.0Hz
4 47.0Hz 14 98.0Hz 24 158.0Hz
5 52.0Hz 15 104.0Hz 25 164.0Hz
6 52.0Hz 57.0Hz 16 110.0Hz 26 170.0Hz
7 57.0Hz 64.0Hz 17 116.0Hz 27 175.0Hz
8 62.0Hz 71.0Hz 18 122.0Hz 28 180.0Hz
9 68.0Hz 78.0Hz 19 128.0Hz 29 185.0Hz
10 74.0Hz 20 134.0Hz 30 190.0Hz
31 195.0Hz
∗ Compressors may operate in a pattern other than those listed in above tables subject to the operating conditions.
Selection of full load operation to/from unload operation is made with the unload circuit solenoid valve
(Y3S=SVUL). The full load operation is performed with the SVUL set to OFF, while the unload operation is
performed with the SVUL set to ON.
50 Function
SiENBE34-802 Basic Control
2.3 Electronic Expansion Valve PI Control

Main Electronic Expansion Valve EV1 Control
Carries out the electronic expansion valve (Y1E) PI control to maintain the evaporator outlet
superheated degree (SH) at constant during heating operation to make maximum use of the
outdoor unit heat exchanger (evaporator).
SH = Ts1 - Te SH : Evaporator outlet superheated degree (°C)
Ts1 : Suction pipe temperature detected by
thermistor R3T (°C)
Te : Low pressure equivalent saturation temperature
(°C)
The optimum initial value of the evaporator outlet superheated degree is 3°C, but varies
depending on the discharge pipe superheated degree of inverter compressor.
Subcooling Electronic Expansion Valve EV3 Control

Makes PI control of the electronic expansion valve (Y3E) to keep the superheated degree (SH)
of the outlet gas pipe on the evaporator side for the full use of the subcooling heat exchanger.
SH = Tsh -Te SH : Outlet superheated degree of evaporator (°C)
Tsh : Suction pipe temperature detected with the
thermistor R4T (°C)
Te : Low pressure equivalent saturation temperature
(°C)
Function 51
Basic Control SiENBE34-802
2.4 Cooling Operation Fan Control

In cooling operation with low outdoor air temperature, this control is used to provide the
adequate amount of circulation air with liquid pressure secured by high pressure control using
outdoor unit fan.
Furthermore, when outdoor temperature ≥ 20°C, the compressor will run in Step 7 or higher.
When outdoor temperature ≥ 18°C, it will run in Step 5 or higher.
When outdoor temperature ≥ 12°C, it will run in Step 1 or higher.
Upper limit of fan Pc: HP pressure sensor detection value

revolutions: Step 8
Pc<2.75MPa Pc>3.24MPa
Upper limit of outdoor unit

fan revolutions
Step 7
PI control
Lapse of 20 sec.
PI control
-1 step on Hold the +1 step on
current step on
outdoor unit fan outdoor unit fan outdoor unit fan
PI control Lapse of 20 sec.
Fan Steps
Cooling M1F M2F
STEP0 0 rpm 0 rpm
STEP1 250 rpm 0 rpm

STEP2 400 rpm 0 rpm
STEP3 285 rpm 250 rpm
52 Function
SiENBE34-802 Special Control
3. Special Control
3.1 Startup Control
This control is used to equalize the pressure in the front and back of the compressor prior to the startup of the
compressor, thus reducing startup loads. Furthermore, the inverter is turned ON to charge the capacitor.
In addition, to avoid stresses to the compressor due to oil return or else after the startup, the following control is made
and the position of the four way valve is also determined. To position the four way valve, the master and slave units
simultaneously start up.
3.1.1 Startup Control in Cooling Operation
Thermostat ON
Pressure equalization control Startup control

prior to startup STEP1 STEP2
57 Hz Unload
Compressor 0 Hz 57 Hz Unload +2 steps/20 sec.
(until Pc - Pe>0.39MPa is achieved)
Ta<20°C: OFF +1 step/15 sec. (when Pc>2.16MPa)
Outdoor unit fan STEP7 Ta≥20°C: STEP4 -1 step/15 sec. (when Pc<1.77MPa)
Four way valve (20S1) Holds OFF OFF
Main electronic expansion 0 pls 480 pls 480 pls
valve (EV1)
Subcooling electronic 0 pls 0 pls 0 pls
expansion valve (EV3)
Hot gas bypass valve
OFF OFF OFF
(SVP)
Ending conditions OR • Pc - Pe<0.3MPa A lapse of 10 sec. OR • A lapse of 130 sec.

• A lapse of 1 to 5 min. • Pc - Pe>0.39MPa
3.1.2 Startup Control in Heating Operation

Thermostat ON
Pressure equalization control Startup control

prior to startup STEP1 STEP2
57 Hz Unload
Compressor 0 Hz 57 Hz Unload +2 steps/20 sec.
(until Pc - Pe>0.39MPa is achieved)
From starting
~ 1 min. : STEP 7
Outdoor unit fan STEP8 STEP8
1 ~ 3 min. : STEP 3
3 ~ 5 min. : OFF
Four way valve Holds ON ON
Main electronic expansion 0 pls 0 pls 0 pls
valve (EV1)
Subcooling electronic 0 pls 0 pls 0 pls
expansion valve (EV3)
Hot gas bypass valve OFF OFF OFF
(SVP)
• A lapse of 130 sec.

Ending conditions OR • Pc - Pe<0.3MPa A lapse of 10 sec. OR • Pc>2.70MPa
• A lapse of 1 to 5 min. • Pc - Pe>0.39MPa
Function 53
Special Control SiENBE34-802
3.2 Oil Return Operation

In order to prevent the compressor from running out of oil, the oil return operation is conducted to recover oil flown out
from the compressor to the system side.
3.2.1 Oil Return Operation in Cooling Operation
[Start conditions]
Referring to the set conditions for the following items, start the oil return operation in cooling.
• Cumulative oil feed rate
• Timer setting (Make this setting so as to start the oil return operation when the initial cumulative operating time
reaches two hours after power supply is turned ON and then every eight hours.)
Furthermore, the cumulative oil feed rate is computed from Tc, Te, and compressor loads.
Oil return preparation
Outdoor unit actuator Oil return operation Post-oil-return operation
operation
Take the current step as the 52 Hz Full load Same as the “oil return
Compressor (→ Low pressure constant operation” mode.
upper limit. control)
Outdoor unit fan Fan control (Normal cooling) Fan control (Normal cooling) Fan control (Normal cooling)
Four way valve OFF OFF OFF
Main electronic expansion valve 480 pls 480 pls 480 pls
(EV1)
Subcooling electronic expansion SH control 0 pls 0 pls
valve (EV3)
Hot gas bypass valve (SVP) OFF OFF OFF
• 3 min. • 3 min.
Ending conditions 20 sec. or • Ts - Te<5°C or • Pe<0.6MPa
• HTdi>110°C
Indoor unit actuator Cooling oil return operation

Thermostat ON unit Remote Control setting
Fan Stopping unit OFF
Thermostat OFF unit Remote Control setting
Thermostat ON unit Normal opening
Electronic expansion valve Stopping unit 224 pls
Thermostat OFF unit Normal opening with forced thermostat ON
54 Function
3.2.2 Oil Return Operation in Heating Operation

[Conditions to start]
The heating oil-returning operation is started referring following conditions.
Integrated amount of displaced oil
Timer
(After the power is turned on, integrated operating-time is 2 hours and subsequently every 8
hours.)
In addition, integrated amount of displaced oil is derived from Tc, Te, and the compressor
load.
Oil return preparation
Outdoor Unit Actuator Oil return operation Post-oil-return operation
operation
2-step increase from
36 Hz Unload to
Compressor Upper limit control 140 Hz Full load (Pc - Pe>0.4 MPa)
every 20 sec.
Outdoor unit fan STEP8 OFF STEP8
Four way valve ON OFF ON
Main electronic expansion valve SH control 480 pls 55 pls
(EV1)
Subcooling electronic expansion 0 pls 0 pls 0 pls
valve (EV3)
Hot gas bypass valve (SVP) OFF OFF OFF
• 12 min. • 160 sec.

&{• Ts1 - Te<5°C
Ending conditions 2 min. or or • Pc - Pe>0.4MPa
• Tb>11°C
* From the preparing oil-returning operation to the oil-returning operation, and from the oil-
returning operation to the operation after oil-returning, the compressor stops for 1 minute to
reduce noise on changing of the four way valve.
Indoor unit actuator Heating oil return operation

Thermostat ON unit OFF
Thermostat OFF unit OFF
Thermostat ON unit 416 pls
Thermostat OFF unit 416 pls
Function 55
3.3 Defrosting Operation

The defrost operation is performed to solve frost on the outdoor unit heat exchanger when
heating, and the heating capacity is recovered.
[Conditions to start]
The defrost operation is started referring following conditions.
Outdoor heat exchanger heat transfer co-efficiency
Temperature of heat-exchange (Tb)
Timer (2 hours at the minimum)
In addition, outdoor heat-exchange co-efficiency is derived from Tc, Te, and the compressor
load.
Defrost preparation
Outdoor unit actuator Defrost operation Post Defrost operation
operation
2-step increase from
36 Hz Unload to
Compressor Upper limit control 140 Hz Full load (Pc - Pe>0.4 MPa)
every 20 sec.
Outdoor unit fan STEP8 OFF STEP8
Four way valve ON OFF ON
Main electronic expansion valve SH control 480 pls 55 pls
(EV1)
Subcooling electronic expansion 0 pls 0 pls 0 pls
valve (EV3)
Hot gas bypass valve (SVP) OFF ON ON
• 15 min. • 160 sec.

&{• Tb>11°C
Ending conditions 2 min. or or • Pc - Pe>0.4MPa
• Ts1 - Te<5°C
* From the preparing operation to the defrost operation, and from the defrost operation to the
operation after defrost, the compressor stops for 1 minute to reduce noise on changing of the
four way valve.
Indoor unit actuator Heating oil return operation

Thermostat ON unit OFF
Thermostat OFF unit OFF
Thermostat ON unit 416 pls
Thermostat OFF unit 416 pls
56 Function
3.4 Pump-down Residual Operation

When activating compressor, if the liquid refrigerant remains in the heat-exchanger, the liquid
enters into the compressor and dilutes oil therein resulting in decrease of lubricity.
Therefore, the pump-down residual operation is performed to collect the refrigerant in the heat-
exchanger when the compressor is down.
3.4.1 Pump-down Residual Operation in Cooling Operation
Actuator Pump-down residual operation Step 1 Pump-down residual operation Step 2
Compressor 124 Hz Full load 52 Hz Full load
Outdoor unit fan Fan control Fan control
Four way valve OFF OFF
Main electronic expansion valve (EV1) 480 pls 240 pls
Subcooling electronic expansion valve 0 pls 0 pls
(EV3)
Hot gas bypass valve (SVP) OFF OFF
Ending conditions 2 sec. 2 sec.
3.4.2 Pump-down Residual Operation in Heating Operation

Actuator Pump-down residual operation
Compressor 124 Hz Full load
Outdoor unit fan STEP7
Four way valve ON
Main electronic expansion valve (EV1) 0 pls
Subcooling electronic expansion valve 0 pls
(EV3)
Hot gas bypass valve (SVP) OFF
Ending conditions 4 sec.
Function 57
3.5 Restart Standby

Restart is stood by force to prevent frequent power-on/off and to equalize pressure in the
refrigerant system.
Compressor OFF ⎯
Ta>30°C: STEP4
Outdoor unit fan ⎯
Ta≤30°C: OFF
Four way valve Keep former condition. ⎯
Main electronic expansion valve (EV1) 0 pls ⎯
Subcooling electronic expansion valve 0 pls ⎯
(EV3)
Hot gas bypass valve (SVP) OFF ⎯
Ending conditions 2 min. ⎯
58 Function
3.6 Stopping Operation

Operation of the actuator when the system is down, is cleared up.
3.6.1 When System is in Stop Mode
Actuator Operation
Compressor OFF
Outdoor unit fan OFF
Four way valve Keep former condition.
Main electronic expansion valve (EV1) 0 pls
Subcooling electronic expansion valve (EV3) 0 pls
Hot gas bypass valve (SVP) OFF
Ending conditions Indoor unit thermostat is turned ON.
Function 59
Protection Control SiENBE34-802
4. Protection Control
4.1 High Pressure Protection Control
This high pressure protection control is used to prevent the activation of protection devices due
to abnormal increase of high pressure and to protect compressors against the transient
increase of high pressure.
[In cooling operation]

Pc>3.47MPa
High pressure not limited
Pc: HP pressure sensor detection value
INV upper limit frequency=Max
High pressure limited
INV upper limit frequency :

3-step down from current
compressor frequency
After 10 sec. Pc>3.47MPa
Keeping the current step
Pc<3.23MPa After 15 sec.

1-step up from current
Pc>3.64MPa
When occurring 10 times within 60
High pressure minutes, HPS is activated without high
standby pressure standby, thus outputting the
malfunction code "E3".
[In heating operation]
High-pressure drop
Pc>3.04MPa
High pressure not limited
Pc: HP pressure sensor detection value
Pc<2.89MPa
High pressure limited

After 10 sec. Pc>3.04MPa
Keeping the current step
Pc<2.94MPa After 60 sec.

Pc>3.64MPa
When occurring 10 times within 60
High pressure minutes, HPS is activated without
standby high pressure standby, thus
outputting the malfunction code "E3".
60 Function
SiENBE34-802 Protection Control
4.2 Low Pressure Protection Control

This low pressure protection control is used to protect compressors against the transient
decrease of low pressure.
[In cooling operation]
Low pressure not limited

Pe: LP pressure sensor detection
value
Pe<0.25MPa Pe>0.39MPa
Low pressure
Hot gas SVP = OFF
limited
Pe<0.15MPa Pe>0.30MPa
36Hz Unload
Hot gas SVP = ON
Pe<0.07MPa
Low pressure When occurring 3 times within 30 min.,

standby the malfunction code "E4" is output.
[In heating operation]

Pe: LP pressure sensor detection
value
Pe<0.17MPa
Low pressure not limited
• Pe>0.09MPa
or • Ts-Teg<8deg
&
• Pe>0.06MPa
Low pressure limited

Pe<0.17MPa After 10 sec.

Current step limited Hot gas SVP = OFF
Pe>0.20MPa After 15 sec. Pe<0.12MPa Pe>0.17MPa

1-step up from current Hot gas SVP = ON
Pe< 0.07MPa
Low pressure When occurring 3 times within 30 min.,

standby the malfunction code "E4" is output.
Function 61
Protection Control SiENBE34-802
4.3 Discharge Pipe Protection Control

This discharge pipe protection control is used to protect the compressor internal temperature
against a malfunction or transient increase of discharge pipe temperature.
[INV compressor]
Discharge pipe protection

control not limited HTdi : Value of INV compressor discharge pipe
temperature (Tdi) compensated with outdoor
HTdi>115°C air temperature
or Tp : Value of compressor port temperature
Tp>135°C
HTdi<100°C calculated by Tc and Te, and suction
&
INV upper limit frequency: Tp<110°C superheated degree.
After 30 sec.
HTdi>115°C
or
Tp>135°C
& HTdi<110°C
Tp<125°C
HTdi>130°C In discharge pipe temp. INV upper limit frequency: 1-step up
HTdi>120°C protection control from current compressor frequency
or for 90 sec.
After 20 sec.
or more.
or HTdi>135°C
36 Hz Unload HTdi>120°C for 10 min. or more.
Discharge pipe When occurring 3 times within 100 minutes,

temperature standby the malfunction code “F3” is output.
62 Function
SiENBE34-802 Protection Control
4.4 Inverter Protection Control

Inverter current protection control and inverter fin temperature control are performed to prevent
tripping due to a malfunction, or transient inverter overcurrent, and fin temperature increase.
[Inverter overcurrent protection control]
Not limited
Inverter current >12A & • Inverter current ⱕ 12A

• INV upper limit frequency=max Hz
Limited
INV upper limit frequency:

• 10 sec. Inverter current > 12A

& • Matching of frequency
Status quo
Inverter current ⱕ 12A Without conditions

continues for 3 min.
Inverter current ⱖ 13.1A continues for 260 sec.
Inverter current • When occurring 4 times within 60 min.,

standby the malfunction code “L8” is output.
[Inverter fin temperature control]
Not limited
• Tfin < 76°C

Tfin ⱖ 79°C & •INV upper limit frequency=max Hz
Limited

•10 sec. Tfin ⱖ 79°C

&
•Macthing of frequency
Status quo
Tfin ⱕ 76°C
Without conditions
continues for 3 min.
Tfin ⱖ 84°C
Fin temp. standby • When occurring 4 times within 60 min.,

the malfunction code “L4” is output.
Function 63
Other Control SiENBE34-802
5. Other Control
5.1 Demand Operation
In order to save the power consumption, the capacity of outdoor unit is saved with control
forcibly by using “Demand 1 Setting”.
To operate the unit with this mode, additional setting of “Continuous Demand Setting”.
[Demand 1 setting]
Setting Standard for upper limit of power consumption
Demand 1 setting 1 Approx. 60%
Demand 1 setting 2 (factory setting) Approx. 70%
Demand 1 setting 3 Approx. 80%
H Other protection control functions have precedence over the above operation.
5.2 Heating Operation Prohibition

Heating operation is prohibited above 24°CDB outdoor air temperature.
64 Function
SiENBE34-802 Outline of Control (Indoor Unit)
6. Outline of Control (Indoor Unit)

6.1 Drain Pump Control
1. The drain pump is controlled by the ON/OFF buttons (4 button (1) - (4) given in the figure
below).
6.1.1 When the Float Switch is Tripped while the Cooling Thermostat is
ON:
Remote control “A3” flashing
malfunction stop
ON
Thermostat
(running) OFF
ON
Float switch
OFF
ON
Drain pump
OFF
(VL008)
5 min. 5 min. 5 sec.
*1) Residual operation Malfunction residual
∗ 1. The objective of residual operation is to completely drain any moisture adhering to the fin of
the indoor unit heat exchanger when the thermostat goes off during cooling operation.
6.1.2 When the Float Switch is Tripped while the Cooling Thermostat is
OFF:
Enters malfunction treatment if the float switch is not reset within 5 minutes.
ON Remote control "A3" flashing malfunction stop

Termostat
(running) OFF
ON
Float switch
OFF
ON
Drain pump
OFF
5min 5 sec 5min 5 sec (VL009)
Function 65
Outline of Control (Indoor Unit) SiENBE34-802
6.1.3 When the Float Switch is Tripped During Heating Operation:
ON Remote control “A3” flashing malfunction stop

Thermostat
(running)
OFF
ON
Humidifier
OFF
ON Reset
Float switch
OFF
ON
Drain pump
OFF
5 min. 5 sec. 5 min.

(VL010)
During heating operation, if the float switch is not reset even after the 5 minutes operation, 5
seconds stop, 5 minutes operation cycle ends, operation continues until the switch is reset.
6.1.4 When the Float Switch is Tripped and “AF” is Displayed on the
Remote Control:
Enters malfunction treatment
if the float switch is not reset
within 5 minutes.
“AF” display (running) Remote control “A3” flashing
Remote control malfunction stop
display
ON
Float switch
OFF
1st time 2nd time 3rd time 4th time 5th time
ON
Drain pump
OFF
*1 = 5 min. *1 *1 *1 *1 *1 *1 *1 (VL011)
Note: If the float switch is tripped five times in succession, a drain malfunction is determined to have
occurred. “AF” is then displayed as operation continues.
66 Function
6.2 Louver Control for Preventing Ceiling Dirt

We have added a control feature that allows you to select the range of in which air direction can
be adjusted in order to prevent the ceiling surrounding the air discharge outlet of ceiling
mounted cassette type units from being soiled. (This feature is available on double flow, multi-
flow and corner types.)
Existing position
P0
P1
P2
P3
P4
Ceiling soiling prevention

Draft prevention position Standard Setting position position
(Not for Multi flow type)
P0 P0 P0
P1 P1
P0' P2
P2
P3 P1' P4 P0''
P4 P1''
P4 P2'
P2''
P3' P3''
P4' P4''
Draft
prevention P0 P1 P2 P3 P4 Same as existing position
position
Range of direction adjustment
Standard Separated into 5 positions

position
Prohibited P0' P1' P2' P3' P4' (P1 - 4)
Range of direction adjustment

Dirt Separated into 5 positions
prevention Prohibited P0'' P1'' P2'' P3'' P4'' (P2 - 4)
position
The factory set position is standard position. (VL012)
Function 67
6.3 Thermostat Sensor in Remote Control

Temperature is controlled by both the thermostat sensor in Remote Control and air suction
thermostat in the indoor unit. (This is however limited to when the field setting for the thermostat
sensor in Remote Control is set to “Use.” )
Cooling If there is a significant difference in the preset temperature and the suction temperature, fine
adjustment control is carried out using a body thermostat sensor, or using the sensor in the
Remote Control near the position of the user when the suction temperature is near the preset
temperature.
Preset temperature
(Ts)
Suction temperature (TH1)
Range in which thermostat Range in which body thermo-

sensor in remote control can stat sensor can be used Differential
be used (VG003)
Ex: When cooling

Assuming the preset temperature in the figure above is 24°C, and the suction
temperature has changed from 18°C to 30°C (A → F):
(This example also assumes there are several other air conditioners, the VRV system is off, and
that temperature changes even when the thermostat sensor is off.)
Body thermostat sensor is used for temperatures from 18°C to 23°C (A → C).
Remote Control thermostat sensor is used for temperatures from 23°C to 27°C (C → E).
Body thermostat sensor is used for temperatures from 27°C to 30°C (E → F).
And, assuming suction temperature has changed from 30°C to 18°C (F → A):
Body thermostat sensor is used for temperatures from 30°C to 25°C (F → D).
Remote Control thermostat sensor is used for temperatures from 25°C to 21°C (D → B).
Body thermostat sensor is used for temperatures from 21°C to 18°C (B → A).
68 Function
Heating When heating, the hot air rises to the top of the room, resulting in the temperature being lower
near the floor where the occupants are. When controlling by body thermostat sensor only, the
unit may therefore be turned off by the thermostat before the lower part of the room reaches the
preset temperature. The temperature can be controlled so the lower part of the room where the
occupants are doesn’t become cold by widening the range in which thermostat sensor in
Remote Control can be used so that suction temperature is higher than the preset temperature.
Preset temperature
(Ts)
Suction temperature (TH1)
Range in which thermostat Range in which body

sensor in remote control can thermostat sensor can be Differential
be used used
(V2769)
Ex: When heating

Assuming the preset temperature in the figure above is 24°C, and the suction
temperature has changed from 18°C to 28°C (A → D):
(This example also assumes there are several other air conditioners, the VRV system is off, and
that temperature changes even when the thermostat sensor is off.)
Body thermostat sensor is used for temperatures from 18°C to 25°C (A → C).
Remote Control thermostat sensor is used for temperatures from 25°C to 28°C (C → D).
And, assuming suction temperature has changed from 28°C to 18°C (D → A):
Remote Control thermostat sensor is used for temperatures from 28°C to 23°C (D → B).
Body thermostat sensor is used for temperatures from 23°C to 18°C (B → A).
Function 69
6.4 Freeze Prevention

Freeze When the temperature detected by liquid pipe temperature thermistor (R2T) of the indoor unit
Prevention by Off heat exchanger drops too low, the unit enters freeze prevention operation in accordance with
Cycle (Indoor the following conditions, and is also set in accordance with the conditions given below.
Unit)
Conditions for starting freeze prevention: Temperature is –1°C or less for total of 40 min., or
temperature is –5°C or less for total of 10 min.
Conditions for stopping freeze prevention: Temperature is +7°C or more for 10 min.
continuously
Ex: Case where temperature is –5°C or less for total of 10 min.
10 min.
+ 7 °C
+ 0 °C
- 5 °C
Freeze prevention operation
10 min. Freeze OFF by thermostat
(VG005)
70 Function
6.5 View of Operations of Swing Flaps

Swing flaps work as following.
Flap control
Fan FXCQ
FXFQ FXKQ FXAQ
FXHQ
Hot-start from Swinging OFF Level Level Level
defrosting Setting the wind direction OFF Level Level Level
Swinging OFF Level Level Level
Defrosting
Setting the wind direction OFF Level Level Level
Heating
Swinging LL Level Level Level

Thermostat is off
Setting the wind direction LL Level Level Level
Hot-start from the Swinging LL Level Level Level
state that the
thermostat is off Setting the wind direction LL Level Level Level
Halt
Setting the wind direction OFF Level Level Level
Thermostat of Swinging L*1 Swinging Swinging Swinging
microcomputer-dry *1
is on Setting the wind direction L Set up Set up Set up
Thermostat of Swinging OFF Swinging Swinging Swinging
microcomputer-dry or
is off Setting the wind direction L Set up Set up Set up
Cooling
Cooling thermostat Swinging Set up Swinging Swinging Swinging

is off Setting the wind direction Set up Set up Set up Set up
Halt
Setting the wind direction OFF Set up Level Level
Microcomputer is Swinging L Swinging Swinging Swinging
controlled (including
the cooling state) Setting the wind direction L Set up Set up Set up
* 1. Only in FXFQ case, L or LL.
Function 71
6.6 Electronic Expansion Valve Control

• Electronic expansion Valve Control
In cooling, to maximize the capacity of indoor unit heat exchanger (evaporator), operate the
electronic expansion valve under PI control so that the evaporator outlet superheated degree
(SH) will become constant.
In heating, to maximize the capacity of indoor unit heat exchanger (condenser), operate the
electronic expansion valve under PI control so that the evaporator outlet superheated degree
(Condenser outlet subcooled degree) will become constant.
Cooling SH=TH2-TH1 SH : Evaporator outlet superheated degree

(Heating SC=TC-TH1) TH1: Temperature (°C) detected with the liquid thermistor
TH2: Temperature (°C) detected with the gas thermistor
SC : Condenser outlet subcooled degree
TC : High pressure equivalent saturated temperature
Furthermore, the default value of the optimal evaporator outlet superheated degree (condenser
outlet subcooled degree) is 5 deg. However, this default value varies with the operating
performance.
6.7 Hot Start Control (In Heating Operation Only)

At startup with thermostat ON or after the completion of defrosting in heating operation, the
indoor unit fan is controlled to prevent cold air from blasting out and ensure startup capacity.
[Detail of operation]
When either the start condition 1 or the start condition 2 is established, the operations shown
below will be conducted.
Defrost ending or oil return ending Hot start ending conditions

or Thermostat ON · lapse of 3 minutes
OR · [TH2]>34°C
· "Tc">52°C
Hot start control Hot start in progress
H/L remote Normal control

control setting
Fan
LL The fan is not OFF before initiating the hot start: LL

The fan is OFF before initiating the hot start: OFF
OFF
Remote control Normal control

Louver
setting
Po (Horizontal)
TH2: Temperature (°C) detected with the gas thermistor

TC : High pressure equivalent saturated temperature
72 Function
SiENBE34-802
Part 6
Test Operation
1. Test Operation ......................................................................................74

1.1 Procedure and Outline..................................................................74
1.2 Operation when Power is Turned On ...........................................85
2. Outdoor Unit PC Board Layout .............................................................86
3. Field Setting ..........................................................................................87
3.1 Field Setting from Remote Control ...............................................87
3.2 Field Setting from Outdoor Unit ..................................................104
Test Operation 73
Test Operation SiENBE34-802
1. Test Operation
1.1 Procedure and Outline
Follow the following procedure to conduct the initial test operation after installation.
1.1.1 Check Work Prior to Turn Power Supply On

Is the power supply three-phase 380-415V / 50Hz?
Check the below items.
Have you finished a ductwork to drain?
2Power wiring
Have you detach transport fitting?
2Control transmission wiring
Is the wiring performed as specified?
between units
Are the designated wires used?
2Earth wire
Is the grounding work completed?
Use a 500V megger tester to measure the insulation.
2 Do not use a megger tester for other circuits than 380-415V circuit.
Are the setscrews of wiring not loose?
Is the electrical component box covered with an insulation cover
completely?
Check on refrigerant piping Is pipe size proper? (The design pressure of this product is
4.0MPa.)
Are pipe insulation materials installed securely?
Liquid and gas pipes need to be insulated. (Otherwise causes
water leak.)
Are respective stop valves on liquid and gas line securely open?
Is refrigerant charged up to the specified amount?

Check on amount of refrigerant
If insufficient, charge the refrigerant from the service port of stop
charge
valve on the liquid side with outdoor unit in stop mode after turning
power on.
Has the amount of refrigerant charge been recorded on “Record
Chart of Additional Refrigerant Charge Amount”?
(V3180)
1.1.2 Turn Power On

Turn outdoor unit power on. Be sure to turn the power on 6 hours before starting operation to
protect compressors.
Close outside panels of the outdoor unit.
Turn indoor unit power on.
Carry out field setting on

outdoor PC board
(V3056)
74 Test Operation
SiENBE34-802 Test Operation
1.1.3 Air Tight Test and Vacuum Drying

Air tight test: Make sure to use nitrogen gas.
Pressurize the liquid and gas pipes to 4.0 MPa (40 bar) (do not pressurize more than 4.0
MPa (40 bar)). If the pressure does not drop within 24 hours, the system passes the test. If
the pressure drops, check where the nitrogen leaks from.
Vacuum drying: Use a vacuum pump which can evacuate to –100.7 kPa (5 Torr, –755 mm
Hg)
1. Evacuate the system from the liquid and gas pipes by using a vacuum pump for more
than 2 hours and bring the system to –100.7 kPa. After keeping the system under that
condition for more than 1 hour, check if the vacuum gauge rises or not. If it rises, the
system may either contain moisture inside or have leaks.
2. Following should be executed if there is a possibility of moisture remaining inside the
pipe (if piping work is carried out during the raining season or over a long period of time,
rainwater may enter the pipe during work).
After evacuating the system for 2 hours, pressurize the system to 0.05 MPa (vacuum break)
with nitrogen gas and evacuate the system again using the vacuum pump for 1 hour to –100.7
kPa (vacuum drying). If the system cannot be evacuated to –100.7 kPa within 2 hours, repeat
the operation of vacuum break and vacuum drying.
Then, after leaving the system in vacuum for 1 hour, confirm that the vacuum gauge does not
rise.
1.1.4 Additional Refrigerant Charge

Refrigerant cannot be charged until field wiring has been completed.
Refrigerant may only be charged after performing the leak test and the vacuum drying (see
above).
When charging a system, care shall be taken that its maximum permissible charge is never
exceeded, in view of the danger of liquid hammer.
Charging with an unsuitable substance may cause explosions and accidents, so always
ensure that the appropriate refrigerant (R-410A) is charged.
Refrigerant containers shall be opened slowly.
Always use protective gloves and protect your eyes when charging refrigerant.
When performing service on the unit requiring the refrigerant system to be opened,
refrigerant must be evacuated according to local regulations.
Do not use the automatic refrigerant charging function while working on the indoor units.
When using the automatic refrigerant charging function, the indoor units operate
automatically as well as the outdoor unit.
When the power is on, please close the front panel when leaving the unit.
Outdoor unit
Gas line stop valve

Liquid line stop valve
Stop valve service port

Indoor unit Indoor unit
system
Siphon
Pressure reducing valve Valve A
Tank
Nitrogen Measuring Vacuum Charge hose

instrument pomp
Fig. 6
Test Operation 75
To avoid compressor breakdown. Do not charge the refrigerant more than the specified
amount.
This outdoor unit is factory charged with refrigerant and depending on pipe sizes and pipe
lengths some systems require additional charging of refrigerant. See "How to calculate the
additional refrigerant to be charged" on page 249.
In case re-charge is required, refer to the nameplate of the unit. The nameplate states the
type of refrigerant and necessary amount.
Precautions when adding R-410A

Be sure to charge the specified amount of refrigerant in liquid state to the liquid pipe.
Since this refrigerant is a mixed refrigerant, adding it in gas form may cause the refrigerant
composition to change, preventing normal operation.
Before charging, check whether the refrigerant cylinder is equipped with a siphon tube or
not.
Charge the liquid Charge the liquid
refrigerant with the cylinder refrigerant with the cylinder
in upright position. in up-side-down position.
1.1.4.1 Important information regarding the refrigerant used

This product contains fluorinated greenhouse gases covered by the Kyoto Protocol. Do not vent
gases into the atmosphere.
Refrigerant type: R-410A
GWP(1) value: 1975
(1) GWP = global warming potential
Please fill in with indelible ink,

1 the factory refrigerant charge of the product,
2 the additional refrigerant amount charged in the field and
1 + 2 the total refrigerant charge
on the refrigerant charge label supplied with the product.
The filled out label must be adhered in the proximity of the product charging port (e.g. onto the
inside of the service cover).
Contains fluorinated greenhouse gases covered by the Kyoto Protocol Contains fluorinated greenhouse gases
covered by the Kyoto Protocol
factory refrigerant charge of the product:
see unit name plate
additional refrigerant amount charged
in the field
total refrigerant charge
outdoor unit
refrigerant cylinder and

manifold for charging
76 Test Operation
1.1.4.2 Procedures for adding refrigerant
Procedure 1: Adding refrigerant by using the automatic refrigerant charging function

(recommended)
How to connect the tank?

Liquid line stop valve
Gas line stop valve Liquid line stop valve
V1 Service port for Y1 Gas line stop valve
adding refrigerant
Valve A Pipe fixing plate
Valve A
Service port for adding refrigerant

R-410A tank R-410A tank
Measuring instrument Measuring instrument

To indoor unit To indoor unit
When the refrigerant tank is connected and the specified operation is performed, the
appropriate amount of refrigerant will be charged into the system. After charging, the system will
stop automatically. The refrigerant must be charged according to the procedure described
below.
Caution Make sure to turn ON the power 6 hours before starting the operation. This is necessary to
warm the crankcase by the electric heater.
Automatic charging is able to charge 6 kg/hour refrigerant at an outside temperature of 0°C
to 24 kg/hour refrigerant at an outside temperature of 35°C.
The charging time depends on the amount of charged refrigerant and on the outside
temperature.
Automatic refrigerant charging is NOT possible if the following restrictions are exceeded:
Outside temperature: 0°C DB~43°C DB
Indoor temperature: 0°C DB~32°C DB
Indoor unit connection capacity: 50%~130%
Automatic refrigerant charging procedure

1. Open the liquid and gas side stop valves completely.
Note that valve A must be closed!
2. Turn on the power of the outdoor unit and indoor units.
Note When an indoor unit is connected to the refrigerant system and the indoor unit is turned off,
automatic charging will fail.
3. Make sure that the led on the PCB on the outdoor unit are as shown in the table below. This
indicates that the system is operating normally.
Test/HWL
Demand
L.N.O.P.
Master
Mode
Slave
Ind
H1P H2P H3P H4P H5P H6P H7P
Test Operation 77
Led state
Throughout the manual the state of the leds is indicated as follows:
h OFF
i ON
j blinking
* ON or OFF
If H2P is lit up, check the type of error based on the error code in the remote control and correct
the error in accordance with “1.1.5 Check Operation” on page 82.
4. Automatically charge the refrigerant according to the procedure described below.
Warning Do not touch anything else than the push-buttons (BS1~5) on the PCB when making
the settings. These settings must be done with the power on
4.1 Press BS4 TEST once.

4.2 Press BS4 TEST for 5 seconds. The unit will start running.
* *
If the led display below appears, the automatic refrigerant charging restriction has been
exceeded. Additional refrigerant must be charged by calculating the additional refrigerant
charging amount.
H1P H2P H3P H4P H5P H6P H7P Description of error
Inappropriate outdoor
temperature
or
Inappropriate indoor
temperature
If the led display below appears, check the indoor unit connection capacity.
Inappropriate indoor unit

connection capacity
If the led display below appears, the liquid and gas side stop valves may be closed.
* * * * *
Stop valve is closed
Note If you want to repeat the automatic refrigerant charging operation from step 4.1, fully open the
liquid and gas side stop valves and press the BS1 MODE button once.
4.3 When the led indication becomes as shown in the table below in about 15 to 30 minutes
after start of operation, open valve A at once to start charging of the refrigerant.
Immediately after starting charging of the refrigerant by opening valve A, press BS4 TEST
once. When BS4 TEST is not pressed within 10 minutes after the led indication is shown,
charging is stopped.
H1P H2P H3P H4P H5P H6P H7P Code on remote control
PA
78 Test Operation
4.4 The led indication becomes as shown in the table below during automatic refrigerant
charging.
During automatic refrigerant charging, the remote control indicates TEST (test operation)
and (external control).
* * * * *
Note If the led display below appears, the refrigerant tank is empty. Replace the refrigerant tank,
open valve A and re-charge.
PA
The led indication becomes as shown in the table below when automatic refrigerant charging is
about to end. Prepare to close the valve on the refrigerant tank.
PE
Note It is possible that the code PE is not shown on the remote control but this does not indicate a
malfunction. The led indication can immediately shift to the situation as shown in "Case 1:
Charging complete" on page 79.
4.5 When the led indication becomes as shown in the table below, quickly close valve A and
follow instructions as described below.
Caution When adding refrigerant is done or when pausing, close the valve on the refrigerant tank
immediately.
More refrigerant might be charged by any remaining pressure after the machine is stopped.
The outdoor fan may keep rotating a little bit more, but this does not indicate a malfunction.
Case 1: Charging complete

P9
Charging of the refrigerant is complete. Press BS1 MODE button once and go to step 5.
Case 2: Recharging operation

P8
Press BS1 MODE button once and perform automatic refrigerant charging again starting from
Step 4.1.
Case 3: Charging interrupted

P2
Something is preventing normal operation:

Is the gas side stop valve completely open?
Are the valve on the refrigerant tank and valve A open?
Check if the BS4 TEST button was pressed within 10 minutes after the valves were opened.
Is the indoor unit air intake vent or outlet vent blocked?
After correcting the problem, press BS1 MODE button once and perform automatic refrigerant
charging again starting from step 4.1.
Test Operation 79
Case 4: Failure
Error code on remote

H1P H2P H3P H4P H5P H6P H7P control
See footnote (*)
(*) An error in the system interrupted the operation of the unit. Check the
error by using the error code displayed on the remote control. For an
explanation of error codes, see "Error codes on the remote control" on
page 75 and solve the problem.
After correcting the problem, press BS1 MODE button once and perform automatic refrigerant
charging again starting from step 4.1.
5. When charging is complete, determine the weight of refrigerant that was added and fill in the
amount in the "Additional refrigerant charge label" attached to service precautions plate on
the unit.
6. After adding the refrigerant, do not forget to close the lid of the service port. The tightening
torque for the lid is 11.5~13.9 N•m.
Service port for adding refrigerant 1
V1 Y1
Liquid Pipe fixing plate

line stop Liquid line stop valve
valve
Gas line Gas line stop valve

stop
valve
Procedure 2: Charging while the outdoor unit is at a standstill
See figure 6 on page 75.
1. Determine the weight of refrigerant to be charged additionally referring to the item

"Additional refrigerant charge" in "How to calculate the additional refrigerant to be charged"
on page 249 and fill in the amount in the "Additional refrigerant charge label" attached to the
unit.
2. After the vacuum drying is finished, open valve A and charge the additional refrigerant in its
liquid state through the service port on the liquid stop valve taking into account following
instructions:
- Turn on the power of the outdoor unit and indoor units.
- Check that gas and liquid stop valves are closed.
- Stop the compressor and charge the specified weight of refrigerant.
80 Test Operation
To avoid compressor breakdown. Do not charge the refrigerant more than the specified
amount.
If the total refrigerant cannot be charged while the outdoor unit is at a standstill, it is possible
to charge the refrigerant by operating the outdoor unit using the refrigerant charge function
(refer to “Setting mode 2” on page 108) and follow "Procedure 3: Charging while the outdoor
unit is operating" on page 81.
Procedure 3: Charging while the outdoor unit is operating
See the figure in "How to connect the tank?" on page 77.
1. Completely open the gas side stop valve and liquid side stop valve. Valve A must be left fully
closed.
2. Close the front panel and turn on the power to all indoor units and the outdoor unit.
3. Open valve A immediately after starting of the compressor.
4. Charge the additional refrigerant in its liquid state through the service port of the liquid line
stop valve.
5. While the unit is at a standstill and under setting mode 2 (refer to Checks before initial start-
up, "Setting mode 2" on page 108), set the required function A (additional refrigerant
charging operation) to ON (ON). Then operation starts. The blinking H2P led indicates test
operation and the remote control indicates TEST (test operation) and (external
control).
6. When the specified amount of refrigerant is charged, push the BS3 RETURN button. Then
operation stops.
The operation automatically stops within 30 minutes.
If the refrigerant charge cannot be finished within 30 minutes, repeat step 5.
If the operation stops immediately after restart, there is a possibility that the system is
overcharged.
The refrigerant cannot be charged more than this amount.
7. After the refrigerant charge hose is removed, make sure to close valve A.
Test Operation 81
1.1.5 Check Operation

* During check operation, mount front panel to avoid the misjudging.
* Check operation is mandatory for normal unit operation.
(When the check operation is not executed, alarm code "U3" will be displayed.)
Set to setting mode 1 (H1P led

is off) (refer to "Setting mode 1"
on page 107.)
Press and hold the TEST The test operation is started automatically.
OPERATION button (BS4) on The following judgements are conducted within 15 minutes(about 30
outdoor unit PC board for 5 minutes at the maximum).
seconds. 2“Check for wrong wiring”
2“Check stop valve for not open”
2“Check of refrigerant charge”
2“Pipe length automatic judgement”
The following indications are conducted while in test operation.
2LED lamp on outdoor unit PC board H2P flickers (test operation)
2Remote control Indicates “UNDER CENTRALIZED
CONTROL” on upper right.
Check on operation Indicates “TEST OPERATION” on lower left.
(V3057)
On completion of test operation, LED on outdoor unit PC board displays the following.
H3P ON: Normal completion
H2P ON: Abnormal completion →Check the indoor unit remote control for
abnormal display and correct it.
82 Test Operation
Malfunction code
In case of an alarm code displayed on remote control:
Malfunction
Nonconformity during installation Remedial action
code
The shutoff valve of an outdoor unit is left Open the gas-side shutoff valve and the liquid-side shutoff valve.
closed.
E3 Recalculate the required amount of refrigerant from the piping
Refrigerant overcharge. length and correct the refrigerant charge level by recovering any
excessive refrigerant with a refrigerant recovery machine.
closed.
Check if the additional refrigerant charge has been finished
E4 correctly.
Insufficient refrigerant.
Recalculate the required amount of refrigerant from the piping
length and add an adequate amount of refrigerant.
Refrigerant overcharge. length and correct the refrigerant charge level by recovering any
F3 closed.
Check if the additional refrigerant charge has been finished
correctly.
Insufficient refrigerant.
length and add an adequate amount of refrigerant.
F6 Refrigerant overcharge length and correct the refrigerant charge level by recovering any
Power supply cables are connected in the Connect the power supply cables in normal phase. Change any
U1 reverse phase instead of the normal phase. two of the three power supply cables (L1, L2, L3) to correct phase.
U2 Insufficient supply voltage Check to see if the supply voltage is supplied properly.
If a check operation has not been
U3 Perform a check operation.
performed.
U4 No power is supplied to an outdoor unit. Turn the power on for the outdoor unit.
Check the indoor unit. If it is not a dedicated unit, replace the
UA If no dedicated indoor unit is being used. indoor unit.
closed.
UF
If the right indoor unit piping and wiring are Make sure that the right indoor unit piping and wiring are properly
not properly connected to the outdoor unit. connected to the outdoor unit.
If the interunit wiring has not be connected Make sure the interunit wiring is correctly attached to terminals
UH or it has shorted. (X2M) F1/F2 (TO IN/D UNIT) on the outdoor unit circuit board.
Test Operation 83
1.1.6 Confirmation on Normal Operation

• Conduct normal unit operation after the check operation has been completed.
(When outdoor air temperature is 24°CDB or higher, the unit can not be operated with
heating mode. See the installation manual attached.)
• Confirm that the indoor/outdoor units can be operated normally.
(When an abnormal noise due to liquid compression by the compressor can be heard, stop
the unit immediately, and turn on the crankcase heater to heat up it sufficiently, then start
operation again.)
• Operate indoor unit one by one to check that the corresponding outdoor unit operates.
• Confirm that the indoor unit discharges cold air (or warm air).
• Operate the air direction control button and flow rate control button to check the function of
the devices.
84 Test Operation
1.2 Operation when Power is Turned On

1.2.1 When Turning On Power First Time
The unit cannot be run for up to 12 minutes to automatically set the master power and address
(indoor-outdoor address, etc.).
Status
Outdoor unit Test lamp H2P .... Blinks
Can also be set during operation described above.
Indoor unit If ON button is pushed during operation described above, the “UH”
malfunction indicator blinks.
(Returns to normal when automatic setting is complete.)
1.2.2 When Turning On Power the Second Time and Subsequent

Tap the RESET(BS5) button on the outdoor unit PC board. Operation becomes possible for
about 2 minutes. If you do not push the RESET button, the unit cannot be run for up to 10
minutes to automatically set master power.
Status
Outdoor unit Test lamp H2P .... Blinks
Indoor unit If ON button is pushed during operation described above, the operation lamp
lights but the compressor does not operate. (Returns to normal when
automatic setting is complete.)
1.2.3 When an Indoor Unit or Outdoor Unit has been Added, or Indoor or
Outdoor Unit PC Board has been Changed
Be sure to push and hold the RESET button for 5 seconds. If not, the addition cannot be
recognized. In this case, the unit cannot be run for up to 12 minutes to automatically set the
address (indoor-outdoor address, etc.)
Status
Outdoor unit Test lamp H2P .... ON
Indoor unit If ON button is pushed during operation described above, the “UH” or “U4”
malfunction indicator blinks. (Returns to normal when automatic setting is
complete.)
Test Operation 85
Outdoor Unit PC Board Layout SiENBE34-802
2. Outdoor Unit PC Board Layout
RXYSQ4 / 5 / 6PA7Y1B A1P
A2P
X1M X2M
A3P
A2P
A4P
X2M
Changeover between
X1M Test cooling and heating Low
Page
Error Individual Batch
(master)
Batch
(slave) noise Demand
DIP switches
(DS1-1 and DS1-2)
ON
MODE SET RETURN TEST RESET OFF
Sets the address again when the wiring

is changed or an indoor unit is added.
Performs the test run.
Used at field set.
Changes the set mode.
LED indicator status Turn off Turn on Flicker Turn on or off

(The LED indicator status shown at left indicates the status at factory set.)
86 Test Operation
SiENBE34-802 Field Setting
3. Field Setting
3.1 Field Setting from remote control
Individual function of indoor unit can be changed from the remote control. At the time of
installation or after service inspection / repair, make the local setting in accordance with the
following description.
Wrong setting may cause malfunction.
(When optional accessory is mounted on the indoor unit, setting for the indoor unit may be
required to change. Refer to information in the option handbook.)
3.1.1 Wired remote control

BRC1C62
UNIT NO. MODE NO.

SECOND . FIELD
CODE NO. UNIT NO.
SET
FIRST MODE
. SETTING
CODE NO. 3 4
1 7 TEST
6 5 2
(V0292)
1. When in the normal mode, press the “ ” button for a minimum of four seconds, and the
FIELD SET MODE is entered.
2. Select the desired MODE NO. with the “ ” button (2).
3. During group control, when setting by each indoor unit (mode No. 20, 22 and 23 have been
selected), push the “ ” button (3) and select the INDOOR UNIT NO to be set. (This
operation is unnecessary when setting by group.)
4. Push the “ ” upper button (4) and select FIRST CODE NO.
5. Push the “ ” lower button (5) and select the SECOND CODE NO.
6. Push the “ ” button (6) once and the present settings are SET.
7. Push the “ ” button (7) to return to the NORMAL MODE.
(Example)
If during group setting and the time to clean air filter is set to FILTER CONTAMINATION,
HEAVY, SET MODE NO. to “10” FIRST CODE NO. to “0”, and SECOND CODE NO. to “02”.
Test Operation 87
Field Setting SiENBE34-802
BRC1D528
UNIT NO.
FIRST MODE NO.
CODE NO. UNIT No.
SECOND GROUP
SETTING
FIELD
CODE NO. SET
4 MODE
3
1
7
6 5 2
If optional accessories are mounted on the indoor unit, the indoor unit setting may have to be
changed. Refer to the instruction manual for each optional accessory.
1. When in the normal mode, press the “ ” button for a minimum of four seconds, and the
FIELD SET MODE is entered.
2. Select the desired MODE NO. with the “ ” button.
3. During group control, when setting by each indoor unit (mode No. 20, 21, 22 and 23 have
been selected), push the “ ” button and select the INDOOR UNIT NO. to be set. (This
operation is unnecessary when setting by group.)
4. Push the “ ” upper button and select FIRST CODE NO.
5. Push the “ ” lower button and select the SECOND CODE NO.
6. Push the “ ” button once and the present settings are SET.
7. Push the “ ” button to return to the NORMAL MODE.
(Example)
If during group setting and the time to clean the air filter is set to FILTER CONTAMINATION -
HEAVY, SET MODE NO. to “10”, FIRST CODE NO. to “0”, and SECOND CODE NO. to “02”.
Notes : 1. Setting is carried out in the group mode, however, if the mode number inside the
parentheses is selected, indoor units can also be set individually.
2. The SECOND CODE number is set to “01” when shipped from the factory.
3. Do not make any settings not given in the table.
4. Not displayed if the indoor unit is not equipped with that function.
5. When returning to the normal mode, “88” may be displayed in the LCD in order for the
remote control to initialize itself.
6. It is not possible to change field settings on the remote control that is set to “sub”.
88 Test Operation
3.1.2 Infrared remote control - Indoor Unit

BRC7 type
BRC4 type
MODE NO.
FIELD SET MODE
SECOND CODE NO.

FIRST CODE NO.
1. When in the normal mode, push the “ ” button for 4 seconds or more, and operation
then enters the “field set mode.”
2. Select the desired “mode No.” with the “ ” button.
3. Pushing the “ UP ” button, select the first code No.
4. Pushing the “ DOWN ” button, select the second code No.
5. Push the timer “ ” button and check the settings.
6. Push the “ ” button to return to the normal mode.
(Example)
When setting the filter sign time to “Filter Dirtiness-High” in all group unit setting, set the Mode
No. to “10”, Mode setting No. to “0” and setting position No. to “02”.
Test Operation 89
3.1.3 Simplified remote control

BRC2C51
MODE NO.
FIRST
CODE NO.
UNIT NO.
SECOND
CODE NO.
1. Remove the upper part of remote control.

2. When in the normal mode, press the [BS6] BUTTON (2) (field set), and the FIELD SET
MODE is entered.
3. Select the desired MODE No. with the [BS2] BUTTON (3) (temperature setting s) and the
[BS3] BUTTON (3) (temperature setting t).
4. During group control, when setting by each indoor unit (mode No. 20, 22, and 23 have been
selected), push the [BS8] (4) BUTTON (unit No.) and select the INDOOR UNIT NO. to be
set. (This operation is unnecessary when setting by group.)
5. Push the [BS9] BUTTON (5) (set A) and select FIRST CODE NO.
6. Push the [BS10] BUTTON (6) (set B) and select SECOND CODE NO.
7. Push the [BS7] BUTTON (7) (set/cancel) once and the present settings are SET.
8. Push the [BS6] BUTTON (8) (field set) to return to the NORMAL MODE.
9. (Example) If during group setting and the time to clean air filter is set to FILTER
CONTAMINATION - HEAVY, SET MODE NO. to “10”, FIRST CODE NO. to “0”, and
SECOND CODE NO. to “02”.
90 Test Operation
3.1.4 Setting Contents and Code No. – VRV Indoor unit

Mode Setting Second Code No.(Note 3)
Details
No. Switch Setting Contents No.
Note 2 No. 01 02 03 04
Super Approx. Approx.
Filter contamination long life 10,000 5,000
heavy/light (Setting for
display time to clean air filter hrs. hrs.
filter) Approx. Approx.
0
(Sets display time to clean
Long life Light
2,500
Heavy
1,250 — — (1)
air filter to half when there filter hrs. hrs.
10 is heavy filter Standard Approx. Approx.
(20) contamination.)
filter 200 hrs. 100 hrs.
1 Long life filter type Long life filter Super long life — — (2)
filter
2 Thermostat sensor in remote control Use No use — — (3)
Display time to clean air filter calculation
3 (Set when filter sign is not to be displayed.) Display No display — — (4)
Completion of
11 Start of airflow
(21) 7 Airflow adjustment OFF airflow adjustment — (5)
adjustment
Optional accessories output selection (field Indoor unit turned Operation Malfunction
0 selection of output for adapter for wiring) ON by thermostat — output output (6)
ON/OFF input from outside (Set when ON/ External protection

1 Forced OFF ON/OFF control — (7)
OFF is to be controlled from outside.) device input
2 Thermostat differential changeover 1°C 0.5°C — — (8)

(Set when remote sensor is to be used.)
VRV 12
3 OFF by thermostat fan speed LL Set fan speed — — (9)
system (22)
indoor Automatic mode differential
unit (automatic temperature differential
4 01:0 02:1 03:2 04:3 05:4 06:5 07:6 08:7 (10)
settings setting for VRV system heat
recovery series cool/heat)
5 Power failure automatic reset Not equipped Equipped — — (11)
6 Airflow When Cooling Thermostat is OFF LL air flow Preset air flow — — (12)
High air outlet velocity
0 (Set when installed in place with N H S — (13)
ceiling higher than 2.7 m.)
1 Selection of air flow direction (Set when F (4 directions) T (3 directions) W (2 directions) — (14)
a blocking pad kit has been installed.)
Air flow direction adjustment (Set at
13 3 installation of decoration panel.) Equipped Not equipped — — (15)
(23) Ceiling Soiling
4 Field set air flow position setting Draft prevention Standard — (16)
prevention
5 Setting of the Static Pressure Standard High static — — (17)
Selection pressure
01:30 02:50 03:60 04:70 05:80 06:90 07:100 08:110
6 External Static Pressure Settings (18)
09:120 10:130 11:140 12:150 13:160 14:180 15:200 *7
1 Thermostat OFF excess humidity Not equipped Equipped — — (19)
Direct duct connection
2 (when the indoor unit and heat Not equipped Equipped — — (20)
15 reclaim ventilation unit are
(25) connected by duct directly.) ∗Note 6
3 Drain pump humidifier interlock selection Not equipped Equipped — — (21)
Field set selection for individual
5 Not equipped Equipped — — (22)
ventilation setting by remote control
Notes : 1. Settings are made simultaneously for the entire group, however, if you select the mode No.
inside parentheses, you can also set by each individual unit. Setting changes however
cannot be checked except in the individual mode for those in parentheses.
2. The mode numbers inside parentheses cannot be used by wireless remote controls, so they
cannot be set individually. Setting changes also cannot be checked.
3. Marked are factory set.
4. Do not make settings other than those described above. Nothing is displayed for functions
the indoor unit is not equipped with.
5. “88” may be displayed to indicate the remote control is resetting when returning to the
normal mode.
6. If the setting mode to “Equipped”, heat reclaim ventilation fan conducts the fan residual
operation by linking to indoor unit.
7. • The FXMQ50·63·80·100·125PVE cannot be set to 30Pa.
• The FXMQ40PVE cannot be set to 180 or 200Pa.
Test Operation 91
3.1.5 Applicable range of Field setting
Ceiling mounted cassette Slim Ceiling Ceiling Ceiling Wall Floor Concealed New Ceiling Details
type Ceiling mounted Mounted suspended mounted standing Floor suspended No.
mounted built-in duct type type type type standing cassette
Round Double Corner duct type type (Middle and type type
flow flow type high static
pressure)
FXFQ FXCQ FXKQ FXDQ FXSQ FXMQ-P FXHQ FXAQ FXLQ FXNQ FXUQ
Filter sign { { { { { { { { { { { (1)
Ultra long life filter { { — — — — — — — — — (2)

sign
remote control { { { { { { { { { { { (3)
thermostat sensor
Set fan speed when { { { { { { { { { { { (9) (12)
thermostat OFF
Air flow auto — — — — — { — — — — — (5)
adjustment
Air flow adjustment { — — — — — { — — — { (13)
Ceiling height
Air flow direction { — — — — — — — — — { (14)
Air flow direction

adjustment — — { — — — — — — — — (15)
(Down flow
operation)
Air flow direction
adjustment range { { { — — — — — — — — (16)
Field set fan speed { — — {∗1 — {∗1 { — — — — (17) (18)

selection
∗1 Static pressure selection
92 Test Operation
3.1.6 Detailed Explanation of Setting Modes

(1) Filter Sign Setting
If switching the filter sign ON time, set as given in the table below.
Set Time
Filter Specs. Standard Long Life Ultra Long Life Filter
Setting
Contamination Light 200 hrs. 2,500 hrs. 10,000 hrs.
Contamination Heavy 100 hrs. 1,250 hrs. 5,000 hrs.
(2) Ultra-Long-Life Filter Sign Setting

When a Ultra-long-life filter is installed, the filter sign timer setting must be changed.
Setting Table
Mode No. Setting Switch No. Setting Position No. Setting
01 Long-Life Filter
10 (20) 1 02 Ultra-Long-Life Filter (1)
03 —
(3) Selection of Thermistor

Select the thermistor to control room temperature.
Mode No. First Code No. Second Code No. Thermistor that controls room temperature
Indoor air thermistor for remote control
01 and suction air thermistor for indoor unit
10 (20) 2 02 Suction air thermistor for indoor unit
03 Thermistor for remote control
The factory setting for the Second Code No. is "01" and room temperature is controlled by the
indoor unit suction air thermistor and remote control thermistor.
When the Second Code No. is set to "02", room temperature is controlled by the suction air
thermistor.
When the Second Code No. is set to "03", room temperature is controlled by the remote control
thermistor.
(4) "Filter Cleaning" Displayed or Not Displayed

Whether or not to display "Filter Cleaning" after operation of certain duration can be selected.
Mode No. First Code No. Second Code No. "Filter Cleaning" display
01 Display
10 (20) 3
02 No display
Test Operation 93
(5) Airflow Adjustment (AUTO)

External Static Pressure Settings
Make settings in either method (a) or method (b) as explained below.
(a) Use the airflow auto adjustment function to make settings.
Airflow auto adjustment: The volume of blow-off air is automatically adjusted to the rated
quantity.
(b) Select External Static Pressure with remote control Check that 01 (OFF) is set for the
“SECOND CODE NO.” in “MODE NO. 21” for airflow adjustment on an indoor unit basis in
Table 4. The “SECOND CODE NO.” is set to 01 (OFF) at factory set. Change the “SECOND
CODE NO.” as shown in Table according to the external static pressure of the duct to be
connected.
Mode No. First Code No. Second Code No. Airflow adjustment
01 OFF
11 (21) 7 02 Completion of airflow adjustment
03 Start of airflow adjustment
(6) Optional Output Switching

Using this setting, "operation output signal" and "abnormal output signal" can be provided.
Output signal is output between terminals K1 and K2 of "customized wiring adapter," an optional
accessory.
Mode No. First Code No. Second Code No. Remarks
Indoor unit thermostat ON/OFF signal is
01 provided.
Output linked with "Start/Stop" of remote
12 (22) 0 03 control is provided.
In case of "Malfunction Display" appears
04 on the remote control, output is provided.
(7) External ON/OFF input

This input is used for "ON / OFF operation" and "Protection device input" from the outside. The
input is performed from the T1-T1 terminal of the operation terminal block (X1A) in the electric
component box.
F2 T1 T2
Forced stop
Input A
Setting Table
Setting Setting
Mode No. Operation by input of the signal A
Switch No. Position No.
ON: Forced stop (prohibition of using the remote control)
01 OFF: Permission of using the remote control
OFF → ON: Permission of operation
02
12 (22) 1 ON → OFF: Stop
ON: Operation
03 OFF: The system stops, then the applicable unit
indicates "A0". The other indoor units indicate "U9".
94 Test Operation
(8) Thermostat Switching

Differential value during thermostat ON/OFF control can be changed.
Mode No. First Code No. Second Code No. Differential value
01 1ºC
12(22) 2
02 0.5ºC
(9) Air Flow Setting When Heating Thermostat is OFF

This setting is used to set air flow when heating thermostat is OFF.
∗ When thermostat OFF air flow volume up mode is used, careful consideration is required
before deciding installation location. During heating operation, this setting takes precedence
over "(7) Fan Stop When Thermostat is OFF."
Mode No. First Code No. Second Code No. Contents
01 LL air flow
12 (22) 3
02 Preset air flow
(10) Setting of operation mode to "AUTO"

This setting makes it possible to change differential values for mode selection while in automatic
operation mode.
Setting position No.
Mode No. Setting switch No.
01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08
12 (22) 4 0°C 1°C 2°C 3°C 4°C 5°C 6°C 7°C
The automatic operation mode setting is made by the use of the "Operation Mode Selector"
button.
(11) Auto Restart after Power Failure Reset

For the air conditioners with no setting for the function (same as factory setting), the units will be
left in the stop condition when the power supply is reset automatically after power failure reset
or the main power supply is turned on again after once turned off. However, for the air
conditioners with the setting, the units may start automatically after power failure reset or the
main power supply turned on again (return to the same operation condition as that of before
power failure).
For the above reasons, when the unit is set enabling to utilize “Auto restart function after power
failure reset”, utmost care should be paid for the occurrence of the following situation.
Caution 1. The air conditioner starts operation suddenly after power failure reset or
the main power supply turned on again. Consequently, the user might be
surprised (with question for the reason why).
2. In the service work, for example, turning off the main power switch during
the unit is in operation, and turning on the switch again after the work is
completed start the unit operation (the fan rotates).
(12) Air Flow When Cooling Thermostat is OFF

This is used to set air flow to "LL air flow" when cooling thermostat is OFF.
01 LL air flow
12 (22) 6
02 Preset air flow
Test Operation 95
(13) Setting of Normal Air Flow

Make the following setting according to the ceiling height. The setting position No. is set to “01”
at the factory.
In the Case of FXAQ
Setting Switch Setting Position
Mode No. Setting
No. No.
01 Wall-mounted type: Standard
13(23) 0 02 Wall-mounted type: Slight increase
03 Wall-mounted type: Normal increase
In the Case of FXHQ

Second code
Mode No. First code No. Ceiling height (m)
No.
01 2.7 or less
13(23) 0
02 2.7-3.5
In the Case of FXFQ20~80 (All round outlet)

First Second
Mode code code Setting Ceiling height (m)
No. No. No.
Standard • All
01 ≤2.7
round outlet
13 (23) 0 02 High Ceiling (1) 2.7-3
03 Higher Ceiling (2) 3-3.5
In the Case of FXFQ100~125 (All round outlet)

First Second
Mode code code Setting Ceiling height (m)
No. No. No.
Standard • All
01 ≤3.2
round outlet
13 (23) 0 02 High Ceiling (1) 3.2-3.6
03 Higher Ceiling (2) 3.6-4.2
In the Case of FXFQ20~80 (*24-Way, 3-Way, 2-Way Outlets)

First Second Ceiling height
Mode code code Setting
No. 4-way Outlets 3-way Outlets 2-way Outlets
No. No.
01 Standard (N) Lower than 3.1 m Lower than 3.0 m Lower than 3.5 m
13 (23) 0 02 High Ceiling (H) Lower than 3.4 m Lower than 3.3 m Lower than 3.8 m
03 Higher Ceiling (S) Lower than 4.0 m Lower than 3.5 m —
In the Case of FXFQ100~125 (*24-Way, 3-Way, 2-Way Outlets)

No. No.
*1 “Mode No.” setting is done in a batch for the group. To make or confirm settings for an
individual unit, set the internal mode number in parentheses.
*2 The figure of the ceiling height is for the all round outlet. For the settings for four-direction
(part of corner closed off), three-direction and two-direction outlets, see the installation
manual and technical guide supplied with the separately sold closure material kit.
96 Test Operation
In the Case of FXUQ71~125

No. No.
(14) Air Flow Direction Setting

Set the air flow direction of indoor units as given in the table below. (Set when optional air outlet
blocking pad has been installed.) The second code No. is factory set to “01.”
Setting Table
Second Code
Mode No. First Code No. Setting
No.
01 F : 4-direction air flow
13 (23) 1 02 T : 3-direction air flow
03 W : 2-direction air flow
(15) Operation of Downward Flow Flap: Yes/No

Only the model FXKQ has the function.
When only the front-flow is used, sets yes/no of the swing flap operation of down-flow.
Setting Table
Mode No. First Code No. Second Code No. Setting
01 Down-flow operation: Yes
13 (23) 3
02 Down-flow operation: No
(16) Setting of Air Flow Direction Adjustment Range

Make the following air flow direction setting according to the respective purpose.
(S2537)
Setting Table
Upward (Draft
01 prevention)
13 (23) 4 02 Standard
Downward (Ceiling
03 soiling prevention)
∗ Some indoor unit models are not equipped with draft prevention (upward) function.
(17) Setting of the Static Pressure Selection

In the Case of FXDQ20~32PB, FXDQ40~63NB
Model No. First Code No. Second Code No. External static pressure
01 Standard (10Pa)
13 (23) 5
02 High static pressure (30Pa)
Test Operation 97
(18) External Static Pressure Settings (for FXMQ-P model)

MODE NO. FIRST CODE NO. SECOND CODE NO. External Static Pressure
01 30Pa (*1)
02 50Pa
03 60Pa
04 70Pa
05 80Pa
06 90Pa
07 100Pa
13 (23) 06 08 110Pa
09 120Pa
10 130Pa
11 140Pa
12 150Pa
13 160Pa
14 180Pa (*2)
15 200Pa (*2)
The “SECOND CODE NO.” is set to 07 (an external static pressure of 100 Pa) at factory set.
*1 The FXMQ50 · 63 · 80 · 100 · 125PVE cannot be set to 30 Pa.
*2 The FXMQ40PVE cannot be set to 180 or 200 Pa.
(19) Humidification When Heating Thermostat is OFF

Setting to "Humidification Setting" turns ON the humidifier if suction temperature is 20ºC or
above and turns OFF the humidifier if suction temperature is 18ºC or below when the heating
thermostat is OFF.
01 —
15 (25) 1
02 Setting of humidifier
(20) Setting of Direct Duct Connection

This is used when "fresh air intake kit equipped with fan" is connected. The indoor fan carries
out residual operation for one minute after the thermostat is stopped. (For the purpose of
preventing dust on the air filter from falling off.)
Without direct duct
01 connection
15 (25) 2 With direct duct
02 connection equipped
with fan
(21) Interlocked Operation between Humidifier and Drain Pump

This is used to interlock the humidifier with the drain pump. When water is drained out of the
unit, this setting is unnecessary.
Individual operation of
01 humidifier
15 (25) 3 Interlocked operation
02 between humidifier and
drain pump
98 Test Operation
(22) Individual Setting of Ventilation

This is set to perform individual operation of heat reclaim ventilation using the remote control/
central unit when heat reclaim ventilation is built in.
(Switch only when heat reclaim ventilation is built in.)
01 —
15 (25) 5 Individual operation of
02 ventilation
Test Operation 99
3.1.7 Centralized Control Group No. Setting

BRC1C Type In order to conduct the central remote control using the central remote control and the unified
ON/OFF controller, Group No. settings should be made by group using the operating remote
control.
Make Group No. settings for central remote control using the operating remote control.
1. Turn ON the power of the indoor unit and unified ON/OFF controller. (Unless the power is
ON, no setting can be made.)
Check that the installation and electrical wiring are correct before turning the power supply ON.
When the power supply is turned ON, all LCD appear once and the unit may not accept the
operation for about one minute with the display of “ ” flashing (an interval of ON, ON,
and OFF)
2. While in normal mode, press and hold the “ ” switch for a period of four seconds or
more to set the system to "Field Setting Mode".
3. Select the MODE No. “00” with the “ ” button.
4. Use the “ ” button to select the group No. for each group.
(Group numbers increase in the order of 1-00, 1-01, ... 1-15, 2-00, ... 4-15.)
5. Press “ ” to set the selected group No.
6. Press “ ” to return to the NORMAL MODE.
MODE NO.
GROUP NO.
UNIT NO.
FIELD SET
SETTING
MODE
TEST
3
5 4
2,6
Note:
For infrared remote control, see the following.
For setting group No. of HRV and wiring adapter for other air conditioners, etc., refer to the
instruction manual attached.
NOTICE
Enter the group No. and installation place of the indoor unit into the attached installation table.
Be sure to keep the installation table with the operation manual for maintenance.
100 Test Operation

BRC7 Type Group No. setting by infrared remote control for centralized control
BRC4 Type 1. When in the normal mode, push “ ” button for 4 seconds or more, and operation then
enters the “field set mode.”
2. Set mode No. “00” with “ ” button.
3. Set the group No. for each group with “ UP ” “ DOWN ” button (advance/backward).
4. Enter the selected group numbers by pushing “ ” button.
5. Push “ ” button and return to the normal mode.
MODE NO.
FIELD SET MODE
GROUP NO.
(V0916)
Group No. Setting

Example
Central Remote Control
Indoor/Outdoor Outdoor/Outdoor Indoor/Outdoor Outdoor/Outdoor
F1 F2
F1 F2 F1 F2 F1 F2 F1 F2
F1 F2 P1 P2 F1 F2 P1 P2 F1 F2 P1 P2 F1 F2 P1 P2
RC
Main RC RC Sub RC Group Control by Remote Contol
1-00
(autmatic unit address)
1-01 1-02
F1 F2 P1 P2 F1 F2 P1 P2 F1 F2 P1 P2 F1 F2 P1 P2
No Remote Control
RC
1-03 (V0917)
1-04
Caution When turning the power supply on, the unit may often not accept any operation while "88" is
displaying after all indications were displayed once for about 1 minute on the liquid crystal
display. This is not an operative fault.
Test Operation 101

3.1.8 Setting of Operation Control Mode from remote control

(Local Setting)
The operation control mode is compatible with a variety of controls and operations by limiting
the functions of the operation remote control. Furthermore, operations such as remote control
ON/OFF can be limited in accordance with the combination conditions. (Refer to information in
the next page.)
Central remote control is normally available for operations. (Except when centralized monitor is
connected)
3.1.9 Contents of Control Modes

Twenty modes consisting of combinations of the following five operation modes with
temperature and operation mode setting by remote control can be set and displayed by
operation modes 0 through 19.
ON/OFF control impossible by remote control
Used when you want to turn on/off by central remote control only.
(Cannot be turned on/off by remote control.)
OFF control only possible by remote control
Used when you want to turn on by central remote control only, and off by remote control
only.
Centralized
Used when you want to turn on by central remote control only, and turn on/off freely by
remote control during set time.
Individual
Used when you want to turn on/off by both central remote control and remote control.
Timer operation possible by remote control
Used when you want to turn on/off by remote control during set time and you do not want to
start operation by central remote control when time of system start is programmed.
102 Test Operation

How to Select Whether operation by remote control will be possible or not for turning on/off, controlling
Operation Mode temperature or setting operation mode is selected and decided by the operation mode given on
the right edge of the table below.
Example
ON by remote OFF by remote
Temperature Operation mode Control
control control OFF by control by setting by
(Unified ON by (Unified OFF by remote mode is "1."
remote control remote control
central remote central remote control
control) control)
↓ ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓
Rejection Rejection Rejection Acceptance Acceptance (VL069)
Control by remote control

Operation
Control mode Unified operation,

individual operation Unified OFF, Temperature Operation Control mode
individual stop by OFF
by central remote control mode setting
central remote
control, or operation control, or timer stop
controlled by timer
Acceptance 0
Rejection
ON/OFF control Rejection 10
Rejection
impossible by (Example) Acceptance
remote control Acceptance 1(Example)
(Example)
(Example)
Rejection (Example) Rejection 11
Acceptance 2
Rejection
OFF control only Rejection (Example) Rejection 12
possible by
remote control Acceptance 3
Acceptance
Rejection 13
Acceptance 4
Rejection
Rejection 14
Centralized
Acceptance 5
Acceptance
Rejection 15
Acceptance Acceptance
Acceptance 6
Rejection
Rejection 16
Individual Acceptance
Acceptance 7 ∗1
Acceptance
Rejection 17
Acceptance 8
Rejection
Timer operation Acceptance Acceptance Rejection 18
possible by (During timer at ON (During timer at ON
remote control position only) position only) Acceptance 9
Acceptance
Rejection 19
Do not select “timer operation possible by remote control” if not using a remote control.
Operation by timer is impossible in this case.
∗1. Factory setting
Central remote control

When ON/OFF, temperature setting
and operation mode setting by local
remote control is forbidden,
“UNDER CENTRAL CONTROL” is
displayed on the remote control
Test Operation 103

3.2 Field Setting from Outdoor Unit

3.2.1 Setting by Dip Switches
The following field settings are made by dip switches on PC board.
Dipswitch
Setting item Description
No. Setting
ON Cool / Heat Used to set cool / heat change over setting by remote
DS1-1 change over control equipped with outdoor unit. (Note 1)
OFF (Factory set) setting
ON
DS1-2 Not used Do not change the factory settings.
OFF (Factory set)
Cool/heat selector connection procedure

• Set the remote control only when changing over the operation mode between cooling and
heating using the remote control installed in the outdoor.
1 Connect the cool/heat selector (optional accessory) to the terminals (A, B and C) on the
outdoor X2M Terminal board (A, B and C).
2 Set the cool/heat selector switch DS1-1 from “OFF” (which is selected at the factory before
shipment) to “ON”.
A1P
ON/OFF
DS1-1
switch knob
DS1 1 2
X2M
ABC
ABC
Cool/heat
selector
104 Test Operation

Caution Capacity Setting after changing the main PC Board(A1P) to spare parts PC Board
When you change the main PC Board(A1P) to spare parts PC Board, please carry out the
following setting.
Please Attach the Capacity Setting Adapter corresponding to Capacity Class (ex. 112, 140, 160) in connector X51A.
(See Below)
Capacity Setting Adapter
Capacity Class Note

1 4 (112) CAPACITY SETTING ADAPTER (for 100/J112)
Position of Attaching the Capacity Setting Adapter
X51A
X51A
Test Operation 105

Setting by pushbutton switches

The following settings are made by pushbutton switches on PC board.
LED indication 7 7 8 7 7 7 7
(Factory setting)
BS1 BS2 BS3 BS4 BS5
MODE SET RETURN TEST RESET

(V2760)
There are the following three setting modes.

c Setting mode 1 (H1P off)
Initial status (when normal) : Also indicates during “abnormal”.
d Setting mode 2 (H1P on)
Used to modify the operating status and to set program addresses, etc. Usually used in
servicing the system.
e Monitor mode (H1P blinks)
Used to check the program made in Setting mode 2.
Mode changing procedure
Using the MODE button, the modes can be changed as follows.
Push and hold the BS1 (Normal) Push the BS1(MODE button)
(MODE button) for 5 seconds. one time.
Setting mode 2 Setting mode 1 Monitor mode
MODE Push the BS1(MODE button) one time. MODE MODE
On Off Blinking
H1P H1P H1P

(V2761)
Mode changing procedure
(Set): Select mode with BS2 (SET button) in each selection step.
Press BS1 (MODE button) for more than 5 sec. Setting mode 1 Press BS1(MODE button).
(Initial condition)
Setting mode 2 Monitor mode
Setting item selection (Set) Check item selection (Set)
Press BS3 Press BS3

(RETURN button). (RETURN button).
Setting condition
Contents display
selection (Set)
Press BS3 Press BS3
(RETURN button). (RETURN button).
Setting condition
(Contents) display
Press BS3
(RETURN button). Press BS1
(MODE button).
Press BS1
(MODE button).
(V2762)
106 Test Operation

a. “Setting mode 1”
This mode is used to set and check the following items.
1. Set items ············ In order to make COOL/HEAT selection in a batch of outdoor unit group, change the setting.
• COOL/HEAT selection (IND) ·····················Used to select COOL or HEAT by individual outdoor
unit (factory set).
• COOL/HEAT selection (MASTER) ············Used to select COOL or HEAT by outdoor unit group
with the master unit.
• COOL/HEAT selection (SLAVE)················Used to select COOL or HEAT by outdoor unit group
with the slave unit.
2. Check items ······· The following items can be checked.
(1) Current operating conditions (Normal / Abnormal / In check operation)
(2) Setting conditions of COOL/HEAT selection (Individual / Batch master / Batch slave)
(3) Low noise operating conditions (In normal operation / In low noise operation)
(4) Demand operating conditions (In normal operation / In demand operation)
Procedure for changing COOL/HEAT selection setting
“Normally, “Setting mode 1” is set.

In case of other status, push MODE
(BS1) button one time and set to
“Setting mode 1”.
8 ON
7 OFF
9 Blink
COOL/HEAT select Low
Push the SET (BS2) button to set MODE TEST Demand
the blinking of LED to any of Setting (displaying) item IND MASTER SLAVE noise H7P
H1P H2P
conditions shown on the right. H3P H4P H5P H6P
For selection by individual outdoor unit (factory set) 7 7 9 7 7 7 7
For selection in a batch of outdoor unit group with master unit 7 7 7 9 7 7 7
For selection in a batch of outdoor unit group with slave unit 7 7 7 7 9 7 7
Pushing the RETURN (BS3) button will return the system to the initial condition of
Push the RETURN (BS3) button to
determine the setting. "Setting mode 1".
Procedure for checking check items
The system is normally set to "Setting

mode 1".
Should the system be set to any COOL/HEAT select Low
mode other than that, push the MODE TEST Demand
IND MASTER SLAVE noise
MODE (BS1) button to set the H1P H2P H7P
H3P H4P H5P H6P
system to "Setting mode 1".
7 7 8 7 7 7 7
Current operating conditions

7Normal 8Abnormal
9In preparation or in
check operation
Check the system for each condition Setting of COOL/HEAT selection
through LED displays. (Refer to 877By individual outdoor
information in table on the right.)
unit
787In a batch of outdoor unit
group with master unit
778In a batch of outdoor unit
group with slave unit
Low noise operating conditions
Pushing the RETURN (BS3) button
7In normal operation
will bring the system to the initial
state of "Setting mode 1". 8In low noise operation
Demand operating conditions
(V2763) 7In normal operation
8In demand operation
Test Operation 107

b. “Setting mode 2” No. Setting item Description

Cool/heat unified
Push and hold the MODE (BS1) 1 Sets address for cool/heat unified operation.
address
button for 5 seconds and set to
Low noise/demand
“Setting mode 2”. 2 Address for low noise/demand operation
address
Used to conduct test operation without making changes
Test operation
3 to the PCB and replacing the refrigerant, after the
settings completion of maintenance.
Indoor unit forced Allows forced operation of indoor unit fan while unit is
5 fan H stopped. (H tap)
<Selection of setting items>
Indoor unit forced
6 Allows forced operation of indoor unit.
Push the SET (BS2) button and set operation
the LED display to a setting item 8 Te setting Target evaporation temperature for cooling
shown in the table on the right.
↓ 9 Tc setting Target condensation temperature for heating
Push the RETURN (BS3) button and Defrost changeover Changes the temperature condition for defrost and sets to
10
decide the item. (The present setting setting quick defrost or slow defrost.
condition is blinked.) External low noise
12 setting / Demand Reception of external low noise or demand signal
setting
13 AIRNET address Set address for AIRNET.
Setting of hot water Make this setting to conduct heating operation with hot
16 water heater.
Additional
20 refrigerant charge Carries out additional refrigerant charge operation.
operation setting
<Selection of setting conditions>
Refrigerant
Push the SET (BS2) button and set recovery /
21 Sets to refrigerant recovery or vacuuming mode.
to the setting condition you want. vacuuming mode
↓ setting
Push the RETURN (BS3) button and Sets automatic nighttime low noise operation in a simple
decide the condition. Night-time low way.
22 noise setting The operating time is based on “Starting set” and “Ending
set”.
Setting of external Sets low noise level when the low noise signal is input
25 low noise level from outside.
Night-time low Sets starting time of nighttime low noise operation.
26 noise operation (Night-time low noise setting is also required.)
start setting
Night-time low
Push the RETURN (BS3) button and Sets ending time of nighttime low noise operation.
27 noise operation end (Night-time low noise setting is also required.)
set to the initial status of “Setting setting
mode 2”.
Power transistor Used for trouble diagnosis of DC compressor. Since the
check mode waveform of inverter is output without wiring to the
28 ∗Check after compressor, it is convenient to probe whether the trouble
disconnection of
∗ If you become unsure of how to compressor wires comes from the compressor or PC board.
proceed, push the MODE (BS1)
button and return to setting mode 1. If the capacity control is required, the low noise control is
Capacity
29 automatically released by this setting during carrying out
precedence setting low noise operation and nighttime low noise operation.
(V2764)
Changes target value of power consumption when
30 Demand setting 1 demand control 1 is input.
Normally enables demand control 1 without external
Normal demand
32 input. (Effective to prevent a problem that circuit breaker
setting of small capacity is shut down due to large load.)
The numbers in the "No." column represent the number of times to press the
SET (BS2) button.
108 Test Operation

Setting item display

No. C/H selection Low Setting condition display
MODE TEST Demand
Setting item IND Master Slave noise
H1P H2P H7P
H3P H4P H5P H6P ∗ Factory set
Address 0 8777777 ∗
1 Cool / Heat
8 7 7 7 7 7 8
Binary number 1 8777778
Unified address (6 digits) ~
31 8788888
Address 0 8777777 ∗
2
Low noise/demand
8 7 7 7 7 8 7
address (6 digits) ~
31 8788888
3 Test operation 8 7 7 7 7 8 8
Test operation : OFF 8777778
Test operation : ON 8777787 ∗
5 Indoor forced fan H 8 7 7 7 8 7 8
Normal operation 8777778 ∗
Indoor forced fan H 8777787
6
Indoor forced
8 7 7 7 8 8 7
Normal operation 8777778 ∗
operation Indoor forced operation 8777787
High 8777877
8 Te setting 8 7 7 8 7 7 7 Normal (factory setting) 8777787 ∗
Low 8777778
High 8777877
9 Tc setting 8 7 7 8 7 7 8 Normal (factory setting) 8777787 ∗
Low 8777778
Quick defrost 8777877
Defrost changeover
10 setting 8 7 7 8 7 8 7 Normal (factory setting) 8777787 ∗
Slow defrost 8777778
External low noise/demand:
NO 8777778 ∗
12 External
low noise/
8 7 7 8 8 7 7
8777787
demand setting External low noise/demand:
YES
Address 0 8777777 ∗
13 Airnet address 8 7 7 8 8 7 8
(6 digits) ~
63 8888888
16 Setting
of hot water
8 7 8 7 7 7 7
OFF 8777778 ∗
heater ON 8777787
Additional refrigerant
20 charging operation 8 7 8 7 8 7 7
Refrigerant charging: OFF 8777778 ∗
setting Refrigerant charging: ON 8777787
Refrigerant recovery /
Refrigerant recovery /
vacuuming: OFF 8777778 ∗
21 vacuuming mode 8 7 8 7 8 7 8
setting Refrigerant recovery /
vacuuming: ON 8777787
OFF 8777777 ∗
Night-time low noise
22 setting 8 7 8 7 8 8 7
Level 1 (outdoor fan with 6 step or lower) 8777778
The numbers in the "No." column represent the number of times to press the SET (BS2) button.
Test Operation 109

Setting item display

No. C/H selection Low Setting condition display
MODE TEST Demand
Setting item IND Master Slave noise
H1P H2P H7P
H3P H4P H5P H6P ∗ Factory set
25 Low noise setting 8 7 8 8 7 7 8 Level 2 (outdoor fan with 5 step or lower) 8777787 ∗
About 20:00 8777778
26 operation start 8 7 8 8 7 8 7 About 22:00 (factory setting) 8777787 ∗
setting
About 24:00 8777877
About 6:00 8777778
27
operation end setting 8 7 8 8 7 8 8 About 7:00 8777787
About 8:00 (factory setting) 8777877 ∗
Power transistor
28 check mode 8 7 8 8 8 7 7
OFF 8777778 ∗
ON 8777787
29 Capacity 8 7 8 8 8 7 8
OFF 8777778 ∗
precedence setting ON 8777787
60 % demand 8777778
30 Demand setting 1 8 7 8 8 8 8 7 70 % demand 8777787 ∗
80 % demand 8777877
32 Normal
demand
8 8 7 7 7 7 7
OFF 8777778 ∗
setting ON 8777787
The numbers in the "No." column represent the number of times to press the SET (BS2) button.
110 Test Operation

c. Monitor mode No. Setting item

LED display
Data display
To enter the monitor mode, push the 0 Various setting 9 7 7 7 7 7 7 See below
MODE (BS1) button when in “Setting
mode 1”. 1 C/H unified address 9 7 7 7 7 7 8
2 Low noise/demand address 9 7 7 7 7 8 7
3 Not used 9 7 7 7 7 8 8
4 Airnet address 9 7 7 7 8 7 7 Lower 6 digits
5 Number of connected indoor units 9 7 7 7 8 7 8

<Selection of setting item> 7
Number of connected zone units
(excluding outdoor and BS unit) 9 7 7 7 8 8 8
Push the SET (BS2) button and set
the LED display to a setting item.
8 Number of outdoor units 9 7 7 8 7 7 7
11
Number of zone units (excluding
outdoor and BS unit) 9 7 7 8 7 8 8 Lower 6 digits
12 Number of terminal blocks 9 7 7 8 8 7 7 Lower 4 digits:

upper
13 Number of terminal blocks 9 7 7 8 8 7 8 Lower 4 digits:

lower
<Confirmation on setting contents>

14
Contents of malfunction (the
latest) 8 7 7 8 8 8 7 Malfunction
code table
Push the RETURN (BS3) button to 15

Contents of malfunction
(1 cycle before) 8 7 7 8 8 8 8 Refer to page
display different data of set items. 138, 139.
16
Contents of malfunction
(2 cycle before) 8 7 8 7 7 7 7
20 Contents of retry (the latest) 8 7 8 7 8 7 7
21 Contents of retry (1 cycle before) 8 7 8 7 8 7 8
22 Contents of retry (2 cycle before) 8 7 8 7 8 8 7
Lower 2 digits:
87 Abnormal
25
Normal judgment of outdoor units
PC board 9 7 8 8 7 7 8 78 Normal
77 Unjudgment
Push the RETURN (BS3) button and
switches to the initial status of
The numbers in the "No." column represent the number of times to press the
“Monitor mode”. SET (BS2) button.
Setting item 0 Display contents of “Various setting”

∗ Push the MODE (BS1) button and EMG operation / ON 9 7 7 8 7 7 7
returns to “Setting mode 1”. backup operation
setting OFF 9 7 7 7 7 7 7
(V2765) Defrost select setting Short 9 7 7 7 8 7 7
Medium 9 7 7 7 9 7 7
Long 9 7 7 7 7 7 7
Te setting H 9 7 7 7 7 8 7
M 9 7 7 7 7 9 7
L 9 7 7 7 7 7 7
Tc setting H 9 7 7 7 7 7 8
M 9 7 7 7 7 7 9
L 9 7 7 7 7 7 7
Test Operation 111

Push the SET button and match with the LEDs No. 1 - 15, push the RETURN button, and
confirm the data for each setting.
H Data such as addresses and number of units is expressed as binary numbers; the two
ways of expressing are as follows:
The No. 1 cool/heat unified address is expressed as a binary

9 797997 number consisting of the lower 6 digits. (0 - 63)
16 4 1
32 8 2 In c the address is 010110 (binary number), which translates to
16 + 4 + 2 = 22 (base 10 number). In other words, the address is
22.
977 7979
The number of terminal blocks for No. 12 and 13 is expressed as
64 16
No.12 128 32 an 8-digit binary number, which is the combination of four upper,
and four lower digits for No. 12 and 13 respectively. (0 - 128)
977 7997 In d the address for No. 12 is 0101, the address for No. 13 is
4 1 0110, and the combination of the two is 01010110 (binary
No.13 8 2 number), which translates to 64 + 16 + 4 + 2 = 86 (base 10
number). In other words, the number of terminal block is 86.
H See the preceding page for a list of data, etc. for No. 0 - 25.
112 Test Operation

3.2.2 Cool / Heat Mode Switching

There are the following 4 cool/heat switching modes.
c Set cool/heat separately for each outdoor unit system by indoor unit remote control.
d Set cool/heat separately for each outdoor unit system by cool/heat switching remote control.
e Set cool/heat for more than one outdoor unit system simultaneously in accordance with
unified master outdoor unit by indoor unit remote control.
f Set cool/heat for more than one outdoor unit system simultaneously in accordance with
unified master outdoor unit by cool/heat switching remote control.
c Set Cool / Heat Separately for Each Outdoor Unit System by Indoor Unit remote control
It does not matter whether or not there is outdoor - outdoor unit wiring.
Set outdoor unit PC board DS1-1 to IN (factory set).
Set cool/heat switching to IND (individual) for “Setting mode 1” (factory set).
TEST C/H SELECT

MODE L.N.O.P. DEMAND
MALFUNC. IND MASTER SLAVE
ON
Dip SW.
DS1-1
OFF
C/H SELECT R.C.
Indoor unit Indoor unit
Remote Remote
control control
<Set the master unit (= indoor unit having the right to

select the cooling/heating operation mode).>
In the case of wired remote controls In the case of infrared remote controls
• After the check operation, “CHANGEOVER UNDER • After the check operation, the timer lamp is flashing in all
CONTROL” is flashing in all connected remote controls. connected indoor units.
• Select an indoor unit to be used as the master unit in • Select an indoor unit to be used as the master unit in
accordance with the request from the customer. accordance with the request from the customer.
(It is recommended to select an indoor unit which will be (It is recommended to select an indoor unit which will be
used most often as the master unit.) used most often as the master unit.)
• Press the operation mode selector button in the remote • Press the operation selector mode button in the remote
control of the indoor unit selected as the master unit. control of the indoor unit selected as the master unit. A
• In that remote control, “CHANGEOVER UNDER “peep” sound is emitted, and the timer lamp turns off in all
CONTROL” disappears. That remote control will control indoor units.
changeover of the cooling/heating operation mode. • That indoor unit will control changeover of the cooling/
• In other remote controls, “CHANGEOVER UNDER heating operation mode.
CONTROL” lights.
For the details, refer to the installation manual
supplied together with the indoor unit.
Test Operation 113

d Set Cool / Heat Separately for Each Outdoor Unit System by Cool/Heat Switching Remote control
It does not matter whether or not there is outdoor - outdoor unit wiring.
Set outdoor unit PC board DS1-1 to OUT (factory set).
Set cool/heat switching to IND (individual) for “Setting mode 1” (factory set).
TEST C/H SELECT

MODE L.N.O.P. DEMAND
MALFUNC. IND MASTER SLAVE
ON
Dip SW.
DS1-1
OFF
C/H SELECT R.C.
C/H select
remote Indoor unit Indoor unit
control
Remote Remote
(V3059)
control control
114 Test Operation

3.2.3 Setting of Low Noise Operation and Demand Operation

Setting of Low Noise Operation
By connecting the external contact input to the low noise input of the outdoor unit external
control adapter (optional), you can lower operating noise by 2-3 dB.
When the low noise operation is carried out automatically at night (The external control
adapter for outdoor unit is not required)
1. While in "Setting mode 2", select the setting condition (i.e., "Mode 1", "Mode 2", or "Mode 3")
for set item No. 22 (Setting of nighttime low noise level).
2. If necessary, while in "Setting mode 2", select the setting condition (i.e., "20:00", "22:00", or
"24:00") for set item No. 26 (Setting of start time of nighttime low noise operation).
(Use the start time as a guide since it is estimated according to outdoor temperatures.)
3. If necessary, while in "Setting mode 2", select the setting condition (i.e., "06:00", "07:00", or
"08:00") for set item No. 27 (Setting of end time of nighttime low noise operation).
(Use the end time as a guide since it is estimated according to outdoor temperatures.)
4. If necessary, while in "Setting mode 2", set the setting condition for set item No. 29 (Setting
of capacity precedence) to "ON".
(If the condition is set to "ON", when the air-conditioning load reaches a high level, the
system will be put into normal operation mode even during nighttime.)
Image of operation
If capacity precedence is set in "Capacity
Operation sound precedence setting", the fan speed will be
increased according to the load of air
Time set with "Night-time low noise start setting" conditioning when load is heavier. Time set with "Night-time low noise end setting"
Rated operation
sound Operation sound during
Night time night-time low noise mode is
Operation sound instructed can be set with
of mode 1 "Night-time low noise level
setting".
Operation sound (Factory setting is "OFF".)
of mode 2
Operation sound
of mode 3 Operation sound level set with
"Night-time low noise setting”
PM 8:00 PM 10:00 PM 0:00 AM 8:00 AM 7:00 AM 8:00
Set with "Night-time low noise start setting" Set with "Night-time low noise end setting"
(Factory setting is "PM 10:00".) (Factory setting is "PM 8:00".) (V3079)
Test Operation 115

Setting of Demand Operation

By connecting the external contact input to the demand input of the outdoor unit external control
adapter (optional), the power consumption of unit operation can be saved suppressing the
compressor operating condition.
Set item Condition Content

Demand Mode 1 The compressor operates at approx. 60% or less of rating.
Mode 2 The compressor operates at approx. 70% or less of rating.
Mode 3 The compressor operates at approx. 80% or less of rating.
When the normal demand operation is carried out. (Use of the external control adapter
for outdoor unit is not required.)
1. While in "Setting mode 2", make setting of the set item No. 32 (Setting of constant demand)
to "ON".
2. While in "Setting mode 2", select the set item No. 30 (Setting of Demand 1 level) and then
set the setting condition to targeted mode.
Image of operation
Power consumption When the "Normal

demand setting" is
set to ON ("OFF"
has been set at
Rated power consumption factory.) , the power
consumption can be
80 % of rated power consumption set with the
70 % of rated power consumption "Demand 1 level
60 % of rated power consumption setting". ("70 % of
The power consumption set with "Demand 1 level setting". rated power
consumption" has
been set at factory.)
(V3082)
116 Test Operation

Detailed Setting Procedure of Low Noise Operation and Demand Control
1. Setting mode 1 (H1P off)

c In setting mode 2, push the BS1 (MODE button) one time. → Setting mode 1 is entered and
H1P off.
During the setting mode 1 is displayed, “In low noise operation” and “In demand control” are
displayed.
2. Setting mode 2 (H1P on)

c In setting 1, push and hold the BS1 (MODE button) for more than 5 seconds. → Setting
mode 2 is entered and H1P lights.
d Push the BS2 (SET button) several times and match the LED display with the Setting No.
you want.
e Push the BS3 (RETURN button) one time, and the present setting content is displayed.
→ Push the BS2 (SET button) several times and match the LED display with the setting
content (as shown on next page) you want.
f Push the BS3 (RETURN button) two times. → Returns to c.
g Push the BS1 (MODE button) one time. → Returns to the setting mode 1 and turns H1P off.
Test Operation 117

{: ON z: OFF 9: Blink
c d e
Setting Setting Setting No. indication Setting No. indication Setting Setting contents indication (Initial setting)
No. contents contents
H1P H2P H3P H4P H5P H6P H7P H1P H2P H3P H4P H5P H6P H7P H1P H2P H3P H4P H5P H6P H7P
12 External NO
low noise / { z z z z z z { z z { { z z (Factory { z z z z z 9
Demand set)
setting
YES { z z z z 9 z
22 Night-time OFF
low noise { z { z { { z (Factory { z z z z z z
setting setting)
Mode 1 { z z z z z 9
Mode 2 { z z z z 9 z
Mode 3 { z z z z 9 9
26 Night-time { z { { z { z PM 8:00 { z z z z z 9
low noise
start setting PM 10:00
(Factory { z z z z 9 z
setting)
PM 0:00 { z z z 9 z z
27 Night-time { z { { z { { AM 6:00 { z z z z z 9
low noise
end setting AM 7:00 { z z z z 9 z
AM 8:00
(Factory { z z z 9 z z
setting)
29 Capacity Low noise
precedence precedence
setting { z { { { z { (Factory { z z z z z 9
setting)
Capacity
precedence { z z z z 9 z
30 Demand 60 % of
setting 1 { z { { { { z rated power { z z z z z 9
consumption
70 % of
rated power
consumption { z z z z 9 z
(Factory
setting)
80 % of
rated power { z z z 9 z z
consumption
32 Normal OFF
demand { z z z z z z (Factory { z z z z z 9
setting setting)
ON { z z z z 9 z
Setting mode indication section Setting No. indication section Set contents indication section
118 Test Operation

3.2.4 Setting of Refrigerant Additional Charging Operation
* When the outdoor unit is stopped and the entire quantity of refrigerant cannot be
charged from the stop valve on the liquid side, make sure to charge the remaining
quantity of refrigerant using this procedure. If the refrigerant quantity is insufficient,
the unit may malfunction.
Turn ON the power of the indoor unit and the outdoor unit.
Make sure to completely open the stop valve on the gas side and the stop valve on the
liquid side.
Connect the refrigerant charge hose to the service port (for additionally charging the
refrigerant).
In the stopped status, set to ON the refrigerant additional charging operation A in
set mode 2 (H1P: Turn on).
The operation is automatically started.
(The LED indicator H2P flickers, and "Test run" and "Under centralized control" are
displayed in the remote control.)
After charging the specified quantity of refrigerant, press the RETURN button (BS3) to stop
the operation.
The operation is automatically stopped within 30 minutes.
If charging is not completed within 30 minutes, set and perform the refrigerant
additional charging operation A again.
If the refrigerant additional charging operation is stopped soon, the refrigerant may be
overcharged.
Never charge extra refrigerant.
Disconnect the refrigerant charge hose.
Service port for adding refrigerant 1
V1 Y1
Liquid Pipe fixing plate

line stop Liquid line stop valve
valve
Gas line Gas line stop valve

stop
valve
Test Operation 119

3.2.5 Setting of Refrigerant Recovery Mode

When carrying out the refrigerant collection on site, fully open the respective expansion valve of
indoor and outdoor units
All indoor and outdoor unit’s operation are prohibited.
[Operation procedure]
c In “Setting Mode 2” with units in stop mode, set “B Refrigerant Recovery / Vacuuming mode”
to ON. The respective expansion valve of indoor and outdoor units are fully opened. “TEST
OPERATION” and “UNDER CENTRALIZED CONTROL” are displayed on the remote
control, and the indoor / outdoor unit operation is prohibited.
After setting, do not cancel “Setting Mode 2” until completion of refrigerant recovery
operation.
d Collect the refrigerant using a refrigerant recovery unit. (See the operation manual attached
to the refrigerant recovery unit for more detal.)
e Press Mode button “BS1” once and reset “Setting Mode 2”.
120 Test Operation

3.2.6 Setting of Vacuuming Mode

In order to perform vacuuming operation at site, fully open the expansion valves of indoor and
outdoor units and turn on some solenoid valves.
[Operating procedure]
c In “Setting Mode 2” with units in stop mode, set “B Refrigerant Recovery / Vacuuming mode”
to ON. The respective expansion valve of indoor and outdoor units are fully opened. “TEST
OPERATION” and “UNDER CENTRALIZED CONTROL” are displayed on the remote
control, and the indoor / outdoor unit operation is prohibited.
After setting, do not cancel “Setting Mode 2” until completion of Vacuuming operation.
d Use the vacuum pump to perform vacuuming operation.
e Press Mode button “BS1” once and reset “Setting Mode 2”.
3.2.7 Check Operation

To prevent any trouble in the period of installation at site, the system is provided with a test
operation mode enabling check for incorrect wiring, stop valve left in closed, coming out (or
misplacing with suction pipe thermistor) or discharge pipe thermistor and judgment of piping
length, refrigerant overcharging, and learning for the minimum opening degree of electronic
expansion valve.
CHECK OPERATION FUNCTION
LED display (H1P~H7P) (8:ON 3:OFF 9:BLINK)
Unit stopping 3383333
Press the TEST button for 5 seconds.
Step 1 Pressure equalizing
10 sec to 10 minutes
3933338
Step 2 Cooling start control 3933383

20 sec to 2 minutes
Step 3 Stability waiting operation
3933388
10 minutes
Step4~6 Judgment function
• Stop valve close check 3933833
• Wrong wiring check 3933838
• Piping length check 3933883
3 minutes
Step 7 Refrigerant over charge judgment 3933888
15 minutes
Step 8 Pump down residual operation 3938338
5 seconds
Step 9 Standby for restarting 3938383
2 minutes
Completion
Test Operation 121

122 Test Operation

SiENBE34-802
Part 7
Troubleshooting
1. Symptom-based Troubleshooting .......................................................125
2. Troubleshooting by Remote Control ...................................................128
2.1 The INSPECTION / TEST Button.........................................................128
2.2 Self-diagnosis by Wired Remote Control .............................................129
2.3 Self-diagnosis by Wireless Remote Control .........................................130
2.4 Operation of the Remote Control’s Inspection /
Test Operation Button ..........................................................................132
2.5 Remote Control Service Mode .............................................................133
2.6 Remote Control Self-Diagnosis Function .............................................135
3. Troubleshooting by Indication on the Remote Control ........................142
3.1 “A0” Indoor Unit: Error of External Protection Device ...........................142
3.2 “A1” Indoor Unit: PC Board Defect ........................................................143
3.3 “A3” Indoor Unit: Malfunction of Drain Level Control System (S1L)......144
3.4 “A6” Indoor Unit: Fan Motor (M1F) Lock, Overload ..............................146
3.5 “A7” Indoor Unit: Malfunction of Swing Flap Motor (M1S) ....................147
3.6 Abnormal Power Supply Voltage..........................................................149
3.7 “A9” Indoor Unit: Malfunction of Moving Part of
Electronic Expansion Valve (Y1E)........................................................150
3.8 “AF” Indoor Unit: Drain Level above Limit .............................................152
3.9 “AJ” Indoor Unit: Malfunction of Capacity Determination Device..........153
3.10 “C1” Indoor Unit: Failure of Transmission
3.11 “C4” Indoor Unit: Malfunction of Thermistor (R2T) for
Heat Exchanger....................................................................................156
3.12 “C5” Indoor Unit: Malfunction of Thermistor (R3T) for Gas Pipes .........157
3.13 “C6” Indoor Unit: Failure of Combination
3.14 “C9” Indoor Unit: Malfunction of Thermistor (R1T) for Suction Air ........159
3.15 “CA” Indoor Unit: Malfunction of Thermistor for Discharge Air ..............160
3.16 “CC” Indoor Unit: Malfunction of Humidity Sensor System ....................161
3.17 “CJ” Indoor Unit: Malfunction of Thermostat Sensor in
Remote Control ....................................................................................162
3.18 “E1” Outdoor Unit: PC Board Defect......................................................163
3.19 “E3” Outdoor Unit: Actuation of High Pressure Switch..........................164
3.20 “E4” Outdoor Unit: Actuation of Low Pressure Sensor .........................166
3.21 “E5” Inverter Compressor Motor Lock...................................................168
3.22 “E7” Malfunction of Outdoor Unit Fan Motor .........................................169
3.23 “E9” Outdoor Unit: Malfunction of Moving Part of
Electronic Expansion Valve (Y1E, Y3E)...............................................170
3.24 “F3” Outdoor Unit: Abnormal Discharge Pipe Temperature..................172
3.25 “F6” Outdoor Unit: Refrigerant Overcharged ........................................173
3.26 “H9” Outdoor Unit: Malfunction of Thermistor (R1T) for Outdoor Air ....174
3.27 “J3” Outdoor Unit: Malfunction of Discharge Pipe Thermistor (R2T)....175
3.28 “J5” Outdoor Unit: Malfunction of Thermistor (R3T, R5T) for
Suction Pipe 1, 2 ..................................................................................176
Troubleshooting 123
SiENBE34-802

Outdoor Unit Liquid Pipe ......................................................................178
3.32 “JA” Outdoor Unit: Malfunction of High Pressure Sensor .....................180
3.33 “JC” Outdoor Unit: Malfunction of Low Pressure Sensor ......................181
3.34 “L1” Outdoor Unit: Malfunction of PC Board ..........................................182
3.35 “L4” Outdoor Unit: Malfunction of Inverter Radiating Fin
Temperature Rise.................................................................................183
3.36 “L5” Outdoor Unit: Inverter Compressor Abnormal...............................184
3.37 “L8” Outdoor Unit: Inverter Current Abnormal ......................................185
3.38 “L9” Outdoor Unit: Inverter Start up Error .............................................186
3.39 “LC” Outdoor Unit: Malfunction of Transmission between
Inverter and Control PC Board .............................................................187
3.40 “P1” Outdoor Unit: High Voltage of Capacitor in
Main Inverter Circuit .............................................................................188
3.41 “U0” Low Pressure Drop Due to Refrigerant Shortage or
Electronic Expansion Valve Failure......................................................189
3.42 “U2” Power Supply Insufficient or Instantaneous Failure......................191
3.43 “U3” Check Operation not Executed .....................................................193
3.44 “U4” Malfunction of Transmission between Indoor Units and
Outdoor Units .......................................................................................194
3.45 “U5” Malfunction of Transmission between Remote Control and
Indoor Unit............................................................................................196
3.46 “U8” Malfunction of Transmission between Main and Sub Remote
Controls ................................................................................................197
3.47 “U9” Malfunction of Transmission between Indoor and Outdoor Units
in the Same System .............................................................................198
3.48 “UA” Excessive Number of Indoor Units................................................200
3.49 “UC” Address Duplication of Central Remote Control ...........................201
3.50 “UE” Malfunction of Transmission between
Central Remote Control and Indoor Unit ..............................................202
3.51 “UF” System is not Set yet ....................................................................204
3.52 “UH” Malfunction of System, Refrigerant System Address Undefined ..205
4. Troubleshooting by Indication on
the Centralized Remote Control..........................................................206
4.1 “UE” Malfunction of Transmission between
Centralized Remote Control and Indoor Unit .......................................206
4.2 “M1” PC Board Defect ............................................................................207
4.3 “M8” Malfunction of Transmission between
Optional Controllers for Centralized Control........................................208
4.4 “MA” Improper Combination of Optional Controllers for
Centralized Control...............................................................................209
4.5 “MC” Address Duplication, Improper Setting..........................................211
5. Troubleshooting by Indication on the Unified ON/OFF Controller.......212
5.1 Operation Lamp Blinks .........................................................................212
(Repeats Single Blink)..........................................................................214
(Repeats Double Blink) ........................................................................217
124 Troubleshooting
SiENBE34-802 Symptom-based Troubleshooting
1. Symptom-based Troubleshooting
Symptom Supposed Cause Countermeasure
1 The system does not start operation at all. Blowout of fuse(s) Turn Off the power supply and
then replace the fuse(s).
Cutout of breaker(s) • If the knob of any breaker is in
its OFF position, turn ON the
power supply.
• If the knob of any circuit
breaker is in its tripped position,
do not turn ON the power
supply.
ON
Knob
Tripped
OFF
Circuit breaker
Power failure After the power failure is reset,

restart the system.
Open phase in power supply Check power supply. After that,
cable properly connect the power
supply cable, and then turn ON
the power supply.
2 The system starts operation but makes an Blocked air inlet or outlet of indoor Remove obstacle(s).
immediate stop. or outdoor unit
Clogged air filter(s) Clean the air filter(s).
3 The system does not cool or heat air well. Blocked air inlet or outlet of indoor Remove obstacle(s).
or outdoor unit
Clogged air filter(s) Clean the air filter(s).
Enclosed outdoor unit(s) Remove the enclosure.
Improper set temperature Set the temperature to a proper
degree.
Airflow rate set to "LOW" Set it to a proper airflow rate.
Improper direction of air diffusion Set it to a proper direction.
Open window(s) or door(s) Shut it tightly.
[In cooling] Direct sunlight received Hang curtains or shades on
windows.
[In cooling] Too many persons staying in a
room
[In cooling] Too many heat sources (e.g. OA
equipment) located in a room
4 The system does The system stops and If the OPERATION lamp on the Normal operation. The system will
not operate. immediately restarts operation. remote control turns ON, the automatically start operation after
system will be normal. These a lapse of five minutes.
Pressing the TEMP ADJUST symptoms indicate that the
button immediately resets the system is controlled so as not to
system. put unreasonable loads on the
system.
The remote control displays The system is controlled with Operate the system using the
"UNDER CENTRALIZED centralized control. Blinking COOL/HEAT centralized remote
CONTROL", which blinks for a display indicates that the system control.
period of several seconds cannot be operated using the
when the OPERATION button remote Control.
is depressed.
The system stops immediately The system is in preparation Wait for a period of approximately
after turning ON the power mode of micro computer one minute.
supply. operation.
5 The system The remote control displays The system stops due to an Remove causes of electrical
makes malfunction codes "U4" and interruption in communication noises.
intermittent "U5", and the system stops but between units caused by If these causes are removed, the
stops. restarts after a lapse of several electrical noises coming from system will automatically restart
minutes. equipment other than air operation.
conditioners.
Troubleshooting 125
Symptom-based Troubleshooting SiENBE34-802

6 COOL-HEAT The remote control displays This remote control has no option Use a remote control with option
selection is "UNDER CENTRALIZED to select cooling operation. to select cooling operation.
disabled. CONTROL".
The remote control displays COOL-HEAT selection is made Use the COOL-HEAT selection
"UNDER CENTRALIZED using the COOL-HEAT selection remote control to select cool or
CONTROL", and the COOL- remote control. heat.
HEAT selection remote control
is provided.
7 The system This symptom occurs The system is in preparation Wait for a period of approximately
conducts fan immediately after turning ON mode of operation. 10 minutes.
operation but not the power supply.
cooling or
heating
operation.
8 The airflow rate Even pressing the AIRFLOW In heating operation, when the Normal operation.
is not RATE SET button makes no room temperature reaches the set
reproduced changes in the airflow rate. degree, the outdoor unit will stop
according to the while the indoor unit is brought to
setting. fan LL operation so that no one
gets cold air.
Furthermore, if fan operation
mode is selected when other
indoor unit is in heating operation,
the system will be brought to fan
LL operation.
(The fan LL operation is also
enabled while in oil return mode in
cooling operation.)
9 The airflow The airflow direction is not Automatic control Normal operation.
direction is not corresponding to that
reproduced displayed on the remote
according to the Control.
setting. The flap does not swing.
10 A white mist <Indoor unit> Uneven temperature distribution Clean the inside of the indoor unit.
comes out from In cooling operation, the due to heavy stain of the inside of
the system. ambient humidity is high. the indoor unit
(This indoor unit is installed in
a place with much oil or dust.)
<Indoor unit> Hot gas (refrigerant) flown in the Normal operation.
Immediately after cooling indoor unit results to be vapor
operation stopping, the from the unit.
ambient temperature and
humidity are low.
<Indoor and outdoor units> Defrosted moisture turns to be Normal operation.
After the completion of vapor and comes out from the
defrosting operation, the units.
system is switched to heating
operation.
126 Troubleshooting
SiENBE34-802 Symptom-based Troubleshooting

11 The system <Indoor unit> These are operating sounds of Normal operation.
produces Immediately after turning ON the electronic expansion valve ofThis sound becomes low after a
sounds. the power supply, indoor unit the indoor unit. lapse of approximately one
produces "ringing" sounds. minute.
<Indoor and outdoor units> These sounds are produced from Normal operation.
"Hissing" sounds are gas (refrigerant) flowing
continuously produced while in respectively through the indoor
cooling or defrosting operation. and outdoor units.
<Indoor and outdoor units> These sounds are produced Normal operation.
"Hissing" sounds are produced when the gas (refrigerant) stops
immediately after the startup or or changes flowing.
stop of the system, or the
startup or stop of defrosting
operation.
<Indoor unit> These sounds are produced from Normal operation.
Faint sounds are continuously the drain discharge device in
produced while in cooling operation.
operation or after stopping the
operation.
<Indoor unit> These sounds are produced from Normal operation.
"Creaking" sounds are resin parts expanding and
produced while in heating contracting with temperature
operation or after stopping the changes.
operation.
<Indoor unit> On VRV systems, these sounds Normal operation.
Sounds like "trickling" or the are produced when other indoor
like are produced from indoor units in operation. The reason is
units in the stopped state. that the system runs in order to
prevent oil or refrigerant from
dwelling.
<Outdoor unit> The reason is that the compressor Normal operation.
Pitch of operating sounds changes the operating frequency.
changes.
12 Dust comes out Dust comes out from the Dust, which has deposited on the Normal operation.
from the system. system when it restarts after inside of indoor unit, is blown out
the stop for an extended period from the system.
of time.
13 Odors come out In operation Odors of room, cigarettes or else The inside of the indoor unit
from the system. adsorbed to the inside of indoor should be cleaned.
unit are blown out.
14 Outdoor unit fan In operation The reason is that fan revolutions Normal operation.
does not rotate. are controlled to put the operation
to the optimum state.
15 LCD display "88" Immediately after turning ON The reason is that the system is Normal operation.
appears on the the power supply checking to be sure the remote This code is displayed for a period
remote control. control is normal. of approximately one minute at
maximum.
16 The outdoor unit After stopping operation It stops in order to prevent oil or Normal operation.
compressor or refrigerant from dwelling. It stops after a lapse of
the outdoor unit approximately 5 to 10 minutes.
fan does not
stop.
17 The outdoor gets While stopping operation The reason is that the compressor Normal operation.
hot. is warmed up to provide smooth
startup of the system.
18 Hot air comes Hot air is felt while the system On VRV systems, small quantity Normal operation.
out from the stops. of refrigerant is fed to indoor units
system even in the stopped state when other
though it stops. indoor units are in operation.
19 The system does The system is in dry operation. The reason is that the dry Change the system to cooling
not cool air well. operation serves not to reduce operation.
the room temperature where
possible.
Troubleshooting 127
Troubleshooting by Remote Control SiENBE34-802
2. Troubleshooting by Remote Control

2.1 The INSPECTION / TEST Button
The following modes can be selected by using the [Inspection/Test Operation] button on the
remote control.
Depress Inspection/Test Operation button

for more than 4 seconds.
Indoor unit settings can be made Service data can be obtained.
• Filter sign time
Local • Malfunciton code history
setting Service
• Air flow direction mode • Temperature data of various sections
• Others mode Service settings can be made.
• Forced fan ON
• Air flow direction/volume setting
Depress Inspection/Test Operation button
Press Inspection/Test Operation button once.
for more than 4 seconds.
Normal
mode
Press Inspection/Test Operation button once.
Press Inspection/Test Operation
Or after 30 minutes
button once.
After 10 seconds
Following codes can be checked.

• Malfunction codes Test
Inspection operation Thermostat is forcibly turned on.
• Indoor model code mode
• Outdoor model code mode
Press Inspection/Test Operation
(V0815)
button once.
128 Troubleshooting
SiENBE34-802 Troubleshooting by Remote Control
2.2 Self-diagnosis by Wired Remote Control

Explanation If operation stops due to malfunction, the remote control’s operation LED blinks, and
malfunction code is displayed. (Even if stop operation is carried out, malfunction contents are
displayed when the inspection mode is entered.) The malfunction code enables you to tell what
kind of malfunction caused operation to stop. See page 136 for malfunction code and
malfunction contents.
Operation LED
ON/OFF button
Display of indoor unit for

which a malfunction has
been detected
Inspection display
Malfunction code
Inspection/Test button
Note:
1. Pressing the INSPECTION/TEST button will blink the check indication.
2. While in check mode, pressing and holding the ON/OFF button for a period of five seconds or
more will clear the failure history indication shown above. In this case, on the codes display,
the malfunction code will blink twice and then change to “00” (=Normal), the Unit No. will
change to “0”, and the operation mode will automatically switch from check mode to normal
mode (displaying the set temperature).
Troubleshooting 129
2.3 Self-diagnosis by Infrared Remote Control

In the Case of If equipment stops due to a malfunction, the operation indicating LED on the light reception
BRC7C Type section flashes.
BRC7E Type The malfunction code can be determined by following the procedure described below. (The
BRC4C Type malfunction code is displayed when an operation error has occurred. In normal condition, the
malfunction code of the last problem is displayed.)
1. Press the INSPECTION/TEST button to select “Inspection.”
The equipment enters the inspection mode. The “Unit” indication lights and the Unit No.
display shows flashing “0” indication.
2. Set the Unit No.
Press the UP or DOWN button and change the Unit No. display until the buzzer (*1) is
generated from the indoor unit.
*1 Number of beeps
3 short beeps : Conduct all of the following operations.
1 short beep : Conduct steps 3 and 4.
Continue the operation in step 4 until a buzzer remains ON. The continuous buzzer indicates
that the malfunction code is confirmed.
Continuous beep : No abnormality.
3. Press the MODE selector button.
The left “0” (upper digit) indication of the malfunction code flashes.
4. Malfunction code upper digit diagnosis
Press the UP or DOWN button and change the malfunction code upper digit until the
malfunction code matching buzzer (*2) is generated.
The upper digit of the code changes as shown below when the UP and DOWN buttons are
pressed.
“Advance” button “Backward” button (SE006)
*2 Number of beeps
Continuous beep : Both upper and lower digits matched. (Malfunction code confirmed)
2 short beeps : Upper digit matched.
1 short beep : Lower digit matched.
5. Press the MODE selector button.
The right “0” (lower digit) indication of the malfunction code flashes.
6. Malfunction code lower digit diagnosis
Press the UP or DOWN button and change the malfunction code lower digit until the
continuous malfunction code matching buzzer (*2) is generated.
130 Troubleshooting
The lower digit of the code changes as shown below when the UP and DOWN buttons are
pressed.
“Advance” button “Backward” button (SE007)
Normal status
Enters inspection mode from normal
status when the INSPECTION/TEST
button is pressed.
1. Press INSPECTION/TEST button.
If no button is pressed
for 1 minute, equipment
returns to normal status.
3. Press
MODE
selector
When MODE selector button.
button is pressed or no
button is pressed for 1
minute, equipment
If no button is pressed
for 1 minute, equipment
5. Press MODE selector button.
Troubleshooting 131
2.4 Operation of the Remote Control’s Inspection / Test

Operation Button
Unit 0
Malfunction code L0
Inspection
Normal display (No display) Malfunction code blinks when a malfunction occurs.
Inspection/test
operation Push the button.
Unit 0
Malfunction code L0 0 7 1... Capacity code Example of capacity code display
Inspection F... Indoor unit system code Example model Display
C... Indoor unit type code
Inspection mode J... Progression code FXCQ25 028
FXFQ63 071
Inspection/test
Indoor unit system code
Display Product classification System classification
1 VRV system (VAV indoor unit)
071
FCJ 2 VRV system Outdoor air processing unit
F VRV system Standard indoor unit
Indoor unit model code display H VRV system New ceilling suspended cassette
Indoor unit type code

Inspection/test Display Type Model
A Wall mounted FXAQ
C Double flow FXCQ
E Corner FXKQ
–––
AA1 F Multi flow FXFQ
H Ceiling suspended FXHQ
Outdoor unit model code display J Built-in FXSQ
L Floor standing FXLQ
Inspection/test P Concealed ceiling duct FXMQ
L Concealed floor standing type FXNQ
6 Multi flow 600×600 FXZQ
3 Slim Ceilling mounted duct FXDQ
5 New ceilling suspended cassette FXUQ
Test operation
Outdoor model code
Test operation mode
Display Type Model
AA1 VRV System Inverter K Series RSXYP
Inspection/test
operation Push the button. AA3 R-407C VRV PLUS Series RXYP
A92 VRV Heat Recovery Series RSEYP
AA5 High COP type R-407C L Series RSXYP-L
AAA VRV II RXYQ-M
AAC VRV II M/C RXYQ-MA
AAE VRV III RXYQ-P
A8E VRV III-S RXYSQ-P
132 Troubleshooting
2.5 Remote Control Service Mode

How to Enter the
Service Mode
Normal operation Field set Service

mode mode mode
Push the button for 4 seconds or longer. Push the button for 4 seconds or longer.
(VF020)
Service Mode 1. Select the mode No.

Operation Set the desired mode No. with the button.
Method (For infrared remote control, Mode 43 only can be set.)
2. Select the unit No. (For group control only)
Select the indoor unit No. to be set with the time mode . (For infrared remote control,
button.)
3. Make the settings required for each mode. (Modes 41, 44, 45)
In case of Mode 44, 45, push button to be able to change setting before setting work.
(LCD “code” blinks.)
For details, refer to the table in next page.
4. Define the setting contents. (Modes 44, 45)
Define by pushing the timer button.
After defining, LCD “code” changes blinking to ON.
5. Return to the normal operation mode.
Push the button one time.
Troubleshooting 133
Mode Function Contents and operation method Remote control display example
No
40 Malfunction
hysteresis display
Display malfunction hysteresis.
The history No. can be changed with the Unit 1
button.
Malfunction code 40
2-U4
Malfunction code
Hystory No: 1 - 9
(VE007) 1: Latest
41 Display of sensor
and address data
Display various types of data.
Select the data to be displayed with the Sensor data display
button. Sensor data
0: Thermostat sensor in remote control. Unit No. Sensor type
1: Suction
2: Liquid pipe
41
3: Gas pipe 1 1
27
Address data
4: Indoor unit address Temperature ºC
5: Outdoor unit address
6: BS unit address Address display
7: Zone control address Unit No. Address type
8: Cool/heat group address
9: Demand / low noise address
41
1 8
1
Address
(VE008)
43 Forced fan ON Manually turn the fan ON by each unit. (When

you want to search for the unit No.)
Unit 1
By selecting the unit No. with the button,
you can turn the fan of each indoor unit on
(forced ON) individually. 43
(VE009)
44 Individual setting Set the fan speed and air flow direction by each
unit
Unit 1
Select the unit No. with the time mode
44
button. Set the fan speed with the Code
button.
1 3
Set the air flow direction with the button.
Fan speed 1: Low Air flow direction
3: High P0 - P4
(VE010)
45 Unit No. transfer Transfer unit No.

Select the unit No. with the button. Present unit No.
Set the unit No. after transfer with the
button. Unit 1
0 2 45
Code
Unit No. after
transfer
(VE011)
134 Troubleshooting
2.6 Remote Control Self-Diagnosis Function

The remote control switches are equipped with a self diagnosis function so that more
appropriate maintenance can be carried out. If a malfunction occurs during operation, the
operation lamp, malfunction code and display of malfunctioning unit No. let you know the
contents and location of the malfunction.
When there is a stop due to malfunction, the contents of the malfunction given below can be
diagnosed by a combination of operation lamp, INSPECTION display of the liquid crystal display
and display of malfunction code. It also lets you know the unit No. during group control.
Operation lamp
ON/OFF button
Display of indoor unit for

which a malfunction has
been detected
Inspection display Malfunction code
(VL050)
Troubleshooting 135
8: ON 7: OFF 9: Blink
Malfunction Operation Malfunction contents Page
code lamp Referred
Indoor Unit A0 9 Error of external protection device 142
A1 9 PC board defect, E2 PROM defect 143
A3 9 Malfunction of drain level control system (S1L) 144
A6 9 Fan motor (M1F) lock, overload 146
A7 8 Malfunction of swing flap motor (M1S) 147
A8 9 Abnormal power supply voltage 149
A9 9 Malfunction of moving part of electronic expansion valve (Y1E) 150
AF 8 Drain level above limit 152
AJ 9 Malfunction of capacity setting 153
C1 9 Failure of transmission (between indoor unit PC board and fan PC board) 154
C4 9 Malfunction of thermistor (R2T) for heat exchange (loose connection, 156
disconnection, short circuit, failure)
C5 9 Malfunction of thermistor (R3T) for gas pipes (loose connection, 157
C6 9 Failure of combination (between indoor unit PC board and fan PC board) 158
C9 9 Malfunction of thermistor (R1T) for suction air (loose connection, 159
CA 9 Malfunction of thermistor for discharge air (loose connection, 160
CC 8 Malfunction of humidity sensor system 161
CJ 8 Malfunction of thermostat sensor in remote control 162
Outdoor Unit E1 9 PC board defect 163
E3 9 Actuation of high pressure switch 164
E4 9 Actuation of low pressure sensor 166
E5 9 Compressor motor lock 168
E6 9 Standard compressor lock or over current —
E7 9 Malfunction of outdoor unit fan motor 169
E9 9 Malfunction of moving part of electronic expansion valve (Y1E, Y3E) 170
F3 9 Abnormal discharge pipe temperature 172
F6 9 Refrigerant overcharged 173
H3 8 Failure of high pressure switch —
H4 9 Actuation of low pressure switch —
H7 9 Abnormal outdoor fan motor signal —
H9 9 Malfunction of thermistor (R1T) for outdoor air (loose connection, 174
J2 9 Current sensor malfunction —
J3 9 Malfunction of discharge pipe thermistor (R2T) (loose connection, 175
J5 9 Malfunction of thermistor (R3T, R5T) for suction pipe (loose connection, 176
J6 9 Malfunction of thermistor (R6T) for heat exchanger (loose connection, 177
J7 9 Malfunction of thermistor (R7T) for outdoor unit liquid pipe 178
J9 9 Malfunction of subcooling heat exchanger gas pipe thermistor (R4T) 179
JA 9 Malfunction of high pressure sensor 180
JC 9 Malfunction of low pressure sensor 181
L0 9 Inverter system error —
L1 9 Malfunction of PC board 182
L4 9 Malfunction of inverter radiating fin temperature rise 183
L5 9 Inverter compressor abnormal 184
L8 9 Inverter current abnormal 185
L9 9 Inverter start up error 186
136 Troubleshooting
8: ON 7: OFF 9: Blink
Malfunction Operation Malfunction contents Page
code lamp Referred
Outdoor Unit LA 9 Malfunction of power unit —
LC 9 Malfunction of transmission between inverter and control PC board 187
P1 9 High voltage of capacitor in main inverter circuit. 188
System U0 8 Low pressure drop due to refrigerant shortage or electronic expansion 189
valve failure
U1 9 Reverse phase / open phase —
U2 9 Power supply insufficient or instantaneous failure 191
U3 9 Check operation is not completed. 193
U4 9 Malfunction of transmission between indoor and outdoor units 194
U5 9 Malfunction of transmission between remote control and indoor unit 196
U5 7 Failure of remote control PC board or setting during control by remote 196
control
U7 9 Malfunction of transmission between outdoor units —
U8 9 Malfunction of transmission between main and sub remote controls 197
(malfunction of sub remote control)
U9 9 Malfunction of transmission between indoor unit and outdoor unit in the 198
same system
UA 9 Excessive number of indoor units 200
UC 8 Address duplication of central remote control 201
UE 9 Malfunction of transmission between central remote control and indoor unit 202
UF 9 System is not set yet 204
UH 9 Malfunction of system, refrigerant system address undefined 205
Central UE 9 Malfunction of transmission between centralized remote control and indoor 206
remote unit
control and M1 8 or 7 PC board defect 207
Schedule
Timer M8 8 or 7 Malfunction of transmission between optional controls for centralized 208
control
MA 8 or 7 Improper combination of optional controllers for centralized control 209
MC 8 or 7 Address duplication, improper setting 211
Heat 64 8 Indoor unit’s air thermistor error —
Reclaim 65 8 Outside air thermistor error —
Ventilation
68 8 Malfunction of HVU —
6A 8 Damper system alarm —
6A 9 Damper system + thermistor error —
6F 8 Malfunction of simple remote control —
94 9 Internal transmission error —
The system operates for malfunction codes indicated in black squares, however, be sure to check and repair.
Troubleshooting 137
Malfunction code indication by outdoor unit PC board
<Monitor mode> Contents of malfunction Malfunction

To enter the monitor mode, push the code
MODE (BS1) button when in In-phase malfunction of DIII Net Detection of DIII Net E1
“Setting mode 1”. Abnormal discharge pressure HPS activated E3
Abnormal suction pressure Abnormal Pe E4
Compressor lock Detection of INV compressor lock E5
Over load, over current, Detection of DC fan 1 motor lock E7
abnormal lock of outdoor unit fan motor
Detection of DC fan 2 motor lock
<Selection of setting item> Malfunction of electronic expansion EV1 E9
valve
EV3
the LED display to a setting item. Faulty sensor of outdoor air Faulty Ta sensor (short) H9
temperature
Abnormal discharge pipe temperature Abnormal Td F3
Abnormal heat exchanger temperature Refrigerant over charge F6
Faulty sensor of discharge pipe Faulty Tdi sensor (short) J3
temperature
<Confirmation of malfunction 1> Faulty sensor of suction pipe Faulty Ts1 sensor (short) J5
temperature
Push the RETURN (BS3) button Faulty Ts2 sensor (short)
once to display "First digit" of Faulty sensor of heat exchanger Faulty Tb sensor (short) J6
temperature
malfunction code.
Malfunction of the liquid pipe Faulty TI sensor (short) J7
temperature sensor
Faulty sensor of subcool heat Faulty Tsh sensor (short) J9
exchanger temperature
Faulty sensor of discharge pressure Faulty Pc sensor (short) JA
<Confirmation of malfunction 2> Faulty sensor of suction pressure Faulty Pe sensor (short) JC
Faulty Inverter PC board Faulty IPM L1
Push the SET (BS2) button once to Detail
display "Second digit" of malfunction Abnormal Current sensor offset
description
code. on next Abnormal IGBT
page. Faulty Current sensor
Abnormal SP-PAM over-voltage
Inverter radiation fin temperature rising Over heating of inverter radiation fin temperature L4
DC output over current Inverter instantaneous over current L5
<Confirmation of malfunction 3> Electronic thermal Electronic thermal switch 1 L8
Electronic thermal switch 2
Push the SET (BS2) button once to
Out-of-step
display "malfunction location".
Speed down after startup
Lightening detection
Stall prevention (Limit time) Stall prevention (Current increasing) L9
Stall prevention (Faulty start up)
Abnormal wave form in startup
Out-of-step
<Confirmation of malfunction 4>
Transmission error between inverter Inverter transmission error LC
Push the SET (BS2) button once to and outdoor unit
display "master or slave 1 or slave 2"
and "malfunction location".

“Monitor mode”.
∗ Push the MODE (BS1) button and

returns to “Setting mode 1”.
138 Troubleshooting
8: ON 7: OFF 9:Blink
MalfunctionConfirmation of malfunction 1 Confirmation of malfunction 2 Confirmation of malfunction 3 Confirmation of malfunction 4
code H1P H2P H3P H4P H5P H6P H7P H1P H2P H3P H4P H5P H6P H7P H1P H2P H3P H4P H5P H6P H7P H1P H2P H3P H4P H5P H6P H7P
E1 9 7 7 9 9 9 7 7 7 9 9 8 7 7 7 7 7 9 8 8 7 7 9 9
E3 9 7 7 9 9 9 7 7 7 7 9 7 7
E4 9 7 9 7 7 9 7 7 7 7 9 7 7
E5 9 7 9 7 9 9 7 7 7 7 9 7 7
E7 9 7 9 9 9 9 7 7 7 7 9 7 9 ∗1
9 7 7 7 9 9 7 9
E9 9 9 7 7 9 9 7 7 7 7 9 7 7
9 7 7 7 7 9 9 7
H9 9 9 7 7 9 9 7 7 7 7 9 7 7 ∗1
F3 9 7 9 7 9 9 7 7 9 9 9 7 7 7 7 9 7 7 ∗1
F6 9 7 9 9 7 9 7 7 7 7 9 7 7 9 9
J3 9 7 9 9 7 9 7 7 9 9 9 7 7 7 7 9 7 7
J5 9 7 9 7 9 9 7 7 7 7 9 7 7
9 7 7 7 7 9 7 9
J6 9 7 9 9 7 9 7 7 7 7 9 7 7
∗1
J7 9 7 9 9 9 9 7 7 7 7 9 7 7
J9 9 9 7 7 9 9 7 7 7 7 9 7 7
JA 9 9 7 9 7 9 7 7 7 7 9 7 7
JC 9 9 9 7 7 9 7 7 7 7 9 7 7
L1 9 7 9 9 9 9 7 7 7 9 9 7 7 7 7 9 7 7 7 7
9 7 7 7 9 9 7 7 7 7 9 7 7 7 9
9 7 7 7 9 9 7 7 7 7 9 7 7 9 7
9 7 7 7 9 9 7 7 7 7 9 7 7 9 9
9 7 7 7 9 9 7 7 7 7 9 7 9 7 7
L4 9 7 9 7 7 9 7 7 7 7 9 7 7
L5 9 7 9 7 9 9 7 7 7 7 9 7 7
L8 9 9 7 7 7 9 7 7 7 7 9 7 7
9 7 7 7 7 9 7 9
9 7 7 7 7 9 9 7
9 7 7 7 9 9 7 7 ∗1
L9 9 9 7 7 9 9 7 7 7 7 9 7 7
9 7 7 7 7 9 7 9
9 7 7 7 7 9 9 7
LC 9 9 9 7 7 9 7 7 7 7 9 7 9
Display of contents of Display of contents of Display 1 of Display 2 of

malfunction (first digit) malfunction (second digit) malfunction in detail malfunction in detail
∗1 7 7 Master
7 9 Slave1
9 7 Slave2
9 9 System
Troubleshooting 139
<Monitor mode> Contents of malfunction Malfunction

code
To enter the monitor mode, push the
Open phase/Power supply imbalance Imbalance of inverter power supply P1
MODE (BS1) button when in voltage
“Setting mode 1”.
Faulty temperature sensor of inverter Faulty thermistor of inverter fin P4
radiation fin
Refrigerant shortage Refrigerant shortage alarm U0
Abnormal power supply voltage Insufficient Inverter voltage U2
Faulty charge of capacitor in main inverter circuit
Malfunction due to SP-PAM overvoltage
<Selection of setting item>
Malfunction due to P-N short circuit
No implementation of test-run U3
the LED display to a setting item.
Transmission error between indoor I/O transmission error U4

and outdoor unit
I/O transmission error
Transmission error of other system Indoor unit system abnormal in other U9
system or other indoor unit system
abnormal in own system
Erroneous field setting System transmission malfunction UA
Push the RETURN (BS3) button Overconnection malfunction of indoor units
once to display "First digit" of
Malfunction of field setting
malfunction code.
Refrigerant abnormal
Connection error (BP unit)
Faulty system malfunction Wiring error (Auto-address error) UH
Conflict in wiring and piping, no setting Conflict in wiring and piping UF
for system
Push the SET (BS2) button once to Detail

display "Second digit" of malfunction description
code. on next
page.

display "malfunction location".

display "master or slave 1 or slave 2"
and "malfunction location".

“Monitor mode”.
∗ Push the MODE (BS1) button and

returns to “Setting mode 1”.
140 Troubleshooting
8: ON 7: OFF 9:Blink
Malfunction Confirmation of malfunction 1 Confirmation of malfunction 2 Confirmation of malfunction 3 Confirmation of malfunction 4
code H1P H2P H3P H4P H5P H6P H7P H1P H2P H3P H4P H5P H6P H7P H1P H2P H3P H4P H5P H6P H7P H1P H2P H3P H4P H5P H6P H7P
P1 9 9 7 7 7 9 7 7 7 9 9 7 7 7 7 9 7 7
∗1
P4 9 7 9 7 7 9 7 7 7 7 9 7 7
U0 9 9 7 7 9 9 7 7 7 7 9 7 7 7 7 9 7 7 9 9
U2 9 7 7 9 7 9 7 7 7 7 9 7 7
∗1
9 7 7 7 7 7 9
9 7 7 7 7 9 7 7 9 7
9 7 7 7 7 9 7 7 7 9
U3 9 7 7 9 9 9 7 7 7 7 9 7 7 9 9
9 7 7 7 7 9 7 9 9 9
U4 9 7 9 7 7 9 7 7 7 7 9 7 7 9 9
9 7 7 7 7 9 7 9 9 9
U9 9 9 7 7 9 9 7 7 7 7 9 7 7 9 9
UA 9 9 7 9 7 9 7 7 7 7 9 7 7 9 9
9 7 7 7 7 9 7 9 9 9
9 7 7 7 7 9 9 7 9 9
9 7 7 7 9 9 7 7 9 9
9 7 7 9 7 9 7 9 9 9
UH 9 9 7 9 9 9 7 7 7 7 9 7 7 9 9
UF 9 9 9 9 9 9 7 7 7 7 9 7 7 9 9
Display of contents of Display of contents of Display 1 of Display 2 of

malfunction (first digit) malfunction (second digit) malfunction in detail malfunction in detail
∗1 7 7 Master
7 9 Slave1
9 7 Slave2
9 9 System
Troubleshooting 141
Troubleshooting by Indication on the Remote Control SiENBE34-802
3. Troubleshooting by Indication on the Remote

Control
3.1 “A0” Indoor Unit: Error of External Protection Device
Remote Control A0
Display
Applicable All indoor unit models

Models
Method of
Malfunction
Detection
Malfunction
Decision
Conditions
Supposed Actuation of external protection device

Causes Improper field set
Defect of indoor unit PC board
Troubleshooting
Be sure to turn off power switch before connect or disconnect connector,
Caution or parts damage may be occurred.
External
protection device is YES
connected to terminals T1 Actuation of external protection
and T2 of the indoor device.
unit terminal
block.
NO
ON/OFF
input from
outside (mode No.
12, first code No. 1) has YES
been set to external Change the second code No. to
protection device input "01" or "02" .
(second code No.
03) by remote
control.
NO
Indoor unit PC board replacement.
(V2776)
142 Troubleshooting
SiENBE34-802 Troubleshooting by Indication on the Remote Control
3.2 “A1 ” Indoor Unit: PC Board Defect

Remote Control A1
Display

Models
Method of Check data from E²PROM.

Malfunction
Detection
Malfunction When data could not be correctly received from the E²PROM
Decision E²PROM : Type of nonvolatile memory. Maintains memory contents even when the power
Conditions supply is turned off.
Supposed Defect of indoor unit PC board

Causes
Troubleshooting
Turn power supply OFF, then

power ON again.
Does the system YES

return to normal? External factor other than
malfunction (for example,
noise etc.).
NO
Replace the indoor unit PC

board. (V2777)
Troubleshooting 143
3.3 “A3 ” Indoor Unit: Malfunction of Drain Level Control

System (S1L)
Remote Control A3
Display
Applicable FXCQ, FXFQ, FXZQ, FXKQ, FXSQ, FXMQ,

Models FXHQ (Option), FXAQ (Option)
Method of By float switch OFF detection

Malfunction
Detection
Malfunction When rise of water level is not a condition and the float switch goes OFF.
Decision
Conditions
Supposed 220~240V power supply is not provided

Causes Defect of float switch or short circuit connector
Defect of drain pump
Drain clogging, upward slope, etc.
Loose connection of connector
144 Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting
Is power supply NO
220~240V provided? Provide 220~240V power
supply.
YES
The float A short
switch is connected to X8A NO circuit connector is NO
(or X15A) of the indoor unit connected to Connect either a short circuit
PC board. X8A. connector or float switch and
turn on again.
YES YES
The
float switch
contact is forming a Becomes NO
YES normal when X8A (or X15A) of
short circuit (continuity check Defect of indoor unit PC board.
with X8A (or X15A) the indoor unit PC board
disconnected) is short circuited
NO YES
Loose connection of connector.
Water builds NO The float switch NO

up in the drain pan. functions normally. Replace float switch.
YES YES
Modify the float switch's
connection and turn on again.
The
drain pump is
connected to X25A or NO
terminals Y1 and Y2 of the Connect the drain pump and
indoor unit PC turn on again.
board.
YES
The
drain pump works YES
when the power supply is Check the drain piping for
reset for the indoor clogging or upward slope, etc.
unit.
NO
The
voltage of
terminals Y1 and
Y2 or X25A is 220~240 NO
V (within 5minutes of Replace indoor unit PC board.
resetting the power
supply).
YES
Replace the drain pump or
check for dirt, etc.
(V2778)
Troubleshooting 145
3.4 “A6 ” Indoor Unit: Fan Motor (M1F) Lock, Overload

Remote Control A6
Display

Models
Method of Detection by failure of signal for detecting number of turns to come from the fan motor
Malfunction
Detection
Malfunction When number of turns can’t be detected even when output voltage to the fan is maximum
Decision
Conditions
Supposed Fan motor lock

Causes Disconnected or faulty wiring between fan motor and PC board
Troubleshooting
Is the
wiring from the
fan motor securely NO
connected to connectors on Connect the wiring and turn on
the indoor unit PC again.
board?
YES
Wiring
between the
indoor unit PC board and YES
fan motor is Fix the wiring and turn on again.
disconnected.
NO
YES
Does the fan motor Replace the indoor unit PC board.
run?
NO
Replace the fan motor.
(V2779)
146 Troubleshooting
3.5 “A7” Indoor Unit: Malfunction of Swing Flap Motor (M1S)

Remote Control A7
Display
Applicable FXCQ, FXKQ, FXZQ, FXHQ, FXUQ

Models
Method of Utilizes ON/OFF of the limit switch when the motor turns.
Malfunction
Detection
Malfunction When ON/OFF of the microswitch for positioning cannot be reversed even though the swing flap
Decision motor is energized for a specified amount of time (about 30 seconds).
Conditions
Supposed Defect of swing motor

Causes Defect of connection cable (power supply and limit switch)
Defect of air flow direction adjusting flap-cam
Troubleshooting 147
Troubleshooting
Is power supply NO
220~240V provided? Provide 220~240V power
supply.
YES
Indoor unit is
a model equipped with a NO
swing flap function Replace indoor unit PC board.
YES
The The
swing motor works YES connector is connected to NO
when the power supply is X9A (or X15A) of the indoor unit Connect the connector to X9A
turned off and then PC board. and turn on again.
back on.
NO YES
The limit switch NO
functions normally. Replace swing motor.
YES
The
connecting cable is YES
After short-circuited or Replace the limit switch
turning the disconnected. connecting cable.
swing-flap ON
and then stopping NO
with the remote control,
the voltage of X6A (or X29A)
of the indoor unit PC board is NO
220 ~ 240 VAC (50 Hz) / 220 Replace indoor unit PC board.
VAC (60 Hz) when turned
on again (within 30
seconds of
turning on
again).
YES
The YES
connecting cable has no Replace the power supply
continuity. connecting cable.
NO
When
the air flow
direction flap's cam
mechanism is NO
disconnected from the swing Replace swing motor.
motor, operation is
normal when
turned on
again.
YES
Take the cam mechanism
apart, reassemble and turn on
again.
(V2780)
148 Troubleshooting
3.6 Abnormal Power Supply Voltage

Remote Control A8
Display
Applicable FXMQ40~125P
Models
Method of Detect malfunction checking the input voltage of fan motor.

Malfunction
Detection
Malfunction When the input voltage of fan motor is 150V and below, or 386V and above.
Decision
Conditions
Supposed The possible causes are:

Causes Power-supply voltage malfunction.
Connection defect on signal line.
Wiring defect.
Instantaneous blackout, others.
Troubleshooting

Check the condition of the

power source.
1 Check if power-supply voltage
is 220V - 240V ± 10%.
2 Check if there is power open
phase or faulty wiring.
3 Check if power-supply voltage
side unbalance is within 6V.
There are
problems on the YES
condition of power source Correct any fault.
described above.
NO
"A8" Reoccurrence of YES

Check and correct each
malfunction. wiring.
NO
It is possible to have external

factor, such as brownout and
instantaneous blackout.
Troubleshooting 149
3.7 “A9 ” Indoor Unit: Malfunction of Moving Part of

Electronic Expansion Valve (Y1E)
Remote Control A9
Display

Models
Method of
Malfunction
Detection
Malfunction
Decision
Conditions
Supposed Malfunction of moving part of electronic expansion valve

Causes Defect of indoor unit PC board
Defect of connecting cable
Troubleshooting
The
electronic
expansion valve is NO
connected to X7A of the After connecting, turn the power
indoor unit PC supply off and then back on.
board.
YES
Normal
when coil
check (∗1) of the NO
moving part of the electronic Replace the moving part of the
expansion valve is electronic expansion valve.
checked.
YES
The connecting YES

cable is short-circuited or Replace the connecting cable.
disconnected.
NO
If you turn the power supply off
and turn on again, and it still does
not help, replace the indoor unit
PC board.
(V2781)
150 Troubleshooting
∗1: Coil check method for the moving part of the electronic expansion valve
Discount the electronic expansion valve from the PC board and check the continuity between
the connector pins.
(Normal)
Pin No. 1. White 2. Yellow 3. Orange 4. Blue 5. Red 6. Brown
1. White × { × { ×
Approx. Approx.
300Ω 150Ω
2. Yellow × { × {
Approx. Approx.
300Ω 150Ω
3. Orange × { ×
Approx.
150Ω
4. Blue × {
Approx.
150Ω
5. Red ×
6. Brown
{: Continuity
×: No continuity
Troubleshooting 151
3.8 “AF ” Indoor Unit: Drain Level above Limit

Remote Control AF
Display
Applicable FXCQ, FXSQ, FXKQ, FXMQ, FXDQ

Models
Method of Water leakage is detected based on float switch ON/OFF operation while the compressor is in
Malfunction non-operation.
Detection
Malfunction When the float switch changes from ON to OFF while the compressor is in non-operation.
Decision
Conditions
Supposed Humidifier unit (optional accessory) leaking

Causes Defect of drain pipe (upward slope, etc.)
Troubleshooting
Field drain
piping has a defect such YES
as upward sloping. Modify the drain piping.
NO
A
humidifier unit YES
(optional accessory) is installed Check if the humidifier unit is
on the indoor unit. leaking.
NO
Defect of indoor unit PC board.
(V2782)
152 Troubleshooting
3.9 “AJ ” Indoor Unit: Malfunction of Capacity Determination

Device
Remote Control AJ
Display

Models
Method of Capacity is determined according to resistance of the capacity setting adapter and the memory
Malfunction inside the IC memory on the indoor unit PC board, and whether the value is normal or abnormal
Detection is determined.
Malfunction Operation and:

Decision 1. When the capacity code is not contained in the PC board’s memory, and the capacity setting
Conditions adapter is not connected.
2. When a capacity that doesn’t exist for that unit is set.
Supposed You have forgotten to install the capacity setting adapter.

Troubleshooting
The indoor
unit PC board was NO
replaced with a replacement Replace the indoor unit PC board.
PC board.
YES
The
indoor unit is a
model that requires
installation of a capacity NO
setting adapter when Replace the indoor unit PC board.
replacing the PC
board.
YES
Install a capacity setting adapter.
(V2783)
Troubleshooting 153
3.10 “C1” Indoor Unit: Failure of Transmission (Between

Indoor unit PC Board and Fan PC Board)
Remote Control C1
Display
Models
Method of Check the condition of transmission between indoor PC board (A1P) and PC board for fan
Malfunction (A2P) using computer.
Detecion
Malfunction When normal transmission is not conducted for certain duration.

Decision
Conditions
Supposed Connection defect of the connecter between indoor PC board (A1P) and PC board for fan
Causes (A2P).
Malfunction of indoor PC board (A1P).
Malfunction of PC board for fan (A2P).
External factor, such as instantaneous blackout.
154 Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting

Is the
connector between
indoor PC board (A1P) and PC NO
board for fan (A2P) accurately Connect the connector
connected? (*1) accurately.
YES
Confirm the condition of
transmission on indoor PC
board using local installation
mode. (*2)
Under above
local installation mode, NO
installation position is Replace indoor PC board
"01". (A1P).
YES
Connect the connecter X70A
and turn on the power again.
"C1"
YES
Malfunction breaks Replace PC board for fan
out again. (A2P).
NO
Connect it and operate (It is

possible to have a cause,
such as instantaneous
blackout)
∗1. Pull out and insert the connecter once and check it is absolutely connected.
∗2. Method to check transmission part of indoor PC board.
1 Turn off the power and remove the connecter X70A of indoor PC board (A1P).
2 Short-circuit X70A.
3 After turning on the power, check below numbers under local setting remote control.
(Confirmation: Setting position NO. at the condition of setting switch No. 21 on mode No.
41)
↓
Determination 01: Normal
Other than 01: Transmission defect on indoor PC board
H After confirmation, turn off the power, take off the short-circuit and connect X70A back to
original condition.
Troubleshooting 155
3.11 “C4 ” Indoor Unit: Malfunction of Thermistor (R2T) for

Heat Exchanger
Remote Control C4
Display

Models
Method of Malfunction detection is carried out by temperature detected by heat exchanger thermistor.
Malfunction
Detection
Malfunction When the heat exchanger thermistor becomes disconnected or shorted while the unit is running.
Decision
Conditions
Supposed Defect of thermistor (R2T) for liquid pipe

Troubleshooting
Connector
is connected to X12A of NO
the indoor unit PC Connect the thermistor and turn
board. on again.
YES
Resistance
is normal when
measured after
disconnecting the thermistor NO
(R2T) from the indoor unit Replace the thermistor (R2T).
PC board
(3.5kΩ~360kΩ)
YES
Replace the indoor unit PC board.
(V2784)
∗ Refer to thermistor resistance / temperature characteristics table on P251.
156 Troubleshooting
3.12 “C5 ” Indoor Unit: Malfunction of Thermistor (R3T) for Gas

Pipes
Remote Control C5
Display

Models
Method of Malfunction detection is carried out by temperature detected by gas pipe thermistor.
Malfunction
Detection
Malfunction When the gas pipe thermistor becomes disconnected or shorted while the unit is running.
Decision
Conditions
Supposed Defect of indoor unit thermistor (R3T) for gas pipe

Troubleshooting
Connector is NO
connected to X11A of the Connect the thermistor and turn
indoor unit PC board.
on again.
YES
Resistance
is normal when
measured after
PC board.
(0.6kΩ~360kΩ)
YES
(V2785)
Troubleshooting 157
3.13 “C6” Indoor Unit: Failure of Combination (Between Indoor

unit PC Board and Fan PC Board)
Remote Control C6
Display
Models
Method of Conduct open line detection with PC board for fan (A2P) using indoor PC board (A1P).
Malfunction
Detection
Malfunction When the communication data of PC board for fan (A2P) is determined as incorrect.
Decision
Conditions
Supposed The possible causes are:

Causes Malfunction of PC board for fan (A2P).
Connection defect of capacity setting adapter.
Setting mistake on site.
Troubleshooting

Is
the type of PC NO
board for fan (A2P) correct? Replace it with correct PC board
for fan (A2P).
YES
Was indoor
NO PC board (A1P) replaced
with supplementary PC
board?
YES
Was
correct capacity
setting adaptor installed NO
when replacing it with Install correct capacity setting
supplementary PC adapter.
board?
YES
After establishing transmission for
indoor and outdoor, diagnose the
operation again.
158 Troubleshooting
3.14 “C9 ” Indoor Unit: Malfunction of Thermistor (R1T) for

Suction Air
Remote Control C9
Display
Applicable AII indoor unit models

Models
Method of Malfunction detection is carried out by temperature detected by suction air temperature
Malfunction thermistor.
Detection
Malfunction When the suction air temperature thermistor becomes disconnected or shorted while the unit is
Decision running.
Conditions
Supposed Defect of indoor unit thermistor (R1T) for air inlet

Troubleshooting
Connector is NO
connected to X13A of Connect the thermistor and turn
the indoor unit PC
board. on again.
YES
Resistance
is normal when
measured after
PC board.
(7.2kΩ~112kΩ)
YES
(V2786)
Troubleshooting 159
3.15 “CA ” Indoor Unit: Malfunction of Thermistor for

Discharge Air
Remote Control CA
Display

Models
Method of Malfunction detection is carried out by temperature detected by discharge air temperature
Detection
Malfunction When the discharge air temperature thermistor becomes disconnected or shorted while the unit
Decision is running.
Conditions
Supposed Defect of indoor unit thermistor for air outlet

Troubleshooting
Connector is NO
connected to the indoor Connect the thermistor and turn
unit PC board.
on again.
YES
Resistance
is normal when
measured after
from the indoor unit PC Replace the thermistor.
board.
(7.2kΩ~112kΩ)
YES
(V2786)
160 Troubleshooting
3.16 “CC” Indoor Unit: Malfunction of Humidity Sensor System

Remote Control CC
Display
Applicable FXFQ
Models
Method of Even if a malfunction occurs, operation still continues.

Malfunction Malfunction is detected according to the moisture (output voltage) detected by the moisture
Detection sensor.
Malfunction When the moisture sensor is disconnected or short-circuited

Decision
Conditions
Supposed Faulty sensor

Causes Disconnection
Troubleshooting
Remove the humidity sensor

from the indoor PC board and
insert it again.
YES
Does it function normally? It is normal.
(Poor connector contact)
NO
Delete the malfunction code

record from the remote
control. (*1)
Is "CC"
displayed on the YES
remote control? (*2) Replace the humidity sensor
PC board ASS'Y (A2P).
*3
NO
It is believed that external factors

(noise or else) other than failure
caused the malfunction.
*1: To delete the record, the ON/OFF button of the remote control must be pushed and held
for 5 seconds in the check mode.
*2: To display the code, the Inspection/Test Operation button of the remote control must be
pushed and held in the normal mode.
*3: If "CC" is displayed even after replacing the humidity sensor PC board ASS'Y (A2P) and
taking the steps *1 and 2, replace the indoor PC board ASS'Y (A1P).
Troubleshooting 161
3.17 “CJ ” Indoor Unit: Malfunction of Thermostat Sensor in

Remote Control
Remote Control CJ
Display

Models
Method of Malfunction detection is carried out by temperature detected by remote control air temperature
Malfunction thermistor. (Note1)
Detection
Malfunction When the remote control air temperature thermistor becomes disconnected or shorted while the
Decision unit is running.
Conditions
Supposed Defect of remote control thermistor

Causes Defect of remote control PC board
Troubleshooting
Turn power supply OFF, then

power ON again.
Is "CJ" displayed YES

on the remote control? Replace remote control.
NO
External factor other than
equipment malfunction.
(for example, noise etc.)
(V2787)
Note: In case of remote control thermistor malfunction, unit is still operable by suction air thermistor on
indoor unit.
162 Troubleshooting
3.18 “E1 ” Outdoor Unit: PC Board Defect

Remote Control E1
Display
Applicable RXYSQ4~6PA
Models
Method of Check data from E²PROM

Malfunction
Detection
Malfunction When data could not be correctly received from the E²PROM
Decision E²PROM : Type of nonvolatile memory. Maintains memory contents even when the power
Conditions supply is turned off.
Supposed Defect of outdoor unit PC board (A1P)

Causes
Troubleshooting
Turn off the power once and

turn on again.
YES
Return to normal? External factor other than
malfunction (for example,
noise etc.).
NO
Replace the outdoor unit
main PC Board (A1P).
(V3064)
Troubleshooting 163
3.19 “E3 ” Outdoor Unit: Actuation of High Pressure Switch

Remote Control E3
Display
Models
Method of Abnormality is detected when the contact of the high pressure protection switch opens.
Malfunction
Detection
Malfunction Error is generated when the HPS activation count reaches the number specific to the operation
Decision mode.
Conditions (Reference) Operating pressure of high pressure switch
Operating pressure: 4.0MPa
Reset pressure: 3.0MPa
Supposed Actuation of outdoor unit high pressure switch

Causes Defect of High pressure switch
Defect of outdoor unit PC board (A1P)
Instantaneous power failure
Faulty high pressure sensor
164 Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting
Check for the points shown below.

1 Is the stop valve open?
2 Is the HPS connector properly connected to the
main PC board?
3 Does the high pressure switch have continuity?
Are the three NO

points above OK? Rectify defective points, if any.
YES
· Mount a pressure gauge on the high-pressure service port.
· Connect the Service Checker.
· Reset the operation using the remote control,
and then restart the operation.
Is
Does the stop YES the HPS NO
due to malfunction (E3) operating value normal Replace the HPS.
recur? (i.e., 4.0MPa)?
NO YES
Are the
characteristics of the high NO
Replace the high pressure sensor.
pressure sensor normal?
(See *1.)
YES
Is
the pressure NO
detected with the PC board Replace the main PC board.
normal? (See *2.)
YES
· The high pressure sensor is normal, and the pressure detected with the PC board is also normal.
· The high pressure has really become high.
Refer to information on P.218, remove the causes by which the high

CHECK 1 pressure has become high.
*1: Make a comparison between the voltage of the pressure sensor (*4) and that read by the
pressure gauge.
(As to the voltage of the pressure sensor, make measurement of voltage at the connector,
and then convert it to pressure according to information on P.253.)
*2: Make a comparison between the high pressure value checked with the Service Checker
and the voltage of the pressure sensor (see *1).
*3: Make measurement of voltage of the pressure sensor.
+5V
Connector for high
(4) Red
High
(3) Black pressure
sensor
(2)
Micro controller
A/D input (1) White
Make measurement of DC voltage between these wires. (*4)
Troubleshooting 165
3.20 “E4 ” Outdoor Unit: Actuation of Low Pressure Sensor

Remote Control E4
Display
Models
Method of Abnormality is detected by the pressure value with the low pressure sensor.
Malfunction
Detection
Malfunction Error is generated when the low pressure is dropped under specific pressure.
Decision Operating pressure:0.07MPa
Conditions
Supposed Abnormal drop of low pressure (Lower than 0.07MPa)

Causes Defect of low pressure sensor
Stop valve is not opened.
166 Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting
NO
Is the stop valve open? Open the stop valve.
YES
1 Mount a pressure gauge on the low-pressure service port.

2 Connect the Service Checker.
3 Reset the operation using the remote control, and then
restart the operation.
Are the
characteristics of the NO
low pressure sensor Replace the low pressure sensor.
normal? (See *1.)
YES
Is the
pressure
detected with the PC NO
Replace the main PC board.
board normal?
(See *2.)
YES
· The low pressure sensor is normal, and the pressure
detected with the PC board is also normal.
· The low pressure has really become low.
CHECK 2 Refer to information on P.219, remove the causes by

which the low pressure has become low.
*1: Make a comparison between the voltage of the pressure sensor (*4) and that read by the
pressure gauge.
(As to the voltage of the pressure sensor, make measurement of voltage at the connector,
and then convert it to pressure according to information on P.253.)
*2: Make a comparison between the low pressure value checked with the Service Checker
and the voltage of the pressure sensor (see *1).
*3: Make measurement of voltage of the pressure sensor.
+5V
Connector for low pressure sensor
(Blue)
(4) Red
(3) Black Low

pressure
Micro controller
(2) White sensor
A/D input
(1)
Make measurement of DC voltage between these wires. (*4)
Troubleshooting 167
3.21 “E5 ” Inverter Compressor Motor Lock

Remote Control E5
Display
Models
Method of Inverter PC board takes the position signal from UVW line connected between the inverter and
Malfunction compressor, and the malfunction is detected when any abnormality is observed in the phase-
Detection current waveform.
Malfunction This malfunction will be output when the inverter compressor motor does not start up even in
Decision forced startup mode.
Conditions
Supposed Compressor lock

Causes High differential pressure (0.5MPa or more)
Incorrect UVW wiring
Faulty inverter PC board
Stop valve is left in closed.
Troubleshooting

Check the installation

conditions.
Is
the stop valve NO
open? Open the stop valve.
YES
Is the UVW wiring NO

normal? Connect correctly.
YES
Is high
differential pressure YES
starting? (0.5MPa or Remedy the cause.
more)
NO
Check and
see whether compressor YES
is short-circuited or Replace the compressor.
ground.
NO
Are inverter NO
output voltages the same Replace the inverter PC
for 3 phases? board Assy (A2P).
YES
Does low
or high pressure YES
vary even instantaneously
when restarting
compressor?
NO
Replace the compressor.
(V2793)
168 Troubleshooting
3.22 “E7” Malfunction of Outdoor Unit Fan Motor

Remote Control E7
Display
Models
Method of Malfunction of fan motor system is detected according to the fan speed detected by hall IC
Malfunction when the fan motor runs.
Detection
Malfunction When the fan runs with speed less than a specified one for 6 seconds or more when the fan
Decision motor running conditions are met
Conditions When malfunction is generated 4 times, the system shuts down.
Supposed Malfunction of fan motor

Causes The harness connector between fan motor and PC board is left in disconnected, or faulty
connector
Fan does not run due to foreign matters tangled
Clearing condition: Operate for 5 minutes (normal)
Open phase L1 or open phase N.
Troubleshooting

Has the voltage

between L1 and N on the NO
power supply terminal board X1M fallen Correct the power supply
within the range of 220 to voltage.
240V±10% (50
Hz)? If L1 and N phases are
YES open, replace the switch
box.
Connector of fan YES
motor is disconnected. Connect the connector.
NO
Is
there any obstacle YES
around the fan? Remove the obstacle.
NO
Can the Has either the
fan be turned fuse F4U on the control PC YES
smoothly with hand after NO board (A1P) or the fuse F1U on the If the F4U has blown out,
disconnect the connector inverter PC board (A2P) blown
of fan motor? replace the fuse.
out?
If the F1U has blown out,
replace the inverter PC
YES NO
board assy.
Check No. 3
Check on connector of fan
motor (Refer to information Replace the fan motor.
on P.220)
Are Has either the
the resistances NO fuse F4U on the control YES
between pins above PC board (A1P) or the fuse F1U on If the F4U has blown out,
judgment? the inverter PC board (A2P) replace the fuse.
blown out?
If the F1U has blown out,
YES replace the inverter PC
NO board assy.
Replace outdoor unit PC
board.
Troubleshooting 169
3.23 “E9 ” Outdoor Unit: Malfunction of Moving Part of

Electronic Expansion Valve (Y1E, Y3E)
Remote Control E9
Display
Models
Method of Check disconnection of connector

Malfunction Check continuity of expansion valve coil
Detection
Malfunction Error is generated under no common power supply when the power is on.
Decision
Conditions
Supposed Defect of moving part of electronic expansion valve

Causes Defect of outdoor unit PC board (A1P)
Defect of connecting cable
170 Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting
Turn power supply off, and

turn power supply on again.
YES
Return to normal? External factor other than
malfunction (for example, noise
NO etc.).
Electronic
expansion valve is
connected to X21A and NO
X22A of outdoor unit PC After connecting, turn the power
board off and then back on again.
(A1P).
YES
Normal
when coil check
(∗1) of the moving NO
part of the electronic Replace the moving part of the
expansion valve is electronic expansion valve.
checked.
YES
The
connecting cable is YES
short-circuited or Replace the connecting cable.
disconnected.
NO
Replace outdoor unit PC board
(A1P).
(V3067)
∗Make measurement of resistance between the

connector pins, and then make sure the resistance falls
in the range of 40 to 50Ω.
(Orange) 1
(Red) 2
Measuring points
(Yellow) 3 1-6
2-6
(Black) 4 3-6
4-6
5
(Gray) 6
(V3067)
Troubleshooting 171
3.24 “F3” Outdoor Unit: Abnormal Discharge Pipe

Temperature
Remote Control F3
Display
Models
Method of Abnormality is detected according to the temperature detected by the discharge pipe
Malfunction temperature sensor.
Detection
Malfunction When the discharge pipe temperature rises to an abnormally high level
Decision When the discharge pipe temperature rises suddenly
Conditions
Supposed Faulty discharge pipe temperature sensor

Causes Faulty connection of discharge pipe temperature sensor
Faulty outdoor unit PC board
Troubleshooting

Discharge
pipe temperature is YES
120°C or higher when the Refrigerant shortage, compression
unit stop by defect, etc. Defect of the refrigerant
malfunction. system.
NO
Pull out the discharge pipe

thermistor from the outdoor PC
board, and then make
measurement of resistance
using a multiple meter.
Are the
characteristics of
the discharge pipe NO
thermistor normal? Replace the discharge pipe
(3.5~400KΩ)∗ thermistor.
YES
(A1P).
(V3068)
∗ Refer to “Thermistor Resistance / Temperature Characteristics” table on P252.
172 Troubleshooting
3.25 “F6” Outdoor Unit: Refrigerant Overcharged

Remote Control F6
Display
Models
Method of Excessive charging of refrigerant is detected by using the heat exchanging deicer temperature
Malfunction during a check operation.
Detection
Malfunction When the amount of refrigerant, which is calculated by using the heat exchanging deicer
Decision temperature during a check run, exceeds the standard.
Conditions
Supposed Refrigerant overcharge

Causes Misalignment of the thermistor for heat exchanger
Defect of the thermistor for heat exchanger
Troubleshooting
Check the mounting condition

of the temperature sensors of
the heat exchanging deicer
thermistor in the piping.
Are the
above thermistor NO
installed on pipes Install thermistor correctly.
correctly?
YES
Remove the heat exchanging
deicer thermister from the
outdoor PC board and measure
resistance with a tester.
Is the
characteristic of NO
the above thermistor Replace thermistor.
normal?
YES Refrigerant overcharged.
(V2797)
Troubleshooting 173
3.26 “H9 ” Outdoor Unit: Malfunction of Thermistor (R1T) for

Outdoor Air
Remote Control H9
Display
Models
Method of Malfunction is detected from the temperature detected by the outdoor air thermistor.
Malfunction
Detection
Malfunction When the outside air temperature thermistor has short circuit or open circuit.
Decision
Conditions
Supposed Defect of thermistor (R1T) for outdoor air

Troubleshooting

Connector
is connected to X11A NO
of outdoor PC board Connect the connector and turn
(A1P). on again.
YES
Resistance
is normal when
measured after NO
disconnecting the thermistor Replace the thermistor (R1T).
(R1T) from the outdoor
unit PC board.
(3.5kΩ to
360kΩ)
YES
(A1P).
(V3070)
174 Troubleshooting
3.27 “J3 ” Outdoor Unit: Malfunction of Discharge Pipe

Thermistor (R2T)
Remote Control J3
Display
Models
Method of Malfunction is detected from the temperature detected by discharge pipe temperature
Detection
Malfunction When a short circuit or an open circuit in the discharge pipe temperature thermistor is detected.
Decision
Conditions
Supposed Defect of thermistor (R2T) for outdoor unit discharge pipe

Troubleshooting
Connector
is connected to
X12A of outdoor unit PC NO
board (A1P). Connect the thermistor and turn
on again.
YES
Resistance
is normal when
measured after
R2T from the outdoor unit PC Replace the thermistor (R2T).
board.
(5.0kΩ~640kΩ)
YES
(A1P).
(V3072)
Troubleshooting 175
3.28 “J5 ” Outdoor Unit: Malfunction of Thermistor (R3T, R5T)

for Suction Pipe 1, 2
Remote Control J5
Display
Models
Method of Malfunction is detected from the temperature detected by the thermistor for suction pipe 1, 2.
Malfunction
Detection
Malfunction When a short circuit or an open circuit in the thermistor for suction pipe 1, 2 are detected.
Decision
Conditions
Supposed Defect of thermistor (R3T, R5T) for outdoor unit suction pipe
Troubleshooting

Connector of
the thermistor for NO
suction pipe1, 2 is connected Connect the thermistor and turn
to X12A of outdoor unit on again.
PC board
(A1P).
YES
Resistance
is normal when
measured after
disconnecting the NO
thermistor (R3T, R5T) from Replace the thermistor (R3T, R5T).
the outdoor unit PC
board. (3.5kΩ
~360kΩ)
YES
(A1P).
(V3073)
176 Troubleshooting
3.29 “J6 ” Outdoor Unit: Malfunction of Thermistor (R6T)

Remote Control J6
Display
Models
Method of Malfunction is detected from the temperature detected by the heat exchanger thermistor.
Malfunction
Detection
Malfunction When a short circuit or an open circuit in the heat exchange thermistor is detected.
Decision
Conditions
Supposed Defect of thermistor (R6T) for outdoor unit heat exchanger

Troubleshooting
Connector
is connected to NO
X13A of outdoor unit PC Connect the thermistor and turn
board (A1P). on again.
YES
Resistance
is normal when
measured after NO
unit PC board.
(3.5kΩ~360kΩ)
YES
(A1P).
(V3074)
Troubleshooting 177

Outdoor Unit Liquid Pipe
Remote Control J7
Display
Models
Method of Malfunction is detected from the temperature detected by the liquid pipe thermistor.
Malfunction
Detection
Malfunction When a short circuit or an open circuit in the heat exchange thermistor is detected.
Decision
Conditions
Supposed Defect of thermistor (R7T) for outdoor unit liquid pipe

Troubleshooting
Connector
is connected to NO
X13A of outdoor unit PC Connect the thermistor and turn
board (A1P). on again.
YES
Resistance
is normal when
measured after NO
unit PC board.
(3.5kΩ~360kΩ)
YES
(A1P).
(V3074)
178 Troubleshooting
3.31 “J9 ” Outdoor Unit: Malfunction of Thermistor (R4T)

Remote Control J9
Display
Models
Method of Malfunction is detected according to the temperature detected by subcooling heat exchanger
Malfunction gas pipe thermistor.
Detection
Malfunction When the subcooling heat exchanger gas pipe thermistor is short circuited or open.
Decision
Conditions
Supposed Faulty subcooling heat exchanger gas pipe thermistor (R4T)

Causes Faulty outdoor unit PC board
Troubleshooting
Is the
connector for
subcooling heat
exchanger gas pipe NO
thermistor connected to Connect connector and operate
X12A of outdoor unit unit again.
PC board
(A1P)?
YES
Is the
resistance
measured after
removing the thermistor NO
(R4T) from outdoor unit PC Replace thermistor (R4T).
board normal?
(3.5 kΩ to 360 kΩ)
YES
(A1P).
(V3075)
Troubleshooting 179
3.32 “JA ” Outdoor Unit: Malfunction of High Pressure Sensor

Remote Control JA
Display
Models
Method of Malfunction is detected from the pressure detected by the high pressure sensor.
Malfunction
Detection
Malfunction When the high pressure sensor is short circuit or open circuit.
Decision
Conditions
Supposed Defect of high pressure sensor

Causes Connection of low pressure sensor with wrong connection.
Defect of outdoor unit PC board.
Troubleshooting
The high
pressure sensor is
connected to X17A of NO
Connect the high pressure sensor
outdoor unit PC board and turn on again.
(A1P).
YES
The
relationship
between the ∗1
VH and high pressure
is normal (see ∗2) when YES
voltage is measured between Replace outdoor unit PC board
X17A pins (1) and (3) of (A1P).
outdoor unit PC board
(A1P) (see ∗1).
NO
Replace the high pressure sensor.
(V2806)
∗1: Voltage measurement point
Outside unit PC board A2P
+5V
X17A
High pressure sensor
4 Red
GND 3 Black
Microcomputer 1 White
A/D input
*2 Measure DC voltage here.

(V2807)
∗2: Refer to “Pressure Sensor”, pressure / voltage characteristics table on P253.
180 Troubleshooting
3.33 “JC ” Outdoor Unit: Malfunction of Low Pressure Sensor

Remote Control JC
Display
Models
Method of Malfunction is detected from pressure detected by low pressure sensor.

Malfunction
Detection
Malfunction When the low pressure sensor is short circuit or open circuit.
Decision
Conditions
Supposed Defect of low pressure sensor

Causes Connection of high pressure sensor with wrong connection.
Defect of outdoor unit PC board.
Troubleshooting
The low
pressure sensor is NO
connected to X18A (blue) of Connect low pressure sensor
outdoor unit PC board
(A1P). property and restart system.
YES
The
relationship
between the ∗1VL
and low pressure is
normal (see ∗2) when voltage YES
is measured between X18A Replace outdoor unit PC board
pins (2) and (3) of outdoor (A1P).
unit PC board (A1P)
(see ∗1).
NO
Replace the low pressure sensor.
(V2808)

+5V
X18A
Low pressure sensor
4 Red
GND 3 Black
A/D input
1
*2 Measure voltage here. (V2809)
∗2: Refer to “Pressure Sensor”, pressure/voltage characteristics table on P253.
Troubleshooting 181
3.34 “L1” Outdoor Unit: Malfunction of PC Board

Remote Control L1
Display
Models
Method of Detect malfunctions by current value during waveform output before compressor startup.
Malfunction Detect malfunctions by current sensor value during synchronized operation at the time of
Detection startup.
Malfunction In case of overcurrent (OCP) during waveform output

Decision When the current sensor malfunctions during synchronized operation
Conditions In case of IGBT malfunction
Supposed Faulty outdoor PC board (A1P)

Causes • IPM failure
• Current sensor failure
• Failure of IGBT or drive circuit
Troubleshooting

Turn OFF the power

supply once and then turn
it ON again.
Does it return YES

normally? It is believed that
external factors (noise,
etc.) other than failure
caused the malfunction.
NO
Replace the outdoor PC

board (A1P).
(PC board equipped
with a resin case)
182 Troubleshooting
3.35 “L4 ” Outdoor Unit: Malfunction of Inverter Radiating Fin

Temperature Rise
Remote Control L4
Display
Models
Method of Fin temperature is detected by the thermistor of the radiation fin.

Malfunction
Detection
Malfunction When the temperature of the inverter radiation fin increases above 83°C.
Decision
Conditions
Supposed Actuation of fin thermal (Actuates above 83°C)

Causes Defect of inverter PC board (A2P)
Defect of fin thermistor
Troubleshooting
The radiator
fin temperature is YES
supposed to have risen to Faulty heat radiation of power unit
84°C or more. • Air suction opening blocked
• Dirty radiator fin
• High outdoor temperature
NO
Is the
connector X111A of the fin NO
thermistor properly connected to Properly connect.
the outdoor PC board?
YES
Turn ON the power supply,
and then press the remote
control check button once.
Is the
malfunction code "P4" YES
displayed on the remote To "P4" troubleshooting
control?
NO
Does the
malfunction code "L4" YES
recur when the unit starts Replace the inverter PC board
operation? assy (A2P) as well.
NO
Continue operation.
Troubleshooting 183
3.36 “L5 ” Outdoor Unit: Inverter Compressor Abnormal

Remote Control L5
Display
Models
Method of Malfunction is detected from current flowing in the power transistor.

Malfunction
Detection
Malfunction When an excessive current flows in the power transistor.

Decision (Instantaneous overcurrent also causes activation.)
Conditions
Supposed Defect of compressor coil (disconnected, defective insulation)

Causes Compressor start-up malfunction (mechanical lock)
Defect of inverter PC board (A2P)
Troubleshooting
Compressor inspection
The
compressor's coil is YES
disconnected or the Replace the compressor.
insulation is
defective.
NO
Disconnect the connection
between the compressor and
inverter. Make the power
transistor check mode setting
ON by service mode.
Inverter
output voltage
check Inverter output
voltage is not balanced. YES
(Normal if within ±5V Must Replace the inverter unit (A2P).
be measured when
frequency is
stable.
NO
There is instantenious YES

Correct power supply.
power drop.
NO
Inspect according to the diagnosis
procedure for odd noises, vibration
and operating status of the
compressor.
(V2812)
Higher voltage than actual is displayed when the inverter output voltage is checked by tester.
184 Troubleshooting
3.37 “L8” Outdoor Unit: Inverter Current Abnormal

Remote Control L8
Display
Models
Method of Malfunction is detected by current flowing in the power transistor.

Malfunction
Detection
Malfunction When overload in the compressor is detected.

Decision
Conditions
Supposed Compressor overload

Causes Compressor coil disconnected
Troubleshooting
Output current check
The
secondary current
of the inverter is higher YES
than 13.1A, 260 sec. for Compressor overload
each phase. Inspection of the compressor and
refrigerant system is required.
NO
Compressor
inspection The YES
compressor's coil is Replace the compressor.
disconnected.
NO
Disconnect the the connection
transistor check mode setting
ON by service mode.
Inverter
output voltage
voltage is not balanced NO
(Normal if within ±5V). Must Replace the inverter PC board
be measured when assy (A2P).
frequency is stable.
YES
After turning on NO
again, "L8" blinks again. Reset and restart.
YES
compressor.
(V3184)
Troubleshooting 185
3.38 “L9 ” Outdoor Unit: Inverter Start up Error

Remote Control L9
Display
Models
Method of Malfunction is detected from current flowing in the power transistor.

Malfunction
Detection
Malfunction When overload in the compressor is detected during startup

Decision
Conditions
Supposed Defect of compressor

Causes Pressure differential start
Troubleshooting
The
difference between
high and low pressure NO
when starting is above Unsatisfactory pressure
0.2MPa. equalization
Check refrigerant system.
YES
Disconnect the connection
transistor check mode ON by
service mode.
Inverter
output voltage
voltage is not balanced. NO
(Normal if within ±5V) Must Replace the inverter PC board
be measured when assy (A2P).
frequency is
stable.
YES
After turning on NO
again, "L9" blinks Reset and restart.
again.
YES
(V2814)
186 Troubleshooting
3.39 “LC ” Outdoor Unit: Malfunction of Transmission between

Inverter and Control PC Board
Remote Control LC
Display
Models
Method of Check the communication state between inverter PC board and control PC board by micro-
Malfunction computer.
Detection
Malfunction When the correct communication is not conducted in certain period.

Decision
Conditions
Supposed Malfunction of connection between the inverter microcomputer and outdoor control
Causes microcomputer
External factor (Noise etc.)
Troubleshooting
Wa Are
s the inverter the inverter PC board
PC board or the control YES and the control PC board used in NO
Correct the combination following
PC board replaced? combination of types listed in Table 1, and then restart
Table 1? operation.
NO YES
Are the
connectors of
the inverter PC board NO
and the control PC board Connect a connecting wire, and
securely then restart operation.
connected?
YES
Are there
any broken wires
in the connectors of the YES
inverter PC board and the Repair the broken wires, and then
control PC board? restart operation.
NO
Replace the inverter PC board
(A2P) or the control PC board
(A1P).
Table 1: Combination of PC boards

Type of control Type of inverter
PC board PC board
RXYSQ4PA7Y1B EC0640-1 PC0625-1
RXYSQ5PA7Y1B
RXYSQ6PA7Y1B
Troubleshooting 187
3.40 “P1 ” Outdoor Unit: High Voltage of Capacitor in Main

Inverter Circuit
Remote Control P1
Display
Models
Method of Malfunction is detected according to the voltage waveform of main circuit capacitor built in the
Malfunction inverter.
Detection
Malfunction When the aforementioned voltage waveform becomes identical with the waveform of the power
Decision supply open phase.
Conditions
Supposed Defect of main circuit capacitor

Causes Improper main circuit wiring
Imbalance of phase-to-phase voltages
Open phase
Troubleshooting
Make measurement of power

supply voltages between L1 and
L2, L1 and L3, and L2 and L3.
Have the
power supply voltages NO
of three phases fallen within the Correct the power supply voltages.
range of rated voltage
±10%?
YES
Has the
imbalance of NO
phase-to-phase voltages Correct the power supply voltages.
fallen within
±10%?
YES
assy (A2P).
188 Troubleshooting
3.41 “U0 ” Low Pressure Drop Due to Refrigerant Shortage or

Electronic Expansion Valve Failure
Remote Control U0
Display
Models
Method of Short of gas malfunction is detected by discharge pipe temperature thermistor and low pressure
Malfunction saturation temperature.
Detection
Malfunction Microcomputer judge and detect if the system is short of refrigerant.

Decision HMalfunction is not decided while the unit operation is continued.
Conditions
Supposed Out of gas or refrigerant system clogging (incorrect piping)

Causes Defect of pressure sensor
Defect of thermistor R3T
Troubleshooting 189
Troubleshooting

YES Low pressure is YES

Cooling 0.25 MPa or less. Out of gas, closing of stop
valve or refrigerant system is
clogged. Requires check of
NO NO refrigerant system.
The
voltage of
X18A pins (2) and
(3) on main outdoor unit YES
PC board (A1P) is 1.0 VDC Replace main outdoor unit
or less. (Low pressure PC board (A1P).
sensor output
voltage) ∗2
The NO
suction pipe1 Replace low pressure sensor.
temp. minus low pressure YES
saturation temp. is 20 Out of gas or refrigerant
°C or higher. system is clogged. Requires
check of refrigerant system.
NO
Resistance
is normal when
measured with the
thermistor (R3T) for suction NO
pipe1 disconnected from Replace the thermistor.
the outdoor unit PC
board. ∗1
YES
Is
the low pressure NO
sensor correct? Replace the low pressure
sensor.
YES
Replace the outdoor unit PC
board (A1P).
(V2819)

+5V
X18A
Low pressure sensor
4 Red
GND 3 Black
A/D input
1
*2 Measure voltage here. (V2809)
∗1: Refer to “Thermistor Resistance / Temperature Characteristics” table on P251.

∗2: Refer to “Pressure Sensor, Pressure / Voltage Characteristics” table on P253.
190 Troubleshooting
3.42 “U2 ” Power Supply Insufficient or Instantaneous Failure

Remote Control U2
Display
Models
Method of Detection of voltage of main circuit capacitor built in the inverter and power supply voltage.
Malfunction
Detection
Malfunction When the abnormal voltage of main circuit capacitor built in the inverter and abnormal power
Decision supply voltage are detected.
Conditions
Supposed Power supply insufficient

Causes Instantaneous power failure
Defect of outdoor unit fan motor
Defect of outdoor inverter PC board (A2P)
Troubleshooting 191
Troubleshooting
Have the
power supply
voltages between L1 and L2,
L2 and L3, and L1 and L3 fallen within NO
the range of 380 to 415V±10% (50 Hz) and Correct the power supply
between L and N within the range voltages.
of 220 to 240V±10% If L2 or Phase N is open,
(50 Hz)? replace the switch box.
YES
Check the inverter power

transistor. 1
Is the power YES

transistor faulty? Replace the inverter PC board
assy (A2P).
Check for the PC board
conditions.
NO In case of significant failure,
the PC board may have got
faulty due to faulty
compressor. Consequently,
even if the PC board is
replaced, it may get faulty
again. To avoid that, recheck
the compressor for
grounding and for any
broken wires. Furthermore,
even after replacing the PC
board, carry out inspections
Check No.3 on the compressor.
NO
Is the resistance above Replace the fan motor
standard value?
YES
When the compressor is running,

measure the voltage between +
and - of electrolytic capacitor
(C+, C-).
Is the
measured voltage 220 YES Monitor the voltage
VDC or more? (Instantaneous voltage drop)
NO
(A1P).
(S2605)
∗1: Inverter’s Power Transistors Check : Refer to information on P.254~256.

∗ Check No.3 : Refer to information on P.219.
192 Troubleshooting
3.43 “U3 ” Check Operation not Executed

Remote Control U3
Display
Models
Method of Check operation is executed or not

Malfunction
Detection
Malfunction Malfunction is decided when the unit starts operation without check operation.
Decision
Conditions
Supposed Check operation is not executed.

Causes
Troubleshooting

Has the
check operation NO
performed on Outdoor unit Press the BS4 on PC board on the
PC board? master outdoor unit for 5 seconds
or more to execute check
YES operation.
Replace the main PC board on the

outdoor unit.
(V3052)
Troubleshooting 193
3.44 “U4 ” Malfunction of Transmission between Indoor Units

and Outdoor Units
Remote Control U4
Display

Models RXYSQ4~6PA
Method of Microcomputer checks if transmission between indoor and outdoor units is normal.
Malfunction
Detection
Malfunction When transmission is not carried out normally for a certain amount of time
Decision
Conditions
Supposed Indoor to outdoor, outdoor to outdoor transmission wiring F1, F2 disconnection, short circuit
Causes or wrong wiring
Outdoor unit power supply is OFF
System address doesn’t match
Defect of outdoor unit PC board
194 Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting

Has
the indoor
or outdoor unit
PC board been
replaced, or has the indoor - YES
outdoor or outdoor - outdoor Push and hold the RESET
unit transmission button on the master outdoor
wiring been unit PC Board for 5 seconds.
modified? ∗ The unit will not operate
for up to 12 minutes.
NO
All Is
indoor unit indoor -
remote controllers NO outdoor and outdoor - YES
of the same refrigerant outdoor unit transmission Replace the indoor unit PC
system display wiring normal? board.
"U4."
NO Fix the indoor/outdoor unit
YES
transmission wiring.
Reset the power supply.
Are there
Outdoor unit any broken wires in
PC board microcomputer NO the connectors of the inverter NO
monitor (HAP) blinks. PC board (A1P) and the Repair the broken wires, and
control PC board then restart operation.
(A2P)?
YES
YES
The
voltage between
terminals L3 and N of the NO
outdoor unit PC board is Supply 220~240 V.
220~240 V.
YES
NO The fuse F3U on YES

the outdoor unit's PC board is Replace the fuse.
burnt.
Has
either the fuse
F4U on the outdoor YES Check No. 3 ∗
unit PC board (A1P) or the Check for the fan motor
fuse F1U on the inverter connector.
PC board (A2P)
blown out?
Is
resistance NO Replace the fuse F4U and
NO between pins in excess of
judgment criteria? the inverter PC board (A2P).
NO Operation YES
ready lamp (H2P) is Replace the inverter PC
board.
blinking. Replace the fuse F4U.
YES Replace outdoor unit PC
board (A1P).
Lamp does not YES
go off for 12 minutes or Push and hold the RESET
more. button on the outdoor unit PC
NO board for 5 seconds.
Is
indoor -
outdoorand outdoor - NO
outdoor unit transmission Fix the indoor/outdoor unit
wiring normal? transmission wiring.
YES
Replace the outdoor unit PC
board (A1P).
(V3187)
∗ Check No.3 : Refer to information on P.219.
Troubleshooting 195
3.45 “U5 ” Malfunction of Transmission between Remote

Control and Indoor Unit
Remote Control U5
Display

Models
Method of In case of controlling with 2-remote control, check the system using microcomputer is signal
Malfunction transmission between indoor unit and remote control (main and sub) is normal.
Detection
Malfunction Normal transmission does not continue for specified period.

Decision
Conditions
Supposed Malfunction of indoor unit remote control transmission

Causes Connection of two main remote controls (when using 2 remote controls)
Defect of remote control PC board
Malfunction of transmission caused by noise
Troubleshooting
Using 2-remote YES SS1 of both YES

controls control. remote controls is set to Set one remote control to
"MAIN." "SUB"; turn the power supply
NO off once and then back on.
NO
All Operation
indoor PC board NO returns to normal NO
microcomputer monitors when the power is turned Replace indoor unit PC
blink. off momentarily. board.
YES YES
There is possibility of
malfunction caused by noise.
Check the surrounding area
Multi-core and turn on again.
cableis used for the YES
indoor unit remote control Switch to double-core
transmission wiring. independent cable.
replacement
NO
Defect of remote control PC
board or indoor unit PC board.
Replace whichever is
defective.
(V2823)
196 Troubleshooting
3.46 “U8 ” Malfunction of Transmission between Main and Sub

Remote Controls
Remote Control U8
Display

Models
Method of In case of controlling with 2-remote control, check the system using microcomputer if signal
Malfunction transmission between indoor unit and remote control (main and sub) is normal.
Detection
Malfunction Normal transmission does not continue for specified period.

Decision
Conditions
Supposed Malfunction of transmission between main and sub remote control

Causes Connection between sub remote controls
Defect of remote control PC board
Troubleshooting

Using SS1 of remote NO

2-remote controls control. NO control PC boards is set to Set SS1 to "MAIN"; the
"MAIN." power supply off once and
then back on.
YES YES
SS1 of both NO
remote controls is set to Turn the power off and then
"SUB." back on. If a malfunction
occurs, replace the remote
control PC board.
YES
Set one remote control to
"MAIN"; the power supply off
once and then back on.
(V2825)
Troubleshooting 197
3.47 “U9 ” Malfunction of Transmission between Indoor and

Outdoor Units in the Same System
Remote Control U9
Display

Models
Method of
Malfunction
Detection
Malfunction
Decision
Conditions
Supposed Malfunction of transmission within or outside of other system

Causes Malfunction of electronic expansion valve in indoor unit of other system
Defect of PC board of indoor unit in other system
Improper connection of transmission wiring between indoor and outdoor unit
198 Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting
"U9" has been YES

displayed for 2 minutes or Re-diagnose by display after
more. passage of 2 minutes or more.
NO
Turn on all indoor units.
The "UA"
display blinks on
the remote controls of YES
other units within the same Refer to failure diagnosis for "UA"
refrigerant system. malfunction code.
NO
The "A1"
display blinks on
other units within the same Refer to failure diagnosis for "A1"
NO
The
"A9" display
blinks on the remote YES
controls of other units within Refer to failure diagnosis for "A9"
the same refrigerant malfunction code.
system.
NO
The "U4"
display blinks on
other units within the same Refer to failure diagnosis for "U4"
NO
Refer to failure diagnosis for "U5"
malfunction code.
(V2826)
Troubleshooting 199
3.48 “UA ” Excessive Number of Indoor Units

Remote Control UA
Display

Models
Method of
Malfunction
Detection
Malfunction
Decision
Conditions
Supposed Excess of connected indoor units

Mismatching of the refrigerant type of indoor and outdoor unit.
Setting of outdoor PC board was not conducted after replacing to spare parts PC board.
Troubleshooting
Is the
outdoor PC board YES
replaced to spare parts PC The outdoor PC board replaced is
board? wrong, check PC board type.
NO
The
total of indoor
units displaying "UA"
and indoor units connected NO
to the same refrigerant system There are too many indoor units
is within connectable within the same refrigerant
number of unit∗ system.
YES
Push and hold the RESET
button on the outdoor unit
PC board for 5 seconds.
NO
Does a malfunction occur? Normal
YES
Does the
refrigerant type of indoor NO
Matches the refrigerant type of
and outdoor unit
match? indoor and outdoor unit.
YES
(A1P).
(V3169)
∗ The number of indoor units that can be connected to a single outdoor unit system depends on
the type of outdoor unit.
200 Troubleshooting
3.49 “UC ” Address Duplication of Central Remote Control

Remote Control UC
Display

Models
Method of
Malfunction
Detection
Malfunction
Decision
Conditions
Supposed Address duplication of centralized remote control

Troubleshooting

Optional
controls for
centralized control are YES
Address duplication of central
connected to the remote control
indoor unit. The setting must be changed so
that the central remote control
address is not duplicated.
NO
Replace indoor unit PC board.
(V2828)
Troubleshooting 201
3.50 “UE ” Malfunction of Transmission between Central

Remote Control and Indoor Unit
Remote Control UE
Display

Models Centralized control
Method of Microcomputer checks if transmission between indoor unit and centralized remote control is
Malfunction normal.
Detection
Decision
Conditions
Supposed Malfunction of transmission between optional controls for centralized control and indoor unit
Causes Connector for setting master controller is disconnected.
Failure of PC board for centralized remote control
Troubleshooting
Has an
indoor unit once
connected been remove or its
YES
Reset power supply
address changed? simultaneously for all optional
controls for centralized control.
NO
Is
the power
supply turned on for NO
indoor units displaying Turn indoor unit's power
malfunction? supply.
YES
Is
transmission wiring NO
disconnected or wired Fix the wiring correctly.
incorrectly?
YES
Is Is
transmission with the group No.
NO of malfunctioning indoor NO
all indoor units Set the group No. correctly.
malfunctioning? units set?
YES YES
Replace indoor unit PC
board.
Is the
transmission
wiring with the master NO
controller disconnected or Fix the wiring correctly.
wired incorrectly?
YES
Is
the master
controller's NO
connector for setting Connect the connector
master controller correctly.
disconnected?
YES
Replace the central PC
board.
(V2829)
202 Troubleshooting
3.51 “UF ” System is not Set yet

Remote Control UF
Display
Applicable All models of indoor units

Models RXYSQ4~6PA
Method of On check operation, the number of indoor units in terms of transmission is not corresponding to
Malfunction that of indoor units that have made changes in temperature.
Detection
Malfunction The malfunction is determined as soon as the abnormality aforementioned is detected through
Decision checking the system for any erroneous connection of units on the check operation.
Conditions
Supposed Improper connection of transmission wiring between indoor-outdoor units and outdoor-
Causes outdoor units
Failure to execute check operation
Stop valve is left in closed
Troubleshooting

Are
the stop valves NO
openned? Open stop valve.
YES
Is
Is indoor
the check NO -outdoor and YES
operation carried out? outdoor-outdoor unit Replace indoor unit PC board.
transmission wiring
normal?
YES
Is NO
indoor -
outdoor and outdoor NO
- outdoor unit transmission After fixing incorrect wiring,
wiring normal? push and hold the RESET
button on the master outdoor
unit PC board for 5 seconds.
YES ∗ The unit will not run for up to
12 minutes.
Wiring check operation may

not have been carried out
successfully.
(V2830)
Note: Wiring check operation may not be successful if carried out after the outdoor unit has been off
for more than 12 hours, or if it is not carried out after running all connected indoor units in the
fan mode for at least an hour.
Troubleshooting 203
3.52 “UH ” Malfunction of System, Refrigerant System Address

Undefined
Remote Control UH
Display

Models RXYSQ4~6PA
Method of
Malfunction
Detection
Malfunction
Decision
Conditions
Supposed Improper connection of transmission wiring between outdoor unit and outdoor unit outside
Causes control adapter
Troubleshooting

Is Does a
electricity malfunction
being introduce for occur even after
the first time after YES 12 minutes elapses NO
installationor after an indoor from the time when electricity Normal
or outdoor unit PC is introduced to indoor
board has been and outdoor
replaced? units?
NO YES
Is
indoor -
outdoor and NO
outdoor - outdoor unit After fixing incorrect wiring,
transmission wiring push and hold the RESET
normal? button on the master outdoor
unit PC board for 5 seconds.
YES ∗ The unit will not run for up to
12 minutes.
After fixing incorrect wiring,
push and hold the RESET
button on the outdoor unit
PC board for 5 seconds
Does a NO
malfunction occur? Normal
YES
Does a
"UH" malfunction NO
occur for all indoor units Replace indoor unit PC board.
in the system?
YES
Replace outdoor unit PC
board (A1P).
(V2831)
204 Troubleshooting
SiENBE34-802 Troubleshooting by Indication on the Centralized Remote Control
4. Troubleshooting by Indication on the Centralized

Remote Control
4.1 “UE ” Malfunction of Transmission between Centralized
Remote Control and Indoor Unit
Remote Control UE
Display

Models Centralized Remote Control
Method of Microcomputer checks if transmission between indoor unit and central remote control is normal.
Malfunction
Detection
Decision
Conditions
Supposed Malfunction of transmission between optional controllers for centralized control and indoor unit
Causes Connector for setting master controller is disconnected.
Failure of PC board for central remote control
Troubleshooting 205
Troubleshooting by Indication on the Centralized Remote Control SiENBE34-802
Troubleshooting
Has an
indoor unit once YES
connected been remove or its Reset power supply
address changed? simultaneously for all optional
controllers for centralized
NO control.
Is
the power
supply turned on for NO
indoor units displaying Turn indoor unit's power
malfunction? supply.
YES
Is
transmission
wiring disconnected or NO
Fix the wiring correctly.
wired incorrectly?
YES
Is Is
transmission the group No. NO
NO of malfunctioning indoor
with all indoor units Set the group No. correctly.
malfunctioning? units set?
YES YES
Is Replace indoor unit PC board.
the
transmission
wired incorrectly?
YES
Is
the master
controller's
connector for setting master NO
controller disconnected? Connect the connector
correctly.
YES
Replace the central PC board.
(V2832)
4.2 “M1” PC Board Defect

Remote Control M1
Display
Applicable Centralized remote control

Models
Method of
Malfunction
Detection
Malfunction
Decision
Conditions
Supposed Defect of central remote control PC board

Causes
Troubleshooting Replace the central remote control PC board.
206 Troubleshooting
4.3 “M8 ” Malfunction of Transmission between Optional

Controllers for Centralized Control
Remote Control M8
Display

Models
Method of
Malfunction
Detection
Malfunction
Decision
Conditions
Supposed Malfunction of transmission between optional controllers for centralized control

Causes Defect of PC board of optional controllers for centralized control
Troubleshooting
Has a
once
connected optional
controller for centralized YES
control been disconnected
Reset power supply simultaneously
or its address for all optional controllers for
changed? centralized control.
NO
Is
the power
supply turned on
for all optional controllers NO
for centralized control? Turn on power supply for all
optional controllers for centralized
control.
YES
Is
the reset
switch of all
optional controllers for NO
centralized control set to Set reset switch to "normal."
''normal?''
YES
Is
transmission
wiring disconnected or YES
Fix the wiring correctly.
wired incorrectly?
NO
The PC board of one of the
optional controllers for centralized
control is defective. Try turning
on/off using each optional
controllers for centralized control,
and replace the PC board of the
one that is unable to control the
indoor unit.
(V2833)
Troubleshooting 207
4.4 “MA ” Improper Combination of Optional Controllers for

Centralized Control
Remote Control MA
Display

Models
Method of
Malfunction
Detection
Malfunction
Decision
Conditions
Supposed Improper combination of optional controls for centralized control

Causes More than one master controller is connected
Defect of PC board of optional controller for centralized control
208 Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting

Is Cannot be used in
the wiring combination with a wiring
adapter for electrical YES adapter for electrical
appendices connected? appendices. Remove the
wiring adapter for electrical
appendices and reset the
NO power supply for all optional
control simultaneously.
Schedule timer and data

station cannot be used in
Is a combination. Disconnect
schedule timer YES Is a data station YES either the schedule timer or
connected? connected? data station and reset the
power supply for all optional
NO NO controllers for centralized
Is a Schedule timer and parallel

parallel interface YES interface cannot be used in
connected? combination. Disconnect
either the schedule timer or
NO parallel interface and reset
the power supply for all
optional controllers for
centralized control
simultaneously.
Is the
schedule timer's Disconnect the schedule
YES timer's individual / combined
individual/combined
connector connector and reset the
connected? power supply for all optional
NO
Are
there two or Arrange so that the
more optional connector for setting master
controllers for centralized YES control is connected to one
control connected with the controller for centralized
connector for setting control and reset the power
master supply for all optional
control? controllers for centralized
NO
Disconnect the connector for
setting master control from
Reset the power supply for the master controller,
all optional controllers for connect to another optional
centralized control controller for centralized
simultaneously. control and simultaneously
If the malfunction is still not cleared: reset all optional controllers
for centralized control again.
The controller connected by
the connector for setting
master control when the
malfunction is cleared is
defective and must be
replaced. (V2834)
Troubleshooting 209
4.5 “MC ” Address Duplication, Improper Setting

Remote Control MC
Display

Models
Method of
Malfunction
Detection
Malfunction
Decision
Conditions
Supposed Address duplication of centralized remote control

Causes
Troubleshooting
Are two or
more centralized remote YES
controls connected? Disconnect all centralized
remote controls except one
and reset the power supply of
NO the centralized remote control.
Reset power supply of the

centralized remote control.
(V2835)
210 Troubleshooting
SiENBE34-802 Troubleshooting by Indication on the Unified ON/OFF Controller
5. Troubleshooting by Indication on the Unified ON/

OFF Controller
5.1 Operation Lamp Blinks
Remote Control Operation lamp blinks
Display
Applicable All models of indoor units

Models Unified ON/OFF controller
Method of
Malfunction
Detection
Malfunction
Decision
Conditions
Supposed Malfunction of transmission between optional controller and indoor unit

Causes Connector for setting master controller is disconnected
Defect of unified ON/OFF controller
Malfunction of air conditioner
Troubleshooting 211
Troubleshooting by Indication on the Unified ON/OFF Controller SiENBE34-802
Troubleshooting

Is
a malfunction
code displayed on the YES
remote control? Diagnose the cause with the
air conditioner's failure
diagnosis manual.
NO
Has a once
connected indoor YES
unit been removed or its Reset power supply for all
address changed? optional controllers for
centralized control
simultaneously.
NO
Is the
power supply for
the indoor unit displaying NO
a malfunction turned on? Turn the power supply of the
indoor unit on.
YES
Is
transmission wiring YES
disconnected or wired Fix the wiring correctly.
incorrectly?
NO
Is Is
transmission the group No.
with all indoor units NO NO
of malfunctioning indoor Set the group No.
malfunctioning? units set? correctly.
YES YES
Is the Replace indoor unit PC board.

transmission
wired incorrectly?
YES
Is the
master controller's YES
connector for setting master
controller disconnected. Connect the connector
correctly.
NO
Replace the central PC board.
(V2841)
212 Troubleshooting

(Repeats Single Blink)
Remote Control “under host computer integrated control” (Repeats single blink)
Display
Applicable Unified ON/OFF controller

Models Central controller, Schedule timer
Method of
Malfunction
Detection
Malfunction
Decision
Conditions
Supposed Address duplication of central remote control

Causes Improper combination of optional controllers for centralized control
Connection of more than one master controller
Malfunction of transmission between optional controllers for centralized control
Defect of PC board of optional controllers for centralized control
Troubleshooting 213
Troubleshooting
Has a
once
connected optional
controller for centralized YES
control been disconnected Reset power supply
or its address simultaneously for all optional
changed? controllers for centralized
control.
NO
Is the
power supply
turned on for all NO
optional controllers for Turn on power supply for all
centralized optional controllers for
control? centralized control.
YES
Is the
reset switch of all
optional controllers for NO
centralized control set to Set reset switch to
"normal"? "normal."
YES
Is
transmission
wiring disconnected or YES
wired incorrectly? Fix the wiring correctly.
NO Is
Is the central
a central YES remote control or YES
remote control or schedule schedule timer displaying Refer to failure diagnosis for
timer connected? a malfunction? central remote control or
schedule timer.
NO
NO
Is the
setting of the
Are two or unified ON/OFF
more unified ON/OFF YES NO
controllers connected?
controller's switch for setting Correct the setting of the
each address unified ON / OFF controller's
duplicated? switch for setting each
NO address and reset the power
supply of the unified ON /
YES OFF controller.
A
(V2842)
214 Troubleshooting
Is
the wiring
adapter for electrical YES
appendices connected? Cannot be used in
combination with a wiring
adapter for electrical
NO appendices. Remove the
wiring adapter for electrical
appendices and reset the
Is a control simultaneously.
schedule timer YES Is a data station YES
connected? connected? Schedule timer and data
station cannot be used in
NO NO combination. Disconnect
either the schedule timer or
data station and reset the
Is a control simultaneously.
parallel interface YES
connected? Schedule timer and parallel
interface cannot be used in
combination. Disconnect
NO either the schedule timer or
parallel interface and reset the
Is the control simultaneously.
schedule timer's YES
individual/combined connector Disconnect the schedule
connected? timer's individual / combined
connector and reset the power
supply for all optional
NO controllers for centralized
Are
there two or
more optional
controllers for centralized YES
control connected with the Arrange so that the connector
connector for setting for setting master control is
master control? connected to one controller for
centralized control and reset
the power supply for all
NO optional controllers for
centralized control
Reset the power supply for simultaneously.
all optional controllers for
centralized control
simultaneously.
If the malfunction is still not cleared:

Disconnect the connector for
setting master control from
the master controller, connect
to another optional controller
for centralized control and
simultaneously reset all
optional controllers for
centralized control again. The
controller connected by the
connector for setting master
control when the malfunction
is cleared is defective and
must be replaced.
(V2843)
Troubleshooting 215

(Repeats Double Blink)
Remote Control “under host computer integrated control” (Repeats double blink)
Display
Applicable Unified ON/OFF controller

Models
Method of
Malfunction
Detection
Malfunction
Decision
Conditions
Supposed Central control address (group No.) is not set for indoor unit.
Causes Improper address setting
Improper wiring of transmission wiring
Troubleshooting
Is
the central
control address NO
(group No.) Set by remote control the central
set for the control address for all indoor units
indoor unit? connected to the central control
line.
YES
Is
the switch
for setting each address NO
Set the switch for setting each
set correctly? address correctly and
simultaneously reset the power
YES supply for all optional controllers
Is for centralized control.
the
transmission YES
wiring disconnected or Fix the wiring correctly.
wired incorrectly?
NO
Replace the PC board of the
unified ON/OFF controller.
(V2844)
216 Troubleshooting
[CHECK 1] Check for causes of rise in high pressure

Referring to the Fault Tree Analysis (FTA) shown below, probe the faulty points.
Stop valve closed ←Check to be sure the stop valve is open.

Local High pipe
pressure resistance Bent or crashed pipe ←Conduct visual checks for pipe conditions.
rise
Clogging of foreign ←Is there any temperature difference caused
particles before and after the filter or branch pipe.
[In cooling]
If the outdoor unit electronic Faulty outdoor Faulty valve coil ←Are the coil resistance and insulation normal?
expansion valve is throttled: unit electronic
(See *1.) expansion valve Faulty valve body
A temperature difference in excess of 10°C between
Rise in high the inlet and the outlet is deemed to be abnormal.
pressure Faulty high pressure sensor ←Are the electrical characteristics normal?
Faulty
control ←Is the pressure value checked with the Service Checker
Faulty control PCB
Faulty high corresponding to the measurement of the pressure sensor?
pressure
control Faulty indoor Faulty valve coil ←Are the coil resistance and insulation
unit electronic normal?
expansion valve Faulty valve body
Faulty high pressure sensor ←Are the electrical characteristics normal?

[In heating]
If the indoor unit electronic Faulty Faulty indoor unit ←In the connector properly connected?
expansion valve excessively control liquid pipe thermistor Are the thermistor resistance characteristics normal?
throttled:
←Is the pressure value checked with the Service
(See *2.) Faulty control PCB Checker corresponding to the measurement of the
pressure sensor?
[In cooling] ←Is the suction air temperature not more than 46°C?
High suction air Short circuit
temperature of ←Is the outdoor temperature not more than 46°C?
High suction outdoor unit High ambient temperature
air
temperature
of the High suction Short circuit ←Is the suction air temperature not more than 27°C?
condenser air temperature
of indoor unit High ambient temperature ←Is the indoor temperature not more than 27°C?
Faulty suction air thermistor of indoor unit ←Is the connector properly connected?
Are the thermistor resistance characteristics normal?
[In heating]
High suction air temperature of outdoor unit ←Is the outdoor temperature not more than 16°CWB?
Faulty outdoor temperature thermistor of outdoor unit ←Is the connector properly connected?
Degradation Dirty condenser ←Is the heat exchanger clogged? (In cooling)
in condensing
capacity
Mixing of non-condensable gas ←Is air or else mixed in the refrigerant system?
Faulty fan ←Can the fan motor be rotated with hands?

Decreased motor Are the motor coil resistance and
fan
Decreased insulation normal?
output Faulty control
fan airflow PC board ←If a spare PC board is mounted, is the
rate (Including
capacity setting) capacity setting properly made?
High air Dirty filter ←Is the air filter clogged?

passage
resistance
Obstacle ←Is there any obstacle in the air passage?
Excessive refrigerant charging ←Refer to P.173.

←Is the indoor unit too small compared to
Improper model selection [In heating] the large-sized outdoor unit?
*1: In cooling, it is normal if the outdoor unit electronic expansion valve (EV1) is fully open.
*2: In heating, the indoor unit electronic expansion valve is used for “subcooled degree control”.
(For details, refer to “Electronic Expansion Valve Control” on P.72.)
C: SDK04009
Troubleshooting 217
[CHECK 2] Check for causes of drop in low pressure

Referring to the Fault Tree Analysis (FTA) shown below, probe the faulty points.
[In cooling]
(See *1.) Faulty Faulty low pressure sensor ←Are the electrical characteristics normal?
Faulty low compressor ←Is the pressure value checked with the Service Checker
capacity Faulty control PCB
pressure corresponding to the measurement of the pressure sensor?
control control
Faulty low pressure sensor ←Are the electrical characteristics normal?
Faulty low
pressure
Faulty hot gas solenoid valve ←Are the coil resistance and insulation normal?
[In both cooling protection
and heating]
Faulty control PCB
(See *2.) corresponding to the measurement of the pressure sensor?
Abnormally low Faulty indoor
low-pressure [In cooling]
unit electronic Faulty valve coil ←Are the coil resistance and insulation normal?
(Low evaporating If the indoor unit expansion valve
temperature) electronic Faulty valve body
expansion valve is
throttled too much: Faulty gas pipe ←Check for the thermistor resistance and connection.
(See *3.) thermistor of indoor unit
Faulty
control
Faulty electronic Faulty liquid pipe thermistor ←Check for the thermistor resistance and connection.
expansion valve of indoor unit
Faulty control PCB
corresponding to the measurement of the pressure sensor?
Faulty outdoor Faulty valve coil ←Are the coil resistance and insulation
unit electronic normal?
expansion valve Faulty valve body
[In heating]
If the outdoor unit Faulty low pressure sensor ←Are the electrical characteristics normal?
electronic
expansion valve Faulty
Faulty suction pipe thermistor ←Check for the thermistor resistance and
excessively control
throttled: connection.
(See *4.) Faulty control PCB
[In cooling]
Low suction air Short circuit ←Is the suction air temperature not less than 14°C
temperature of
indoor unit Low ambient temperature ←Is the indoor temperature not less than 14°C
Low suction air ←Is the connector properly connected?

temperature of Faulty suction air thermistor of indoor unit
the evaporator
Low suction air temperature of outdoor unit ←Is the outdoor temperature not less than -15°C
←Is the connector properly connected?
Faulty outdoor temperature thermistor of outdoor unit Are the thermistor resistance characteristics normal?
[In heating]
Abnormal piping length ←Does the piping length fall in the permissible range?
High pipe ←Conduct visual checks for pipe conditions.
Bent or crashed pipe
resistance
Clogging of foreign particles ←Is there any temperature difference caused before
and after the filter or branch pipe?
Stop valve closed
¬Check to be sure the stop valve is open.
Less
circulation
quantity of Inadequate refrigerant quantity ←Refer to P.189.
refrigerant
Moisture choke ←Eliminate moisture by vacuum operation.
Dirty
evaporator ←Is the heat exchanger clogged?
Degradation
in condensing Faulty fan motor ←Can the fan motor be rotated with hands?
capacity Decreased Are the motor coil resistance and insulation normal?
fan output
Decreased Faulty control PC board ←If a spare PC board is mounted, is the
fan airflow (Including capacity setting) capacity setting properly made?
rate High air
passage Dirty filter ←Is the air filter clogged?
resistance
Obstacle ←Is there any obstacle in the air passage?
*1: For details of the compressor capacity control while in cooling, refer to “Compressor PI Control” on P.50.
*2: The “low pressure protection control” includes low pressure protection control and hot gas bypass control. For details, refer to P.61.
*3: In cooling, the indoor unit electronic expansion valve is used for “superheated degree control”. (For details, refer to P.72.)
*4: In heating, the outdoor unit electronic expansion valve (EV1) is used for “superheated degree control of outdoor unit heat exchanger”.
(For details, refer to P.51.)
C: SDK04009
218 Troubleshooting
[CHECK 3] Check for Fan Motor Connector

(1) Turn the power supply off.
(2) With the fan motor connector on motor side disconnected, measure the resistance between
each pin, then make sure that the resistance is more than the value mentioned in the
following table.
1 White
Measurement point Judgment
2 Orange 1-4 1MΩ or more
2-4 100kΩ or more
3 Brown
3-4 100Ω or more
GND 4-7 100kΩ or more
4 Blue
7 Red
Troubleshooting 219
220 Troubleshooting
SiENBE34-802
Part 8
Appendix
1. Piping Diagrams..................................................................................222
1.1 Outdoor Unit .........................................................................................222
1.2 Indoor Unit............................................................................................224
2. Wiring Diagrams..................................................................................227
2.1 Outdoor Unit .........................................................................................227
2.2 Field Wiring ..........................................................................................229
2.3 Indoor Unit............................................................................................231
3. Option List ...........................................................................................246
3.1 Option List of Controllers......................................................................246
3.2 Option List of Outdoor Unit...................................................................248
4. Example of Connection .......................................................................249
5. Thermistor Resistance / Temperature Characteristics........................251
6. Pressure Sensor .................................................................................253
7. Method of Replacing the Inverter’s Power Transistors Modules.........254
Appendix 221
222
1.1
Piping Diagrams
Electronic
expansion valve
Double pipe Electronic
Filter
Heat exchanger
Pressure
Outdoor Unit
regulating valve
Filter Service port

1. Piping Diagrams
Four way
valve
High pressure
Servic port sensor
Low pressure
sensor
Filter
Capillary
tube
Solenoid
valve Capillary
Filter tube
Filter
Compressor
Capillary Solenoid
tube valve
High pressure
switch
Accumulator
Stop valve (With service port on field piping side Ø7.9 mm flare connection)
Appendix
SiENBE34-802
Appendix
SiENBE34-802

Double pipe
Electronic
Subcooling heat Filter
exchanger
Heat exchanger
Filter Service port
Four way
valve

Low pressure sensor
sensor
Filter
Capillary
tube
Solenoid valve
Filter Capillary tube
Filter
Compressor
Capillary tube Solenoid valve
High pressure
switch
Accumulator
C : 3D052712
223
Piping Diagrams
Piping Diagrams SiENBE34-802
1.2 Indoor Unit

FXCQ, FXFQ, FXZQ, FXKQ, FXSQ, FXMQ, FXHQ, FXAQ, FXLQ, FXNQ
Gas piping connection port

Heat exchanger
(Flare connection : Ø15.9 or less
Attached piping : Above Ø 19.1)
(4)
Fan
(2)
(3)
Liquid piping connection port

(Flare connection)
(1)
Filter Electronic Filter
expansion valve
Code Name Code Main function

Used for gas superheated degree control while in
(1) Electronic expansion valve Y1E cooling operation or subcooled degree control while
in heating operation.
Suction air temperature
(2) R1T Used for thermostat control.
thermistor
(3) Liquid pipe R2T cooling operation or subcooled degree control while
in heating operation.
(4) Gas pipe R3T cooling operation.
(mm)
Capacity GAS Liquid
20 / 25 / 32 / 40 / 50 φ12.7 φ6.4
63 / 80 / 100 / 125 φ15.9 φ9.5
224 Appendix
SiENBE34-802 Piping Diagrams
FXDQ
Gas side
Liquid side
Electronic
expansion valve
Filter Filter
Fan
Indoor heat exchanger
4D043864H
Refrigerant pipe connection port diameters

(mm)
Model Gas Liquid
FXDQ20 / 25 / 32 / 40 / 50 φ12.7 φ6.4
FXDQ63 φ15.9 φ9.5
Appendix 225
Piping Diagrams SiENBE34-802
FXUQ + BEVQ
Indoor Unit
Indoor heat exchanger
Filter
Field piping Ø9.5 C1220T-0
To outdoor
Field piping Ø15.9 C1220T-0 unit
Indoor unit
4D037995F
Connection Unit
Electronic
Liquid piping expansion valve Liquid piping
connection port Filter Filter connection port
Gas piping Gas piping

connection port connection port
4D034127B
226 Appendix
2.1
Appendix
L1-RED L2-WHT L3-BLK N-BLU
A1P Printed circuit board (Main)
SiENBE34-802
A2P Printed circuit board (Inv)

BS1~5 Push button switch
(Mode, set, return, test, reset)
C1-C2-C3 Capacitor
Power supply DS1 Dip switch
E1HC Crankcase heater
3N ~ Note 4
380-415V F1,3,4U(A1P) Fuse(T6.3A 250V)
50Hz H1P~8P Pilot Lamp (service monitor orange)
[H2P] Prepare, Test --- Flickering
Malfunction detection - light up
HAP (A1P) Operation pilot lamp
Outdoor Unit
(service monitor green)

HAP (A2P) Operation lamp
(Service monitor green)
K1M (A1P) Magnetic contactor
2. Wiring Diagrams
K1R Magnetic relay (Y1S)

K4R Magnetic relay (E1HC)
K5R, K6R Magnetic relay
L1R Reactor
M1C Motor (Compressor)
M1F-M2F Motor (Fan)
PS Power supply
R1(A1P) Resistor
C/H Selector To IN/D unit To OUT/D unit
R1-R2 (A2P) Resistor
R1T Thermistor (Air)
R2T Thermistor (M1C discharge)
R3T Thermistor (Suction 1)
The position of Heat R4T Thermistor (Subcool)
compressor Air control El. Compo. Assy Front Arrow A R5T Thermistor (Suction 2)
terminal Cool Note 8 R6T Thermistor (Coil)
The entrance R7T Thermistor (Liquid 1)
of wire Fan Indoor Outdoor
(F1)(F2) R8T Thermistor (Liquid 2)
Cool/heat selector (F1)(F2)
R9T Thermistor (Power module)
S1NPH Pressure sensor (High)
S1NPL Pressure sensor (Low)
S1PH Pressure switch (High)
Notes: 1. This wiring diagram is applied to the outdoor unit. Z3C Noise filter V1R Power module
2. : Field wiring Z4C Noise filter V2R-V3R Diode module
3. : Terminal strip : Movable connector : Fixed connector Z1F Noise filter X1M Terminal strip
: Terminal : Protective earth (screw) : Noiseless earth (With surge absorber) X2M Terminal strip (Control) (C/H selctor)
4. When using the option adapter, refer to the installation manual Z2F Noise filter Y1E Electronic expansion valve (Main)
5. Refer to “operation caution label” (on back of front plate) C/H selector Y3E Electronic expansion valve (Sub cool)
How to use BS1~BS5 and DS1 - 2 switch. S1S Selector switch (Fan/Cool-Heat) Y1S Solenoid valve (4 way valve)
6. When operating, don’t short circuit for protection device.(S1PH) S2S Selector switch (Cool/Heat) Y2S Solenoid valve (Hot gas)
7. Colors BLU : Bleu BRN : Brown GRN : Green RED : Red Connector of option adapter Y3S Solenoid valve (U/L circuit)
WHT : White YLW : Yellow ORG : Orange X37A Connector Z1C Noise filter
8. When using the central control system, connect to outdoor-outdoor transmission to F1-F2. Note 4 (Option adapter power supply) Z2C Noise filter
Wiring Diagrams
227
228
Wiring Diagrams
Power supply Y2S Solenoid valve (Hot gas) L-RED N-BLU

Y3S Solenoid valve (U/L circuit) A1P Printed circuit board (Main)
~220-240V 50Hz
Z1C~8C Noise filter (Ferrite core) A2P Printed circuit board (Service)
Z1F~4F Noise filter A3P Printed circuit board (Noise filter)
C/H selector A4P Printed circuit board (C/H Selector)
S1S Selector switch (Fan/Cool-Heat) BS1~5 Push button switch

S2S Selector switch (Cool/Heat) (Mode, set, return, test, reset)
(Back) Connector of option adapter C1-4 Capacitor
(Front) X37A Connector DS1 Dip switch
El. Compo. Box Note 4 (Option adapter power supply) E1HC Crankcase heater
F1U,F4U Fuse(T6.3A/250V)
F6U Fuse(T5.0A/250V)
H1P~8P Pilot Lamp (service monitor orange)
Note 4
[H2P] Prepare, Test --- Flickering
Malfunction detection - light up
HAP Operation pilot lamp
(service monitor green)
K1M (A1P) Magnetic contactor
K4R Magnetic relay (E1HC)
K5R Magnetic relay
L1R Reactor
M1C Motor (Compressor)
M1F Motor (Fan)(Upper)
M2F Motor (Fan)(Lower)
PS Power supply
R1 Resistor
R2 Resistor
R2T Thermistor (M1C discharge)
R4T Thermistor (Coil)
Notes: C/H Selector R6T Thermistor (Subcool)
1. This wiring diagram is applied to the outdoor unit. R7T Thermistor (Liquid 1)
2. : Field wiring To IN/D unit To OUT/D unit R8T Thermistor (Liquid 2)
3. : Terminal strip : Movable connector FINTH Thermistor (Fin)
S1NPH Pressure sensor (High)
: Terminal : Fixed connector
The position of Heat S1NPL Pressure sensor (Low)
: Protective earth (screw) : Noiseless earth Air control
compressor S1PH Pressure switch (High)
4. When using the option adapter, refer to the installation manual Cool V1R Power module
terminal 5. Refer to “operation caution label” (on back of front plate) Note 8
V2R-V3R Diode module
The entrance How to use BS1~BS5 and DS1 - 2 switch. Fan Note 9
of wire V1T IGBT
6. When operating, don’t short circuit for protection device.(S1PH) Cool/heat selector Indoor Outdoor X1M Terminal strip (Power supply)
7. Colors BLU : Bleu BRN : Brown GRN : Green (F1)(F2) (F1)(F2) X2M Terminal strip (Control)
RED : Red WHT : White YLW : Yellow X1M Terminal strip (C/H selctor)(A4P)
ORG : Orange Y1E Electronic expansion valve (Main)
8. Refer to the installation manual, for connection wiring indoor-outdoor transmission F1-F2. Y3E Electronic expansion valve (Sub cool)
9. When using the central control system, connect to outdoor-outdoor transmission to F1-F2. Y1S Solenoid valve (4 way valve)
Appendix
SiENBE34-802
2.2
Appendix
SiENBE34-802
Power supply Notes 1. All wiring, components and materials to be procured on the site must be 6. Unit shall be grounded in compliance with the applicable local and national codes.
comply with the applicable local and national codes. 7. Wiring shown are general points-of-connection guides only and are not intended for or to include all details
2. Use copper conductors only. for a specific installation.
Main switch 3. As for details, see wiring diagram. 8. Be sure to install the switch and the fuse to the power line of each equipment.
4. Instal circuit breaker for safety. 9. Install the main switch that can interrupt all the power sources in an integrated manner because this system
5. All field wiring and components must be provided by licensed electrician. consists of the equipment utilizing the multiple power sources.
10.If ther exists the possibility of reversed phase, lose phase, momentary blackout or the power goes on and off
while the product is operating, attach a reversed phase protection circuit locally.
OUTDOOR UNITS Running the product in reversed phase may break the compressor and other parts.
Field Wiring
Switch
Fuse
Power supply
Main
switch
2 wires cable
(Transmission line) 2 wires cable 2 wires cable 2 wires cable
(Transmission line) (Transmission line) (Transmission line)
2 wires cable
(Power line)
Switch Switch Switch Switch
Fuse Fuse Fuse Fuse
2 wires cable 2 wires cable 2 wires cable 2 wires cable

(Power line) (Power line) (Power line) (Power line)
INDOOR UNITS
3D057919
Wiring Diagrams
229
230
Power supply Notes 1. All wiring, components and materials to be procured on the site must be 6. Unit shall be grounded in compliance with the applicable local and national codes.
comply with the applicable local and national codes. 7. Wiring shown are general points-of-connection guides only and are not intended for or to include all details
Wiring Diagrams
2. Use copper conductors only. for a specific installation.

Main switch 3. As for details, see wiring diagram. 8. Be sure to install the switch and the fuse to the power line of each equipment.
4. Instal circuit breaker for safety. 9. Install the main switch that can interrupt all the power sources in an integrated manner because this system
5. All field wiring and components must be provided by licensed electrician. consists of the equipment utilizing the multiple power sources.
OUTDOOR UNIT
Switch
Fuse
2 wires cable
(Transmission line) 2 wires cable 2 wires cable 2 wires cable
(Transmission line) (Transmission line) (Transmission line)
Switch Switch Switch Switch

2 wires cable
Fuse (Power line) Fuse Fuse Fuse
2 wires cable 2 wires cable 2 wires cable

(Power line) (Power line) (Power line)
INDOOR UNITS
3D052597
Appendix
SiENBE34-802
SiENBE34-802 Wiring Diagrams
2.3 Indoor Unit

FXCQ20M / 25M / 32M / 63MV3
1N~50Hz 230V 20,25,32,63 Class
(22,28,36,71 Class)
indoor
Switch box
Input from outside

(note 3)
To central remote
control (note 1)
Wired remote
control
(Note 2)
Note 2 Receiver / Display unit

Field wiring Colors BLK : Black
L Live BLU : Blue
N Neutral BRN : Brown
ORG : Orange
Connector
PNK : Pink
Wire clamp RED : Red
Protective earth (screw) WHT : White
YLW : Yellow
33H Float switch R2T, R3T Thermistor (Coil) H1P Light emitting diode (On-Red)
33S Limit switch (swing flap) Q2E Earth leak detector H2P Light emitting diode (Timer-Green)
A1P Printed circuit board RyA Magnetic relay (M1S) H3P Light emitting diode (Filter sign-Red)
C1R Capacitor (M1F) RyF1-3 Magnetic relay (M1F) H4P Light emitting diode (Defrost-Orange)
F1T Thermal fuse (152°C) (M1F embedded) RyP Magnetic relay (M1P) SS1 Selector switch (Main/Sub)
F1U Fuse (250V, 5A) T1R Transformer (220-240V/22V) SS2 Selector switch (Wireless adress set)
F2U Field fuse X1M Terminal strip (Power) Connector for optional parts
HAP Light emitting diode X2M Terminal strip (Control) X18A Connector
(Service monitor-Green) Y1E Electronic expansion valve (Wiring, adapter for electrical appendices)
M1F Motor (Indoor fan) Receiver/Display unit X23A Connector (infrared remote control)
M1S Motor (Swing flap) (Attached to infrared remote control)
M1P Motor (Drain pump) A2P, A3P Printed circuit board
R1T Thermistor (Air) BS ON/OFF button
Notes
1. When using a central remote control, see manual for connection to the unit.
2. X23A is connected when the Infrared remote control kit is used.
3. When connecting the input wires from the outdoor unit, “forced off” or “on/off” operation can be selected by the remote control.
For more details see installation manual.
4. Use copper conductors only.
2TW23776-1D
Appendix 231
Wiring Diagrams SiENBE34-802
FXCQ40M / 50M / 80M / 125MV3

1N~50Hz 230V 40,50,80,125 Class
(45,56,90,140 Class)
indoor
Switch box
Input from outside

(note 3)
To central remote
control (note 1)
Wired remote
control
(Note 2)
Note 2 Receiver / Display unit

L Live BLU : Blue
ORG : Orange
Connector
PNK : Pink
YLW : Yellow
33H Float switch R2T, R3T Thermistor (Coil) H1P Light emitting diode (On-Red)
33S Limit switch (swing flap) Q2E Earth leak detector H2P Light emitting diode (Timer-Green)
A1P Printed circuit board RyA Magnetic relay (M1S) H3P Light emitting diode (Filter sign-Red)
C1R Capacitor (M1F) RyF1-3 Magnetic relay (M1F) H4P Light emitting diode (Defrost-Orange)
F1T Thermal fuse (152°C) (M1F embedded) RyP Magnetic relay (M1P) SS1 Selector switch (Main/Sub)
F1U Fuse (250V, 5A) T1R Transformer (220-240V/22V) SS2 Selector switch (Wireless adress set)
F2U Field fuse X1M Terminal strip (Power) Connector for optional parts
HAP Light emitting diode X2M Terminal strip (Control) X18A Connector
(Service monitor-Green) Y1E Electronic expansion valve (Wiring, adapter for electrical appendices)
M1F Motor (Indoor fan) Receiver/Display unit X23A Connector (infrared remote control)
M1S Motor (Swing flap) (Attached to infrared remote control)
M1P Motor (Drain pump) A2P, A3P Printed circuit board
R1T Thermistor (Air) BS ON/OFF button
Notes
2. X23A is connected when the infrared remote control kit is used.
2TW23806-1D
232 Appendix
FXFQ20P / 25P / 32P / 40P / 50P / 63P / 80P / 100P / 125P7VE
20~125-Class (22~140 Class)

indoor
Receiver/display unit
Control Box Input from outside
220~240/220V (note 4)
~50/60Hz To central remote
control (note 2)
Wired remote
control
20~63-Class 80~125-Class
(22~71 Class) (90~140 Class)
Indoor unit M1S Motor (Swing flap) Reciever/display unit (Attached to SS2 Selector switch
A1P Printed circuit board PS Power supply circuit infrared remote control) (Wireless adress set)
A2P Printed circuit board Q1DI Earth leak detector A3P Printed circuit board Connector for optional parts
C1 Capacitor R1T Thermistor (Air) A4P Printed circuit board X24A Connector
F1U Fuse (T, 5A, 250V) R2T Thermistor (Coil) BS1 Push button (on/off) (infrared remote control)
F2U Field Fuse R3T Thermistor (Header) H1P Light emitting diode (on-red) X33A Connector (adapter for wiring)
HAP Light emitting diode S1L Float switch H2P Light emitting diode (timer-green) X35A Connector (group control adapter)
(Service monitor green) X1M Terminal strip H3P Light emitting diode (filter sign-red) Wired remote control
KPR Magnetic relay (M1P) X2M Terminal strip H4P Light emitting diode R1T Thermistor (air)
L1 Coil Y1E Electronic expansion valve (defrost-orange) SS1 Selector switch (main/sub)
M1F Motor (Indoor fan) Z1C Ferrite core SS1 Selector switch (main/sub)
M1P Motor (Drain pump)
Notes:
1. Terminal Connector Field wiring
2. In case of using a central remote control, connect it to the unit in accordance with the attached installation manual.
3. X24A, X33A and X35A are connected when the optional accessories are being used.
4. When connecting the input wires from outside, forced off or on/off control operation can be selected by the remote control
5. Confirm the method of setting the selector switch (SS1,SS2) by installation manual end engineering data, etc.
6. Colour legend: RED : Red BLK : Black WHT : White YLW : Yellow GRN : Green
ORG : Orange BRN : Brown GRY : Grey BLU : Blue PNK : Pink
3TW28836-1B
Appendix 233
FXZQ20M / 25M / 32M / 40M / 50MV1

20,25,32,40,50 Class
(22,28,36,45,56 Class)
Power supply
220~240V Input from outside (see note 4)
~ See Transmission wiring central
50Hz note 3
remote control (see note 2)
Wired remote
control
Switch Box
See note 3
Indoor unit Q1M Thermal protector Wired remote control SS1 Selector switch (main/sub)
A1P Printed circuit board (M1F embedded) R1T Thermistor (air) SS2 Selector switch
C1 Capacitor R1T Thermistor (Air) SS1 Selector switch (Main/sub) (Wireless adress set)
F1U Fuse (B, 5A, 250V) R2T Thermistor (Coil-liquid) Wireless remote control Connector for optional parts
F2U Field Fuse R3T Thermistor (Coil-gas) (Reciever/display unit) X16A Connector (adapter for wire)
HAP Light emitting diode S1L Float switch A3P Printed circuit board X18A Connector (on/off)
(Service monitor green) T1R Transformer (220-240V/22V) A4P Printed circuit board (Wiring adapter for electrical
KPR Magnetic relay (M1P) V1TR Triac BS1 Push button (on/off) appendices)
M1F Motor (Indoor fan) X1M Terminal strip H1P Light emitting diode (on-red)
M1P Motor (Drain pump) X2M Terminal strip H2P Light emitting diode (timer-green)
M1S Motor (Swing flap) Y1E Electronic expansion valve H3P Light emitting diode (filter sign-red)
Q1DI Earth leak detector (Max. 300mA) H4P Light emitting diode (defrost-orange)
Terminal Colors RED : Red PNK : Pink

Connector BLK : Black ORG : Orange
Wire clamp WHT : White GRN : Green
YLW : Yellow BLU : Blue
Field wiring
Notes:
1. In case of using a remote control, connect it to the unit in accordance with the attached installation manual.
2. X23A is connected when the wireless remote control is being used.
3. When connecting the input wires from outside, forced off or on/off control operation can be selected by the remote control
4. Remote control model varies according to the combination system.
See technical data and catalogs, etc. before connecting
3TW28826-1B
234 Appendix
Appendix
SiENBE34-802
Indoor unit R1T Thermistor (Air)

A1P Printed circuit board R2T-R3TThermistor (coil) Power supply
Electrical parts box
A2P Terminal board S1L Float switch 220-240V 220V
C1 capacitor (M1F) S1Q Limit switch (swing flap) ~ ~
F1U Fuse (B, 5A,250V) T1R Transformer (220-240V/22V) 50Hz 60Hz
HAP Light emitting diode X1M Terminal block (Power)
FXKQ25MA / 32MA / 40MA / 63MAVE
(service monitor-green) X2M Terminal block (Control)

K1R-K3R Magnetic relay (M1F) Y1E Electronic expansion
KAR Magnetic relay (M1S) valve
KPR Magnetic relay (M1P) Wired remote control
M1F Motor (indoor fan) R1T Thermistor (Air)
M1P Motor (drain pump) SS1 Selector switch (Main/sub)
Note 4
M1S Motor (swing flap) Connector for optional parts Input from outside
Q1M Thermo switch X16A Connector (adapter for wiring)
Note 3
(M1F embedded) X18A Connector (wiring adapter Note 5 Transmission wiring
central remote
for electrical appandices) control
Notes
1. Terminal block Connector Terminal
Wired remote control
2. Field wiring (Optional accessory)
3. In case using central remote control, connect it to the unit in accordance with the
attached instruction manual.
4. When connecting the input wires from outside, forced off or on/off control operation can
be selected by remote control.
In details, refer to the installation manual attached the unit.
5. In case high ESP operation, change over the wiring connection from X2A to X3A.
6. Symbols show as follows
PNK : Pink WHT : White YLW : Yellow ORG : Orange BLU : Blue
BLK : Black RED : Red BRN : Brown GRY : Grey
3D039564C-1
Wiring Diagrams
235
236
A1P Printed circuit board
C1 Capacitor (M1F)
F1U Fuse (F5A/250V)
HAP Light emitting diode
Wiring Diagrams
(Service monitor green)

KPR Magnetic relay (M1P)
FXDQ20P / 25P / 32P
M1F Motor (Indoor fan)

M1P Motor (Drain pump)
Q1M Thermal protector (M1F embedded)
Power supply
220-240V 220V Note 5
R2T Thermistor (Coil - 1) ~ ~ Input from outside
R3T Thermistor (Coil - 2) 50Hz 60Hz Note 3
S1L Float switch Transmission wiring
central remote control
T1R Transformer (220/22V)
V1TR Phase control circuit
X1M Terminal block
X2M Terminal block Wired remote
Y1E Electronic expansion valve control
FXDQ40NA / 50NA / 63NAVE (with Drain Pump)
Z1C-Z2C Noise filter (Ferrite core)

Wired remote control
SS1 Selector switch (Main/Sub)
Connector for optional parts
X16A Connector (adapter for wiring)
X18A Connector (wiring adapter for
electrical appendices)
Notes:
1. Terminal
Connector Control box
2. Field wiring
3. In case of using a central remote control, connect it to the unit in accordance with the attached installation manual.
4. Remote control model varies according to the combination system, confirm engineering materials and catalogs, etc. before connecting.
5. When connecting the input wires from outside, forced off or on/off control operation can be selected by the remote control.
6. Colour legend: RED : Red BLK : Black WHT : White YLW : Yellow PRP : Purple
GRY : Grey BLU : Blue PNK : Pink ORG : Orange GRN : Green
3D045500C
Appendix
SiENBE34-802
Appendix
SiENBE34-802
FXDQ20M8 / 25M8V3
A1P Printed circuit board RyF1-3 Magnetic relay (Fan) Adapter for wiring X1M Terminal strip
C1R Capacitor (Fan) T1R Transformer RyC,RyF Magnetic relay Connector for optional parts
F1U Fuse (250V, 10A) (220-240V/22V) RyH Magnetic relay (J1EH) X16A Connector (wiring adapter)
F2U Field Fuse X1M Terminal strip (Power) F1U,F2U Fuse (250V,5A) X18A Connector (wiring adapter for
HAP Light emitting diode X2M Terminal strip (Control) X1A,X2A Connector (wiring adapter) electrical appendices)
(Service monitor green) Y1E Electronic expansion valve
M1F Motor (Fan) Compressor
Q1E Earth leak detector Optional parts operation
R1T Thermistor (Air) J1EH Electric heater 1N~50Hz indoor
Fan
indicator
R2T, R3T Thermistor (Refrigerant) K1R Magnetic relay (J1EH)

operation
Terminals
230V operation
Adaptor for wiring

L Live BLU : Blue
ORG : Orange Switch box
Connector
PNK : Pink
Note 3 input
YLW : Yellow from outside
Switch box cover
Central remote
Notes control note 1
Wired
2. When using a central remote control, see manual for connection to the unit. remote
3. When installing the electric heater, change the wiring for the heater circuit, the main power supply has to be supplied independently. control
2TW23666
Wiring Diagrams
237
FXSQ20M / 25M / 32M / 40M / 50M / 63M8V3
1N~50Hz Adapter for wiring

230V
operation indicator
20~63 class compressor
Terminals for
(22~71 class) operation
indoor fan
operation
Switch box
Note 5 input
from outside
Colors BLK : Black Central remote
BLU : Blue control note 2
BRN : Brown
GRY : Grey
Wired
ORG : Orange remote
PNK : Pink control
RED : Red Note 3
WHT : White Seperate power supply
YLW : Yellow 1N~50Hz 230V
Low ESP operation
Field wiring
L Live
N Neutral
Connector High ESP operation
Wire clamp
Protective earth (screw) 20~32 class 40~63 class
(22~36 class) (45~71 class)
Note 4
33H Float switch R1T Thermistor (Air) K1R Magnetic relay (J1EH)
A1P Printed circuit board R2T, R3T Thermistor (Refrigerant) Adapter for wiring
A2P Terminal board RyF1-3 Magnetic relay (Fan) RyC,RyF Magnetic relay
C1R Capacitor (Fan) RyP Magnetic relay (Drain pump) RyH Magnetic relay (J1EH)
F1U Fuse (250V, 5A) T1R Transformer (220-240V/22V) F1U, F2U Fuse (250V, 5A)
F2U Field fuse X1M Terminal strip (Power) X1A,X2A Connector (wiring adapter)
HAP Light emitting diode X2M Terminal strip (Control) X1M Terminal strip
(Service monitor-Green) Y1E Electronic expansion valve Connector for optional parts
M1F Motor (Indoor fan) Optional parts X16A Connector (Wiring adapter)
M1P Motor (Drain pump) F3-5U Fuse (250, 16A) X18A Connector
Q2E Earth leak detector J1EH Electric heater (Wiring adapter for electrical appendices)
Notes
3. When installing the electric heater change the wiring for the heater circuit. The main power supply has to be supplied independently.
4. For High or Low ESP operation, change the wiring connection of X4A as shown on the wiring diagram.
2TW23686-1C
238 Appendix
FXSQ80M / 100M / 125M8V3
1N~50Hz Adapter for wiring

230V 80,100,125 class
operation indicator
(90,112,140 class)
compressor
Terminals for
operation
indoor fan
operation
Switch box
Note 5 input
Colors BLK : Black from outside
BLU : Blue Central remote
BRN : Brown control note 2
GRY : Grey
ORG : Orange
Wired
PNK : Pink remote
RED : Red control
WHT : White
YLW : Yellow Note 3
Seperate power supply
1N~50Hz 230V
Field wiring
L Live
Note 4
N Neutral High ESP operation
Connector
Wire clamp
Protective earth (screw)
33H Float switch R1T Thermistor (Air) K1R Magnetic relay (J1EH)
A1P Printed circuit board R2T, R3T Thermistor (Refrigerant) Adapter for wiring
A2P Terminal board RyF1-3 Magnetic relay (Fan) RyC,RyF Magnetic relay
C1R Capacitor (Fan) RyP Magnetic relay (Drain pump) RyH Magnetic relay (J1EH)
F1U Fuse (250V, 10A) T1R Transformer (220V/27V) F1U, F2U Fuse (250V, 5A)
F2U Field fuse X1M Terminal strip (Power) X1A,X2A Connector (wiring adapter)
HAP Light emitting diode X2M Terminal strip (Control) X1M Terminal strip
(Service monitor-Green) Y1E Electronic expansion valve Connector for optional parts
M1F Motor (Fan) Optional parts X16A Connector (Wiring adapter)
M1P Motor (Drain pump) F3-5U Fuse (250V, 16A) X18A Connector
Q2E Earth leak detector J1EH Electric heater (Wiring, adapter for electrical appendices)
Notes
3. When installing the electric heater change the wiring for the heater circuit. The main power supply has to be supplied independently.
4. For High ESP operation, change the wiring connection of X4A as shown on the wiring diagram.
2TW23636-1C
Appendix 239
240
R1T R2T R3T R4T
M1P M
~ S1L
Z2C t° t° t° t°
POWER A1P
Wiring Diagrams
SUPPLY
N=1
F1U X16A X18A X17A X13A X15A
KPR
L L X25A
N N X27A T2 INPUT FROM

~220-240V ~220V PS
X1M Z1C T1 OUTSIDE NOTE) 3
50Hz 60Hz
X30A F2 TRANSMISSION
HAP WIRING
F1
P2
FOR FXMQ50PVE • 63PVE • 80PVE • 100PVE • 125PVE
+ C2 + C3 R3 R4 X70A P1 CENTRAL REMOTE
TO X70A (A1P) X35A
X2M CONTROL NOTE) 2
L1R - -
X7A
A3P BLK BLK X28A SS1
A2P
FOR FXMQ20PVE • 25PVE • 32PVE • 40PVE P2
X3A X6A X9A L1R P1 R1T
X1A A2P
TO X1M R1 X33A WIRED REMOTE CONTROL
X3A X6A M Y1E (OPTIONAL ACCESSORY)
F3U M1F
FXMQ40P / 50P / 63P / 80P / 100P / 125PVE
K1R + C1 MS R1
Z1F 3~ F4U
- RED
F2U
X10A K1R + C1 Z2C
R2 M1F L1P
Z1F X28A
V1R V2R 5 BLU -
MS A
3~ 3
X10A A X35A
V1R R2 A2P P
HAP GRN 1
* P
PS PS Z
X2A HAP X8A 1 X33A
C X1M X2M
EL. COMPO. BOX (INDOOR)

*ONLY FXMQ50PVE • 63PVE • 80PVE • 100PVE • 125PVE
INDOOR UNIT PS SWITCHING POWER Y1E ELECTRONIC

A1P PRINTED CIRCUIT SUPPLY (A1P, A2P) EXPANSION VALVE
BOARD R1 RESISTOR (CURRENT Z1C, Z2C NOISE FILTER
A2P PRINTED CIRCUIT LIMITING) (FERRITE CORE)
BOARD (FAN) R2 CURRENT SENSING Z1F NOISE FILTER
A3P PRINTED CIRCUIT DEVICE CONNECTOR OPTIONAL
BOARD (CAPACITOR) R3,R4 R4RESISTOR (ELECTRIC ACCESSORY NOTES) 1. : TERMINAL : CONNECTOR : FIELD WIRING
C1, C2, C3 CAPACITOR DISCHARGE) X28A CONNECTOR (POWER 2. IN CASE USING CENTRAL REMOTE CONTROL, CONNECT IT TO THE
F1U FUSE (T, 3.15A, 250V) R1T THERMISTOR (SUCTION AIR) SUPPLY FOR WIRING) UNIT IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE ATTACHED INSTALLATION MANUAL.
F2U FUSE (T, 5A, 250V) R2T THERMISTOR (LIQUID) X33A CONNECTOR (FOR 3. WHEN CONNECTING THE INPUT WIRES FROM OUTSIDE, FORCED OFF
F3U FUSE (T, 6.3A, 250V) R3T THERMISTOR (GAS) WIRING) OR ON/OFF CONTROL OPERATION CAN BE SELECTED BY REMOTE
F4U FUSE (T, 6.3A, 250V) R4T THERMISTOR X35A CONNECTOR (ADAPTER) CONTROL. IN DETAILS, REFER TO THE INSTALLATION MANUAL
HAP LIGHT EMITTING DIODE (DISCHARGE AIR) WIRED REMOTE CONTROL ATTACHED THE UNIT.
(SERVICE MONITOR-GREEN) S1L FLOAT SWITCH R1T THERMISTOR (AIR) 4. COLORS BLK : BLACK RED : RED BLU : BLUE WHT : WHITE
(A1P, A2P) SS1 SELECTOR SWITCH PNK : PINK YLW : YELLOW BRN : BROWN GRY : GRAY GRN : GREEN
V1R DIODE BRIDGE
ORG : ORANGE.
KPR MAGNETIC RELAY V2R POWER MODULE (MAIN/SUB)
K1R MAGNETIC RELAY X1M TERMINAL STRIP
L1R REACTOR (POWER SUPPLY)
M1F MOTOR (FAN) X2M TERMINAL STRIP
M1P MOTOR (DRAIN PUMP) (CONTROL)
3D058783
Appendix
SiENBE34-802
Appendix
SiENBE34-802
Indoor unit H3P Light emitting diode

A1P Printed circuit board (Filter sign-red)
Note 4
C1R Capacitor (M1F) H4P Light emitting diode Power supply Receiver/display unit
F1U Fuse (B, 5A, 250V) (Defrost-orange) 220-240V 220V (Infrared remote control)
HAP Light emitting diode SS1 Selector switch (Main/sub)
(Service monitor-green) SS2 Selector switch ~ ~
KAR Magnetic relay (M1S) (wireless adress set) 50Hz 60Hz
KPR Magnetic relay (M1P) Connector for optional parts
M1F Motor (Indoor fan) X8A Connector (Float switch)
FXHQ32MA / 63MA / 100MAVE
M1S Motor (Swing flap) X18A Connector (Wiring adapter for

Q1M Thermo switch (M1F embedded) electrical appendices)
R1T Thermistor (Air) X23A Connector Note 6
R2T Thermistor (Coil liquid) (infrared remote control)
R3T Thermistor (Coil gas)
S1Q Limit switch (Swing flap) Notes:
T1R Transformer (220240/22V) 1. : Terminal block : Connector Note 5
X1M Terminal block (Power) : Field wiring Input from outside
X2M Terminal block (Control) 3. In case using central remote control, connect it to the unit in Note 3
Y1E Electronic expansion valve Transmission
accordance with the attached instruction manual. wiring central
PC Phase control circuit
4. X23A is connected when the infrared remote control kit is being remote control
Optional parts
M1P Motor (drain pump) used.
Wired remote control 5. When connecting the input wires from outside, forced off or on/off
R1T Thermistor (Air) control operation can be selected by remote control. In details, refer
SS1 Selector switch (Main/sub) to the installation manual attached the unit.
Receiver/display unit (attached to 6. In case installing the drain pump, remove the short circuit connector
infrared remote control) of X8A and execute the additional wiring for float switch and drain Wired remote control
A2P Printed circuit board (Optional accessory)
pump.
A3P Printed circuit board
BS1 Push button (On/off) 7. Symbols show as follows.
H1P Light emitting diode (on-red) PNK : Pink WHT : White YLW : Yellow ORG : Orange
H2P Light emitting diode BLU : Blue BLK : Black RED : Red
(timer-green) 8. Use copper conductors only. Electric parts box
3D039801D
Wiring Diagrams
241
242
INDOOR UNIT A2P A3P
Wiring Diagrams
A1P PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD A1P SS1

POWER SUPPLY H1P
F1U FUSE ( B , 3A, 250V) R3T R2T R1T X2A BS1
H2P
220-240V 220V X2M
HAP LIGHT EMITTING DIODE ~ ~ SS2 H3P
(SERVICE MONITOR GREEN) 50HZ 60HZ A1P t° t° t° H4P
NE
M1F MOTOR (INDOOR FAN) X24A X1A X1A

L X14A X18A X19A
MOTOR (SWING FLAP) F1U
M1S L NOTE 8 RECEIVER/DISPLAY UNIT
THERMISTOR (AIR) N N PC (INFRARED REMOTE CONTROL)
R1T X24A NOTE) 5
X27A NOTE) 8
R2T THERMISTOR (COIL LIQUID PIPE) T2
PC INPUT FROM OUTSIDE
R3T THERMISTOR (COIL GAS PIPE) T1
A1P X2M F2 TRANSMISSION WIRING
HAP X35A X30A
X1M TERMINAL BLOCK (CONTROL) F1 CENTRAL REMOTE CONTROL
X2M
X20A P2 NOTE) 2
X2M TERMINAL BLOCK (POWER) X36A X7A X15A
P1 SS1
Y1E ELECTRONIC EXPANSION VALVE P2
HAP A1P X1M WIRED REMOTE
X1M P1 R1T
PC POWER CIRCUIT HAP CONTROL
X1M
RECEIVER/DISPLAY UNIT (ATTACHED
TO INFRARED REMOTE CONTROL) SIDE FRONT
FXAQ20MA / 25MA / 32MAVE / 40MA / 50MA / 63MAVE
MS MSW M
CONTROL BOX 3~ 5. WHEN CONNECTING THE INPUT WIRES FROM
A2P PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD
M1S Y1E
PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD (INDOOR UNIT) M1F OUTSIDE, FORCED OFF OR ON/OFF CONTROL
A3P
NOTES OPERATION CAN BE SELECTED BY REMOTE CONTROL
BS1 PUSH BUTTON (ON/OFF)
1. : TERMINAL : CONNECTOR IN DETAILS, REFER TO THE INSTALLATION MANUAL
H1P LIGHT EMITTING DIODE (ON-RED)
: FIELD WIRING : CONNECTOR ATTACHED THE UNIT.
H2P LIGHT EMITTING DIODE 2. IN CASE USING CENTRAL REMOTE CONTROL, CONNECT IT TO THE UNIT 6. REMOTE CONTROL MODEL VARIES ACCORDING TO
(TIMER-GREEN)
IN ACCORDANCEWITH THE ATTACHED INSTALLATION MANUAL. THE COMBINATION SYSTEM, CONFIRM ENGINEERING
H3P LIGHT EMITTING DIODE 3. SYMBOLS SHOWS AS FOLLOWS: RED : RED WHT : WHITE GRN : GREEN DATA AND CATALOGS, ETC. BEFORE CONNECTING.
(FILTER SIGN-RED) PNK : PINK YLW : YELLOW BLK : BLACK ORG : ORANGE 7. CONFIRM THE METHOD OF SETTING THE SELECTOR
H4P LIGHT EMITTING DIODE BRN : BROWN BLU : BLUE SWITCH (SS1, SS2) OF WIRED REMOTE CONTROL AND
(DEFROST-ORENGE) 4. SHOWS SHORT CIRCUIT CONNECTOR. INFRARED REMOTE CONTROL BY INSTALLATION
MANUAL AND ENGINEERING DATA, ETC.
SS1 SELECTOR SWITCH (MAIN/SUB) WIRED REMOTE CONTROLLER CONNECTOR FOR OPTIONAL PARTS
8. X24A IS CONNECTED WHEN THE INFRARED REMOTE
SS2 SELECTOR SWITCH R1T THERMISTOR (AIR) X15A CONNECTOR (FLOAT SWITCH)
CONTROL KIT IS BEING USED.
(WIRELESS ADDRESS SET) SS1 SELECTOR SWITCH (MAIN/SUB) X35A CONNECTOR (GROUP CONTROL ADAPTER)
3D034206D
Appendix
SiENBE34-802
Appendix
SiENBE34-802
Indoor unit X2M Terminal block (Control)

A1P Printed Circuit board Y1E Electronic expansion valve)
C1 Capacitor (M1F) Wired remote control Power supply
F1U Fuse (B, 5A, 250V) R1T Thermistor (Air) 220-240V 220V
HAP Light emitting diode SS1 Selector switch (Main/sub) ~ ~
(Service monitor-green) Connector for optional parts 50Hz 60Hz
K1R-K3R Magnetic relay (M1F) X18A Connector (Wiring adapter
M1F Motor (Indoor fan) for electorical appendices)
Q1M Thermo switch
(M1F embedded)
R2T-R3T Thermistor (Coil)
T1R Transformer (220-240V/22V)
X1M Terminal block (Power)
FXLQ20MA / 25MA / 32MA / 40MA / 50MA / 63MAVE
FXNQ20MA / 25MA / 32MA / 40MA / 50MA / 63MAVE
Note 4
Input from outside
Notes Note 3
Transmission wiring
1. Terminal block Connector Terminal central remote control
2. Field wiring
3. In case using central remote control, connect it to the unit in accordance
with the attached instruction manual.
4. When connecting the input wires from outside, forced off or on/off control
operation can be selected by remote control.
PNK : Pink WHT : White YLW : Yellow ORG : Orange
Wired remote control Control box
BLU : Blue BLK : Black RED : Red BRN : Brown
(Optional accessory)
3D039826D
Wiring Diagrams
243
244
Wiring Diagrams
Indoor unit Wired remote control

A1P Printed circuit board R1T Thermistor (Air) Power supply
A2P Printed circuit board SS1 Selector switch (Main/Sub)
(Transformer 220~240V/16V) Receiver/display unit 220-240V
Note 3 ~
FXUQ71MA / 100MA / 125MAV1
C1 Capacitor (M1F) (Attached to infrared remote control) 50Hz

HAP Light emitting diode A3P Printed circuit board BEV Unit Note 5
(Service monitor green) A4P Printed circuit board
HBP Light emitting diode BS1 Push button (ON/OFF) Receiver/display unit
(service monitor green) H1P Light emitting diode Indoor unit
M1S Motor (Swingflap) (On-red)
M1F Motor (Indoor fan) H2P Light emitting diode
M1P Motor (Drain pump) (Timer green)
Q1M Thermo switch (M1F embedded) H3P Light emitting diode Wired remote
R1T Thermistor (Air) (Filter sign-red)) control
R2T Thermistor (Coil) H4P Light emitting diode
RyA Magnetic relay (M1A) (Defrost-orange)
RyP Magnetic relay (M1P) SS1 Selector switch (Main/sub)
S1Q Limit switch (swing flap) SS2 Selector switch
S1L Float switch (Wireless address set)
SS1 Selector switch (Emergency) Connector for optional parts
V1TR Phase control circuit X24A Connector (Infrared remote control)
X1M Terminal strip X30A Connector (interface
X2M Terminal strip adapter for sky air series)
RC Signal receiver X35A Connector (group control adapter)
TC Signal transmission circuit
Notes
1. Terminal block Connector
2. Field wiring Control box
3. The BEV unit shows an outline, please refer to a wiring diagram of BEV unit pasting in detail.
4. In case using central remote control, connect it to the unit in accordance with the attached instruction manual.
5. X24A is connected when the infrared remote control kit is being used.
6. Remote control model varies according to the combination system.
Confirm engineering materials and catalogs, etc. before connecting.
7. Confirm the method of setting th selector switch (SS1,SS2) of wired remote control and infrared remote control by installation manual and engineering data, etc.
RED : Red BLK : Black WHT : White YLW : Yellow GRN : Green BLU : Blue
3D044973A
Appendix
SiENBE34-802
BEVQ71MA / 100MA / 125MAVE

Power supply
BEV unit
220-240C 220V
A1P Printed circuit board assy ~ ~
A2P Power supply printed circuit 50Hz 60Hz
board assy (220-240V/16V)
F1U Fuse (B, 10A, 250V)
HAP Light emitting diode
(service monitor-green)
R3T Thermistor (Gas)
SS1 Selector switch (M/S)
X1M Terminal strip (Power) To indoor
X2M Terminal strip (Transmission) unit
Y1E Electronic expansion valve
Z1C-Z2C
Noise filter
Z3C-Z4F
Control box
To outdoor unit
Notes
1. Terminal Connector
2. Field wiring
3. This wiring diagram only shows the BEV unit.
See the wiring diagrams and installation manuals for the wiring and settings for the indoor, outdoor and BS units.
4. See the indoor unit’s wiring diagram when installing optional parts for the indoor unit.
5. Only one indoor unit may be connected to the BEV unit.
See the indoor unit’s wiring diagram for when connecting the remote control.
6. Always use de sky air connection adapter for the indoor unit when using a central control unit.
Refer to the manual attached the unit when connecting.
7. Cool/heat changeover of indoor units connected to BEV unit cannot be carried out unless they are conencted to BS unit.
In case of a system with BEV unit only, cool/heat selector is required.
8. Set the SS1 to “M” only for the BEV unit connected to the indoor unit which is to have cool/heat switching capability, when
connecting the BS unit.
The ‘M/S” on the SS1 stands for “Main/Sub”. This is set to “S” when shipped from the factory.
9. Connect the attached thermistor to the R3T.
3D044901B
Appendix 245
Option List SiENBE34-802
3. Option List
3.1 Option List of Controllers
Operation Control System Optional Accessories
Type FXDQ-
No. Item FXFQ FXZQ FXCQ FXKQ FXDQ M8 FXSQ FXMQ FXUQ FXHQ FXAQ FXLQ FXNQ
1 Wired remote control BRC1D52
Infrared remote cooling only BRC7F533 BRC7E531 BRC7C67 BRC4C63 BRC4C64 BRC4C66 BRC7C529 BRC7E66 BRC7E619 BRC4C64
2
control heat pump BRC7F532 BRC7E530 BRC7C62 BRC4C61 BRC4C62 BRC4C65 BRC7C528 BRC7E63 BRC7E618 BRC4C62
3 Simplified remote control — BRC2C51 — BRC2C51
Simplified remote control for hotel
4 — BRC3A61 — BRC3A61
use
5 Centralised remote control DCS302C51
6 Unified ON/OFF control DCS301B51
7 Schedule timer DST301B51
8 Wiring adapter — KRP1B57*1 — KRP1B61 KRP1B61 KRP1B56 — KRP1C64 KRP4A53 KRP1B3 — KRP1B61
9 Wiring adapter (hour meter) EKRP1C11*1 — EKRP1B2 — EKRP1B2*2 — EKRP1B2 — —
Wiring adapter for electrical
10 appendices (1) KRP2A526*1 KRP2A516*1 KRP2A61 KRP2A516 KRP2A53 KRP2A516 KRP2A61 KRP2A62* KRP2A51
11 Wiring
adapter for electrical KRP4AA53*1 KRP4A536*1 KRP4A516*1 KRP4A51 KRP4A516 KRP4A54 KRP4A516 KRP4A51 KRP4A52* KRP4A51
appendices (2)
12 Remote sensor KRCS01-4 KRCS01-1B
13 Installation box for adapter PCB KRP1H98 KRP1BA101 KRP1B96*3/4 — KRP1BA101 — KRP1B97 KRP1C93*3 KRP4A93*3/4 —
Electrical box with earth terminal
14 (3 blocks) — KJB311A
Electrical box with earth terminal

15 (2 blocks) KJB212AA KJB212A
Noise filter (for electromagnetic

16 interface only) — KEK26-1A
17 External control adapter — DTA104A52 DTA104A51*1 DTA104A61 DTA104A53 DTA104A51 DTA104A61 DTA104A62 DTA104A51 DTA104A61
18 Interface adapter for SkyAir series — DTA102A52 —
19 Connector for forced on/forced off — EKRORO —
Note:
1. Installation box is required
2. Fixingbox is KRP1A90
3. Up to 2 adapters can be fixed per installation box
4. Only 1 installation box can be installed per indoor unit
Various PC Boards
No. Part name Model No. Function
KRP1B56
KRP1B57
1 Adapter for wiring KRP1B61 PC board when equipped with auxiliary electric heater in the indoor unit.
KRP1B3
KRP4A53
Up to 1,024 units can be centrally controlled in 64 different groups.
2 DIII-NET Expander Adapter DTA109A51 Wiring restrictions (max. length: 1,000 m, total wiring length: 2,000 m, max. number of
branches: 16) apply to each adapter.
System Configuration
• Up to 16 groups of indoor units (128 units) can be easily controlled using the large LCD
Note2
1 Residential central remote control DCS303A51
panel. ON/OFF, temperature setting and scheduling can be controlled individually for
indoor units.
2 Central remote control DCS302C51 • Up to 64 groups of indoor units(128 units) can be connected, and ON/OFF, temperature
setting and monitoring can be accomplished individually or simultaneously. Connectable up
Electrical box with earth terminal to 2 controllers in one system.
2-1 KJB311A
(3 blocks)
3 Unified ON/OFF controller DCS301B51
Electrical box with earth terminal • Up to 16 groups of indoor units(128 units) can be turned, ON/OFF individually or
3-1 KJB212A(A) simultaneously, and operation and malfunction can be displayed. Can be used in
(2 blocks)
combination with up to 8 controllers.
3-2 Noise filter (for electromagnetic KEK26-1A
interface use only)
• Programmed time weekly schedule can be controlled by unified control for up to 64 groups
4 Schedule timer DST301B51
of indoor units (128 units). Can turn units ON/OFF twice per day.
• Adapters required to connect products other than those of the VRV System to the high-
R-407C/R-22 HDTA102A52 speed DIII-NET communication system adopted for the VRV System.
Interface adapter
5
for SkyAir-series * To use any of the above optional controllers, an appropriate adapter must be installed on
R-410A HDTA112B51
the product unit to be controlled.
• Up to 1024 units can be centrally controlled in 64 different groups.
DIII -NET • Wiring restrictions (max. lengh : 1,000m, total wiring lengh : 2,000m, max. number of
6 DTA109A51
Expander Adapter branches : 16)
apply to each adapter.
6-1 Mounting plate KRP4A92 • Fixing plate for DTA109A51
Note:
1. Installation box for H adapter must be procured on site.
2. For residential use only. Cannot be used with other centralized control equipment.
246 Appendix
SiENBE34-802 Option List
Building Management System

intelligent Touch • Air-Conditioning management system that can be controlled by a
1 Basic Hardware
Controller
DCS601C51
compact all-in-one unit.
1-1 Hardware DIII-NET plus adapter DCS601A52 • Additional 64 groups (10 outdoor units) is possible.
intelligent Touch
Controller
1-2 Option P. P. D. DCS002C51 • P. P. D.: Power Proportional Distribution function
Software
1-3 Web DCS004A51 • Monitors and controls the air conditioning system using the Internet
and a Web browser application on a PC.
1-4 Electrical box with earth terminal (4 blocks) KJB411A • Wall embedded switch box.
128 units DAM602B52
256 units DAM602B51

Number of
2 Basic Hardware units to be 512 units DAM602B51x2 • Air conditioner management system that can be controlled by
connected personal computers.
768 units DAM602B51x3
intelligent
Manager III 1024 units DAM602B51x4
2-1 P.P.D. DAM002A51 • Power Proportional Distribution function
2-2 Option Software Web DAM004A51 • Monitors and controls the air conditioning system using the Internet
and a Web browser application on a PC.
2-3 Eco DAM003A51 • ECO (Energy saving functions.)
2-4 Optional DIII Ai unit DAM101A51 • External temperature sensor for intelligent Manager III.
2-5 Di unit DEC101A51 • 8 pairs based on a pair of On/Off input and abnormality input.
2-6 Dio unit DEC102A51 • 4 pairs based on a pair of On/Off input and abnormality input.
• Interface unit to allow communications between VRV and BMS.
3 *1 Interface for use in BACnet® DMS502B51 Operation and monitoring of air-conditioning systems through
Communication line
BACnet® communication.
• Expansion kit, installed on DMS502B51, to provide 2 more DIII-NET
3-1 Optional DIII board DAM411B51 communication ports. Not usable independently.
3-2 Optional Di board DAM412B51 • Expansion kit, installed on DMS502B51, to provide 16 more
wattmeter pulse input points. Not usable independently.
• Interface unit to allow communications between VRV and BMS.
4 *2 Interface for use in LONWORKS® DMS504B51 Operation and monitoring of air-conditioning systems through
LONWORKS® communication.
Parallel interface • Enables ON/OFF command, operation and display of malfunction;
5 Basic unit DPF201A51 can be used in combination with up to 4 units.
[
Contact/analog
Temperature
6 DPF201A52 • Enables temperature measurement output for 4 groups; 0-5VDC.
signal
measurement units
Temperature
7 DPF201A53 • Enables temperature setting input for 16 groups; 0-5VDC.
setting units
Unification adapter for • Interface between the central monitoring board and central control
8 computerized control HDCS302A52 units.
Notes:
H
1. BACnet® is a registered trademark of American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-
Conditioning Engineers (ASHRAE).
H
2. LONWORKS®‚ is a registered trade mark of Echelon Corporation.
H
3. Installation box for H adapter must be procured on site.
Appendix 247
Option List SiENBE34-802
3.2 Option List of Outdoor Unit

RXYSQ4 / 5 / 6P
RXYSQ4PA7Y1B RXYSQ4PA7V1B
Optional accessories RXYSQ5PA7Y1B RXYSQ5PA7V1B
RXYSQ6PA7Y1B RXYSQ6PA7V1B
Cool/Heat Selector KRC19-26A6
Fixing box KJB111A
Refnet header KHRQ22M29H
Distributive
Piping
Refnet joint KHRQ22M20T
Central drain plug KKPJ5F180

4TW26101
248 Appendix
Appendix
Example of connection Branch with refnet joint Branch with refnet joint and refnet header Branch with refnet header
(Connection of 8 indoor units Heat pump system)
SiENBE34-802
indoor unit
i
a a
refnet joint A B
a b c d e f g k
H1 b j
A B C D E F G H1 H1
refnet header p 7 8
h i j k l m n H2 b c d e f g h i
c d e f g h
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 H2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 H2
1 2 3 4 5 6
8 8
Pipe length between outdoor and indoor units ≤150 m

Actual pipe length
Maximum [Example] unit 8: a+b+c+d+e+f+g+p≤150 m [Example] unit 6: a+b+h?150 m, unit 8: a+i+k≤150 m [Example] unit 8: a+i≤150 m
Between outdoor and
allowable Equivalent length Equivalent pipe length between outdoor and indoor units ≤175 m (Assume equivalent pipe length of refnet joint to be 0.5 m and of the refnet header to be 1.0 m. (for calculation purposes))
indoor units
length
Total extension
Total piping length from outdoor unit to all indoor units between 10 m and 300 m
length
Between outdoor and Difference in
Difference in height between outdoor and indoor units (H1)≤50 m (≤40 m if outdoor unit is located in a lower position).
Allowable indoor units height
height Between indoor and indoor Difference in
units Difference in height between adjacent indoor units (H2)≤15 m
height
Pipe length from rst refrigerant branch kit (either refnet joint or refnet header) to indoor unit ≤40 m
Allowable length after the branch Actual pipe length
[Example] unit 8: b+c+d+e+f+g+p≤40 m [Example] unit 6: b+h≤40 m, unit 8: i+k≤40 m [Example] unit 8: i≤40 m
Refrigerant branch kit selection Use the following refnet joint Use the following refnet header
Outdoor unit capacity type Refrigerant branch kit name Outdoor unit capacity type Refrigerant branch kit name
Refrigerant branch kits can only be used with R-410A.
RXYSQ4~6 KHRQ22M20T RXYSQ4~6 KHRQ22M29H
4. Example of connection
Pipe size selection A. Piping between outdoor unit and refrigerant branch kit B. Piping between refrigerant branch kits C. Piping between refrigerant branch kit and indoor unit
Caution on selecting connection pipes • Match to the size of the connection piping on the outdoor unit. • Use the pipe size from the following table. • Pipe size for direct connection to indoor unit must be the same as the
If the overall equivalent piping length is ≤90 m, be sure to connection size of indoor unit.
Outdoor unit connection piping size Piping size (outer diameter x minimum thickness)
enlarge the pipe diameter of the gas-side main piping. If the Piping size
recommended pipe size is not available, stick to the original Gas pipe Liquid pipe
Piping size (outer diameter x minimum Indoor capacity (outer diameter x minimum thickness)
pipe diameter (which may result in a small capacity decrease). Ø15.9x1.0 Ø9.5x0.8
Outdoor unit thickness) index Gas pipe Liquid pipe
[Gas side]
capacity type Gas pipe Liquid pipe 20+25+32+40+50 Ø12.7x0.8 Ø6.4x0.8
RXYSQ4+5: Ø15.9→Ø19.1
RXYSQ6: Ø19.1→Ø22.2 RXYSQ4+5 Ø15.9x1.0 63+80+100+125 Ø15.9x1.0 Ø9.5x0.8
(Ø19.1x1.0)
Ø9.5x0.8
Main pipe First refrigerant RXYSQ6 Ø19.1x1.0
(enlarge) branch kit (Ø22.2x1.0)
Indoor
unit
How to calculate the additional refrigerant to be charged Example for refrigerant branch using refnet joint and refnet header
Additional refrigerant to be charged R (kg) Total length (m) of liquid Total length (m) of liquid
R should be rounded off in units of 0.1 kg R= x0.054+ x0.022 a: Ø9.5x30 m d: Ø9.5x13 m g: Ø6.4x10 m j: Ø6.4x10 m
( piping size at Ø9.5 ) ( piping size at Ø6.4 ) b: Ø9.5x10 m e: Ø6.4x10 m h: Ø6.4x20 m k: Ø6.4x9 m
c: Ø9.5x10 m f: Ø6.4x10 m i: Ø9.5x10 m
R=[73 x 0.054] + [69 x 0.022] = 5.46 5.5 kg
249
Example of connection
Example of connection SiENBE34-802
250 Appendix
SiENBE34-802 Thermistor Resistance / Temperature Characteristics
5. Thermistor Resistance / Temperature

Characteristics
Indoor unit For air suction R1T
For liquid pipe R2T
For gas pipe R3T
Outdoor unit For outdoor air R1T

Outdoor unit for fin thermistor R1T
For suction pipe 1 R3T
For heat exchanger R4T, R6T
For suction pipe 2 R5T
For Subcooling heat exchanger outlet R6T, R4T
For Liquid pipe R7T, R8T
(kΩ)
TºC 0.0 T°C 0.0 0.5 T°C 0.0 0.5
-10 - -20 197.81 192.08 30 16.10 15.76
-8 - -19 186.53 181.16 31 15.43 15.10
-6 88.0 -18 175.97 170.94 32 14.79 14.48
-4 79.1 -17 166.07 161.36 33 14.18 13.88
-2 71.1
-16 156.80 152.38 34 13.59 13.31
0 64.1 -15 148.10 143.96 35 13.04 12.77
2 57.8 -14 139.94 136.05 36 12.51 12.25
4 52.3
6 47.3 -13 132.28 128.63 37 12.01 11.76
8 42.9 -12 125.09 121.66 38 11.52 11.29
-11 118.34 115.12 39 11.06 10.84
10 38.9
12 35.3 -10 111.99 108.96 40 10.63 10.41
14 32.1 -9 106.03 103.18 41 10.21 10.00
16 29.2 -8 100.41 97.73 42 9.81 9.61
18 26.6 -7 95.14 92.61 43 9.42 9.24
20 24.3 -6 90.17 87.79 44 9.06 8.88
22 22.2 -5 85.49 83.25 45 8.71 8.54
24 20.3 -4 81.08 78.97 46 8.37 8.21
26 18.5
-3 76.93 74.94 47 8.05 7.90
28 17.0
-2 73.01 71.14 48 7.75 7.60
30 15.6 -1 69.32 67.56 49 7.46 7.31
32 14.2
0 65.84 64.17 50 7.18 7.04
34 13.1
36 12.0 1 62.54 60.96 51 6.91 6.78
38 11.1 2 59.43 57.94 52 6.65 6.53
40 10.3 3 56.49 55.08 53 6.41 6.53
42 9.5 4 53.71 52.38 54 6.65 6.53
44 8.8 5 51.09 49.83 55 6.41 6.53
46 8.2 6 48.61 47.42 56 6.18 6.06
48 7.6 7 46.26 45.14 57 5.95 5.84
50 7.0 8 44.05 42.98 58 5.74 5.43
52 6.7 9 41.95 40.94 59 5.14 5.05
54 6.0 10 39.96 39.01 60 4.96 4.87
56 5.5
58 5.2 11 38.08 37.18 61 4.79 4.70
12 36.30 35.45 62 4.62 4.54
60 4.79
13 34.62 33.81 63 4.46 4.38
62 4.46
64 4.15 14 33.02 32.25 64 4.30 4.23
66 3.87 15 31.50 30.77 65 4.16 4.08
68 3.61 16 30.06 29.37 66 4.01 3.94
70 3.37 17 28.70 28.05 67 3.88 3.81
72 3.15 18 27.41 26.78 68 3.75 3.68
74 2.94 19 26.18 25.59 69 3.62 3.56
76 2.75 20 25.01 24.45 70 3.50 3.44
78 2.51
21 23.91 23.37 71 3.38 3.32
80 2.41 22 22.85 22.35 72 3.27 3.21
82 2.26 23 21.85 21.37 73 3.16 3.11
84 2.12
24 20.90 20.45 74 3.06 3.01
86 1.99
88 1.87 25 20.00 19.56 75 2.96 2.91
26 19.14 18.73 76 2.86 2.82
90 1.76
92 1.65 27 18.32 17.93 77 2.77 2.72
94 1.55 28 17.54 17.17 78 2.68 2.64
96 1.46 29 16.80 16.45 79 2.60 2.55
98 1.38 30 16.10 15.76 80 2.51 2.47
Appendix 251
Thermistor Resistance / Temperature Characteristics SiENBE34-802
Outdoor Unit
Thermistors for
Discharge Pipe
(R2T)
(kΩ)
T°C 0.0 0.5 T°C 0.0 0.5 T°C 0.0 0.5
0 640.44 624.65 50 72.32 70.96 100 13.35 13.15
1 609.31 594.43 51 69.64 68.34 101 12.95 12.76
2 579.96 565.78 52 67.06 65.82 102 12.57 12.38
3 552.00 538.63 53 64.60 63.41 103 12.20 12.01
4 525.63 512.97 54 62.24 61.09 104 11.84 11.66
5 500.66 488.67 55 59.97 58.87 105 11.49 11.32
6 477.01 465.65 56 57.80 56.75 106 11.15 10.99
7 454.60 443.84 57 55.72 54.70 107 10.83 10.67
8 433.37 423.17 58 53.72 52.84 108 10.52 10.36
9 413.24 403.57 59 51.98 50.96 109 10.21 10.06
10 394.16 384.98 60 49.96 49.06 110 9.92 9.78
11 376.05 367.35 61 48.19 47.33 111 9.64 9.50
12 358.88 350.62 62 46.49 45.67 112 9.36 9.23
13 342.58 334.74 63 44.86 44.07 113 9.10 8.97
14 327.10 319.66 64 43.30 42.54 114 8.84 8.71
15 312.41 305.33 65 41.79 41.06 115 8.59 8.47
16 298.45 291.73 66 40.35 39.65 116 8.35 8.23
17 285.18 278.80 67 38.96 38.29 117 8.12 8.01
18 272.58 266.51 68 37.63 36.98 118 7.89 7.78
19 260.60 254.72 69 36.34 35.72 119 7.68 7.57
20 249.00 243.61 70 35.11 34.51 120 7.47 7.36
21 238.36 233.14 71 33.92 33.35 121 7.26 7.16
22 228.05 223.08 72 32.78 32.23 122 7.06 6.97
23 218.24 213.51 73 31.69 31.15 123 6.87 6.78
24 208.90 204.39 74 30.63 30.12 124 6.69 6.59
25 200.00 195.71 75 29.61 29.12 125 6.51 6.42
26 191.53 187.44 76 28.64 28.16 126 6.33 6.25
27 183.46 179.57 77 27.69 27.24 127 6.16 6.08
28 175.77 172.06 78 26.79 26.35 128 6.00 5.92
29 168.44 164.90 79 25.91 25.49 129 5.84 5.76
30 161.45 158.08 80 25.07 24.66 130 5.69 5.61
31 154.79 151.57 81 24.26 23.87 131 5.54 5.46
32 148.43 145.37 82 23.48 23.10 132 5.39 5.32
33 142.37 139.44 83 22.73 22.36 133 5.25 5.18
34 136.59 133.79 84 22.01 21.65 134 5.12 5.05
35 131.06 128.39 85 21.31 20.97 135 4.98 4.92
36 125.79 123.24 86 20.63 20.31 136 4.86 4.79
37 120.76 118.32 87 19.98 19.67 137 4.73 4.67
38 115.95 113.62 88 19.36 19.05 138 4.61 4.55
39 111.35 109.13 89 18.75 18.46 139 4.49 4.44
40 106.96 104.84 90 18.17 17.89 140 4.38 4.32
41 102.76 100.73 91 17.61 17.34 141 4.27 4.22
42 98.75 96.81 92 17.07 16.80 142 4.16 4.11
43 94.92 93.06 93 16.54 16.29 143 4.06 4.01
44 91.25 89.47 94 16.04 15.79 144 3.96 3.91
45 87.74 86.04 95 15.55 15.31 145 3.86 3.81
46 84.38 82.75 96 15.08 14.85 146 3.76 3.72
47 81.16 79.61 97 14.62 14.40 147 3.67 3.62
48 78.09 76.60 98 14.18 13.97 148 3.58 3.54
49 75.14 73.71 99 13.76 13.55 149 3.49 3.45
50 72.32 70.96 100 13.35 13.15 150 3.41 3.37
252 Appendix
SiENBE34-802 Pressure Sensor
6. Pressure Sensor
PH = 1.38V-0.69 PH : Detected Pressure [High Side] MPa
PL = 0.57V-0.28 PL : Detected Pressure [Low Side] MPa
Detected Pressure PH : High pressure (MPa) VH : Output Voltage [High Side] VDC
VL : Low pressure (MPa) VL : Output Voltage [Low Side] VDC
V : Voltage (V)
High Pressure (PH)
Low Pressure (PL)
Output Voltage (VH, VL)

(V3053)
Appendix 253
Method of Replacing the Inverter’s Power Transistors Modules SiENBE34-802
7. Method of Replacing the Inverter’s Power

Transistors Modules
Checking failures in power semiconductors mounted on inverter PC board
Check the power semiconductors mounted on the inverter PC board by the use of a multiple
tester.
<Items to be prepared>
1 Multiple tester : Prepare the digital type of multiple tester with diode check function.
<Preparation>
1 Turn OFF the power supply. Then, after a lapse of 10 minutes or more, make measurement
of resistance.
1 To make measurement, disconnect all connectors and terminals.
Inverter PC board (RXYSQ4 / 5 / 6PA7Y1B)
C+
C-
254 Appendix
SiENBE34-802 Method of Replacing the Inverter’s Power Transistors Modules
Inverter PC board (RXYSQ4 / 5 / 6PA7V1B)
C+
C–
Appendix 255
Method of Replacing the Inverter’s Power Transistors Modules SiENBE34-802
Power module checking

When using the digital type of multiple tester, make measurement in diode check mode.
Tester terminal Criterion Remark

+ -
C+ U Not less than 0.3V It may take time to
(including ∞)* determine the voltage
V due to capacitor
W charge or else.
U C- Not less than 0.3V
(including ∞)*
V
W
U C+ 0.3 to 0.7V
(including ∞)*
V
W
C- U 0.3 to 0.7V
(including ∞)*
V
W
*There needs to be none of each value variation.
The following abnormalities are also doubted besides the PC board abnormality.
1 Faulty compressor (ground fault, ground leakage)
1 Faulty fan motor (ground leakage)
256 Appendix
SiENBE34-802
Part 9
Precautions for New
Refrigerant (R-410A)
1. Precautions for New Refrigerant (R-410A) .........................................258
1.1 Outline ..................................................................................................258
1.2 Refrigerant Cylinders............................................................................260
1.3 Service Tools........................................................................................261
Precautions for New Refrigerant (R-410A) 257

Precautions for New Refrigerant (R-410A) SiENBE34-802
1. Precautions for New Refrigerant (R-410A)

1.1 Outline
1.1.1 About Refrigerant R-410A
Characteristics of new refrigerant, R-410A
1. Performance
Almost the same performance as R-22 and R-407C
2. Pressure
Working pressure is approx. 1.4 times more than R-22 and R-407C.
3. Refrigerant composition
Few problems in composition control, since it is a Quasi-azeotropic mixture refrigerant.
HFC units (Units using new refrigerants) HCFC units

Refrigerant name R-407C R-410A R-22
Non-azeotropic mixture Quasi-azeotropic mixture
Composing Single-component
of HFC32, HFC125 and of HFC32 and JFC125
substances refrigerant
HFC134a (*1) (*1)
3.2 MPa (gauge pressure) 4.0 MPa (gauge pressure) 2.75MPa (gauge pressure)
Design pressure
= 32.6 kgf/cm2 = 40.8 kgf/cm2 = 28.0 kgf/cm2
Refrigerant oil Synthetic oil (Ether) Mineral oil (Suniso)
Ozone destruction 0 0 0.05
factor (ODP)
Combustibility None None None
Toxicity None None None
H1. Non-azeotropic mixture refrigerant: mixture of two or more refrigerants having different
boiling points.
H2. Quasi-azeotropic mixture refrigerant: mixture of two or more refrigerants having similar
boiling points.
H3. The design pressure is different at each product. Please refer to the installation manual for
each product.
(Reference) 1 MPa 10.19716 kgf / cm2
Pressure-Enthalpy curves of HFC-32/125 (50/50wt%)
258 Precautions for New Refrigerant (R-410A)

SiENBE34-802 Precautions for New Refrigerant (R-410A)
Thermodynamic characteristic of R-410A
Temperature Steam pressure Density Specific heat at constant Specific enthalpy Specific entropy
(°C) (kPa) (kg/m3) pressure (kJ/kgK) (kJ/kg) (kJ/KgK)
Liquid Vapor Liquid Vapor Liquid Vapor Liquid Vapor Liquid Vapor

1.2 Refrigerant Cylinders

Cylinder specifications
2 The cylinder is painted refrigerant color (pink).
2 The cylinder valve is equipped with a siphon tube.
Cylinder
Siphon tube
Refrigerant can be charged in liquid state with cylinder in
upright position.
Caution: Do not lay cylinder on its side during charging, since

it cause refrigerant in gas state to enter the system.
Handling of cylinders
(1) Laws and regulations
R-410A is liquefied gas, and the High-Pressure Gas Safety Law must be observed in
handling them. Before using, refer to the High-Pressure Gas Safety Law.
The Law stipulates standards and regulations that must be followed to prevent accidents
with high-pressure gases. Be sure to follow the regulations.
(2) Handing of vessels

Since R-410A is high-pressure gas, it is contained in high-pressure vessels.
Although those vessels are durable and strong, careless handling can cause damage that
can lead to unexpected accidents. Do not drop vessels, let them fall, apply impact or roll
them on the ground.
(3) Storage
Although R-410A is not flammable, it must be stored in a well-ventilated, cool, and dark
place in the same way as any other high-pressure gases.
It should also be noted that high-pressure vessels are equipped with safety devices that
releases gas when the ambient temperature reaches more than a certain level (fusible plug
melts) and when the pressure exceeds a certain level (spring-type safety valve operates).

1.3 Service Tools

R-410A is used under higher working pressure, compared to previous refrigerants
(R-22,R-407C). Furthermore, the refrigerating machine oil has been changed from Suniso oil to
Ether oil, and if oil mixing is occurred, sludge results in the refrigerants and causes other
problems. Therefore, gauge manifolds and charge hoses that are used with a previous
refrigerant (R-22,R-407C) can not be used for products that use new refrigerants.
Be sure to use dedicated tools and devices.
Tool compatibility
Compatibility
Tool HFC HCFC Reasons for change
R-410A R-407C R-22
2Do not use the same tools for R-22
Gauge manifold and R-410A.
5
Charge hose 2Thread specification differs for
R-410A and R-407C.
Charging cylinder 5 { 2Weighting instrument used for HFCs.
Gas detector { 5 2The same tool can be used for HFCs.
Vacuum pump 2To use existing pump for HFCs,
(pump with reverse flow { vacuum pump adapter must be
preventive function) installed.
Weighting instrument {
2Seal material is different between
R-22 and HFCs.
Charge mouthpiece 5 2Thread specification is different
between R-410A and others.
Flaring tool (Clutch type) { 2For R-410A, flare gauge is necessary.
Torque wrench { 2Torque-up for 1/2 and 5/8
Pipe cutter {
Pipe expander {
Pipe bender {
2Due to refrigerating machine oil
Pipe assembling oil 5 change. (No Suniso oil can be used.)
Refrigerant recovery Check your recovery device.
device
2Only φ19.1 is changed to 1/2H material
Refrigerant piping See the chart below. while the previous material is "O".
As for the charge mouthpiece and packing, 1/2UNF20 is necessary for mouthpiece size of
charge hose.
Copper tube material and thickness
R-407C R-410A
Pipe size Thickness Thickness
Material Material
t (mm) t (mm)
φ6.4 O 0.8 O 0.8
φ9.5 O 0.8 O 0.8
φ12.7 O 0.8 O 0.8
φ15.9 O 1.0 O 1.0
φ19.1 O 1.0 1/2H 1.0
φ22.2 1/2H 1.0 1/2H 1.0
φ25.4 1/2H 1.0 1/2H 1.0
φ28.6 1/2H 1.0 1/2H 1.0
φ31.8 1/2H 1.2 1/2H 1.1
φ38.1 1/2H 1.4 1/2H 1.4
φ44.5 1/2H 1.6 1/2H 1.6
* O: Soft (Annealed)
H: Hard (Drawn)

1. Flaring tool
Flare gauge
Specifications
2 Dimension A
Unit:mm
Nominal size
Tube O.D. A +0
-0.4
Do Class-2 (R-410A) Class-1 (Conventional)

1/4 6.35 9.1 9.0
3/8 9.52 13.2 13.0
1/2 12.70 16.6 16.2
5/8 15.88 19.7 19.4
3/4 19.05 24.0 23.3
Differences
2 Change of dimension A
Dimension A
For class-1: R-407C

For class-2: R-410A
Conventional flaring tools can be used when the work process is changed.
(change of work process)
Previously, a pipe extension margin of 0 to 0.5mm was provided for flaring. For R-410A air
conditioners, perform pipe flaring with a pipe extension margin of 1.0 to 1.5mm.
(For clutch type only)
Conventional tool with pipe extension margin adjustment can be used.

2. Torque wrench
Specifications
2 Dimension B Unit:mm
Nominal size Class-1 Class-2 Previous
1/2 24 26 24
5/8 27 29 27
No change in tightening torque
No change in pipes of other sizes
Differences
2 Change of dimension B
Only 1/2", 5/8" are extended
For class-1: R-407C

For class-2: R-410A
Dimension B
3. Vacuum pump with check valve
Vacuum pump adapter

Reverse flow preventive
vacuum adapter
Specifications
2 Discharge speed z Maximum degree of vacuum
50 l/min (50Hz) Select a vacuum pump which is able to keep
60 l/min (60Hz) the vacuum degree of the system in excess of
2 Suction port UNF7/16-20(1/4 Flare) –100.7 kPa (5 torr – 755 mmHg).
UNF1/2-20(5/16 Flare) with adapter
Differences
2 Equipped with function to prevent reverse oil flow
2 Previous vacuum pump can be used by installing adapter.

4. Leak tester
Specifications
2 Hydrogen detecting type, etc.
2 Applicable refrigerants
R-410A, R-407C, R-404A, R-507A, R-134a, etc.
Differences
2 Previous testers detected chlorine. Since HFCs do not contain chlorine, new tester detects
hydrogen.
5. Refrigerant oil (Air compal)
Specifications
2 Contains synthetic oil, therefore it can be used for piping work of every refrigerant cycle.
2 Offers high rust resistance and stability over long period of time.
Differences
2 Can be used for R-410A and R-22 units.
6. Gauge manifold for R-410A
Specifications
2 High pressure gauge
- 0.1 to 5.3 MPa (-76 cmHg to 53 kg/cm2)
2 Low pressure gauge
- 0.1 to 3.8 MPa (-76 cmHg to 38 kg/cm2)
2 1/4" → 5/16" (2min → 2.5min)
2 No oil is used in pressure test of gauges.
→ For prevention of contamination

2 Temperature scale indicates the relationship between pressure and temperature in gas
saturated state.
Differences
2 Change in pressure
2 Change in service port diameter
7. Charge hose for R-410A
(Hose with ball valve)
Specifications
2 Working pressure 5.08 MPa (51.8 kg/cm2)
2 Rupture pressure 25.4 MPa (259 kg/cm2)
2 Available with and without hand-operate valve that prevents refrigerant from outflow.
Differences
2 Pressure proof hose
2 Change in service port diameter
2 Use of nylon coated material for HFC resistance
8. Charging cylinder
Can not be used
Specifications
2 Use weigher for refrigerant charge listed below to charge directly from refrigerant cylinder.
Differences
2 The cylinder can not be used for mixed refrigerant since mixing ratio is changed during
charging.
When R-410A is charged in liquid state using charging cylinder, foaming phenomenon is
generated inside charging cylinder.

9. Weigher for refrigerant charge
Specifications
2 High accuracy
TA101A (for 10-kg cylinder) = ± 2g
TA101B (for 20-kg cylinder) = ± 5g
2 Equipped with pressure-resistant sight glass to check liquid refrigerant charging.
2 A manifold with separate ports for HFCs and previous refrigerants is equipped as standard
accessories.
Differences
2 Measurement is based on weight to prevent change of mixing ratio during charging.
10. Charge mouthpiece
Specifications
2 For R-410A, 1/4"→ 5/16" (2min → 2.5min)
2 Material is changed from CR to H-NBR.
Differences
2 Change of thread specification on hose connection side (For the R-410A use)
2 Change of sealer material for the HFCs use.

SiENBE34-802
Index
A Outdoor Unit ................................................... 30
A0 .........................................................................142 Electronic Expansion Valve PI Control .................. 51
A1 .........................................................................143 Error of External Protection Device ..................... 142
A3 .........................................................................144 Excessive Number of Indoor Units ...................... 200
A6 .........................................................................146
A7 .........................................................................147 F
A8 .........................................................................149 F3 ........................................................................ 172
A9 .........................................................................150 F6 ........................................................................ 173
Abnormal Discharge Pipe Temperature ...............172 Failure of Combination (Between Indoor unit PC
Abnormal Power Supply Voltage .........................149 Board and Fan PC Board) ............................ 158
About Refrigerant R-410A ....................................258 Failure of Transmission (Between Indoor unit PC
Actuation of High Pressure Switch .......................164 Board and Fan PC Board) ............................ 154
Actuation of Low Pressure Sensor .......................166 Fan Motor (M1F) Lock, Overload ........................ 146
Address Duplication of Central Remote Control ..201 Field Setting .......................................................... 87
Address Duplication, Improper Setting .................210 Field Setting from Outdoor Unit ........................... 104
AF .........................................................................152 Field Setting from Remote Control ........................ 87
AJ .........................................................................153 Freeze Prevention ................................................. 70
Applicable range of Field setting ............................92 Functional Parts Layout ........................................ 44
C H
C1 .........................................................................154 H9 ........................................................................ 174
C4 .........................................................................156 Heating Operation Prohibition ............................... 64
C5 .........................................................................157 High Pressure Protection Control .......................... 60
C6 .........................................................................158 High Voltage of Capacitor in Main Inverter Circuit ....
C9 .........................................................................159 188
CA ........................................................................160
CC ........................................................................161 I
Centralized Control Group No. Setting .................100 Improper Combination of Optional Controllers for
Check for causes of drop in low pressure ............218 Centralized Control ...................................... 208
Check for causes of rise in high pressure ............217 Inverter Compressor Abnormal ........................... 184
Check Operation ....................................................82 Inverter Compressor Motor Lock ......................... 168
Check Operation not Executed ............................193 Inverter Current Abnormal ................................... 185
CJ .........................................................................162 Inverter Protection Control .................................... 63
Compressor PI Control ...........................................50 Inverter Start up Error ......................................... 186
Contents of Control Modes ..................................102
Cool / Heat Mode Switching .................................113 J
Cooling Operation Fan Control ..............................52 J3 ........................................................................ 175
J5 ........................................................................ 176
D J6 ........................................................................ 177
Defrosting Operation ..............................................56 J7 ........................................................................ 178
Demand Operation .................................................64 J9 ........................................................................ 179
Detailed Explanation of Setting Modes ..................93 JA ........................................................................ 180
Discharge Pipe Protection Control .........................62 JC ........................................................................ 181
Display “Under Host Computer Integrate Control”
Blinks (Repeats Double Blink) ......................216 L
Display “Under Host Computer Integrate Control” L1 ........................................................................ 182
Blinks (Repeats Single Blink) ........................213 L4 ........................................................................ 183
Drain Level above Limit ........................................152 L5 ........................................................................ 184
Drain Pump Control ................................................65 L8 ........................................................................ 185
L9 ........................................................................ 186
E LC ........................................................................ 187
E1 .........................................................................163 List of Electrical and Functional Parts
E3 .........................................................................164 Indoor Unit ...................................................... 32
E4 .........................................................................166 Louver Control for Preventing Ceiling Dirt ............. 67
E5 .........................................................................168 Low Pressure Drop Due to Refrigerant Shortage or
E7 .........................................................................169 Electronic Expansion Valve Failure .............. 189
E9 .........................................................................170 Low Pressure Protection Control .......................... 61
Electrical and Functional Parts
Index i
SiENBE34-802
M Operation Lamp Blinks ........................................ 211

M1 ........................................................................206 Operation Mode .................................................... 48
M8 ........................................................................207 Operation when Power is Turned On .................... 85
MA ........................................................................208 Option List ........................................................... 246
Malfunction code indication by outdoor unit PC board Outdoor Unit PC Board Layout ............................. 86
.......................................................................138 Outdoor Unit Thermistors for Discharge Pipe ..... 252
Malfunction of Capacity Determination Device ....153
Malfunction of Discharge Pipe Thermistor (R2T) .175 P
Malfunction of Drain Level Control System (S1L) 144 P1 ........................................................................ 188
Malfunction of High Pressure Sensor ...................180 PC Board Defect ................................. 143, 163, 206
Malfunction of Humidity Sensor System ..............161 Power Supply Insufficient or Instantaneous Failure ..
Malfunction of Inverter Radiating Fin Temperature 191
Rise ...............................................................183 Precautions for New Refrigerant (R-410A) .......... 258
Malfunction of Low Pressure Sensor ...................181 Pressure Sensor ................................................. 253
Malfunction of Moving Part of Electronic Expansion Protection Control ................................................. 60
Valve (Y1E) ...................................................150 Pump-down Residual Operation ........................... 57
Malfunction of Moving Part of Electronic Expansion
Valve (Y1E, Y3E) ..........................................170 R
Malfunction of Outdoor Unit Fan Motor ................169 Refrigerant Circuit ................................................. 40
Malfunction of PC Board ......................................182 Refrigerant Cylinders .......................................... 260
Malfunction of Swing Flap Motor (M1S) ...............147 Refrigerant Overcharged ..................................... 173
Malfunction of System, Refrigerant System Address Restart Standby .................................................... 58
Undefined ......................................................204
Malfunction of Thermistor (R1T) for Suction Air ...159 S
Malfunction of Thermistor (R2T) for Heat Exchanger Service Tools ...................................................... 261
156 Setting by Dip Switches ...................................... 104
Malfunction of Thermistor (R3T) for Gas Pipes ....157 Setting by pushbutton switches ........................... 106
Malfunction of Thermistor (R3T, R5T) for Suction Pipe Setting of Low Noise Operation and Demand
1, 2 ................................................................176 Operation ..................................................... 115
Malfunction of Thermistor (R4T) ..........................179 Setting of Refrigerant Additional Charging Operation
Malfunction of Thermistor (R6T) ..........................177 119
Malfunction of Thermistor (R7T) for Outdoor Unit Special Control ...................................................... 53
Liquid Pipe ....................................................178 Specifications .......................................................... 6
Malfunction of Thermistor for Discharge Air .........160 Startup Control ...................................................... 53
Malfunction of Thermostat Sensor in Remote Control Stopping Operation ............................................... 59
162 Swing Flaps ........................................................... 71
Malfunction of Transmission between Central Remote Symptom-based Troubleshooting ....................... 125
Control and Indoor Unit .................................202 System is not Set yet .......................................... 203
Malfunction of Transmission between Centralized
Remote Control and Indoor Unit ...................205 T
Malfunction of Transmission between Indoor and Test Operation
Outdoor Units in the Same System ...............198 Procedure and Outline .................................... 74
Malfunction of Transmission between Indoor Units Thermistor Resistance / Temperature Characteristics
and Outdoor Units .........................................194 ...................................................................... 251
Malfunction of Transmission between Inverter and Thermostat Sensor in Remote Control .................. 68
Control PC Board ..........................................187
Malfunction of Transmission between Main and Sub U
Remote Controls ...........................................197 U0 ........................................................................ 189
Malfunction of Transmission between Optional U2 ........................................................................ 191
Controllers for Centralized Control ................207 U3 ........................................................................ 193
Malfunction of Transmission between Remote Control U4 ........................................................................ 194
and Indoor Unit .............................................196 U5 ........................................................................ 196
MC ........................................................................210 U8 ........................................................................ 197
Method of Replacing The Inverter’s Power Transistors U9 ........................................................................ 198
and Diode Modules .......................................254 UA ....................................................................... 200
UC ....................................................................... 201
N UE ............................................................... 202, 205
Normal Operation ...................................................49 UF ....................................................................... 203
UH ....................................................................... 204
O
Oil Return Operation ..............................................54
ii Index
SiENBE34-802
Drawings & Flow Charts

A H
abnormal discharge pipe temperature .................172 high pressure protection control ............................ 60
abnormal power supply voltage ...........................149 high voltage of capacitor in main inverter circuit . 188
actuation of high pressure switch .........................164
actuation of low pressure sensor .........................166 I
address duplication of central remote control ......201 improper combination of optional controllers for cen-
address duplication, improper setting ..................210 tralized control .............................................. 208
inverter compressor abnormal ............................. 184
C inverter current abnormal .................................... 185
centralized control group no. setting ....................100 inverter protection control ...................................... 63
brc1c type ......................................................100 inverter start up error ........................................... 186
brc4 type ........................................................101
brc7 type ........................................................101 L
group no. setting example .............................101 louver control for preventing ceiling dirt ................. 67
check for causes of drop in low pressure .............218 low pressure drop due to refrigerant shortage or elec-
check for causes of rise in high pressure .............217 tronic expansion valve failure ....................... 189
check for fan motor connector ..............................219 low pressure protection control ............................. 61
check operation ......................................................82
check operation not executed ..............................193 M
check work prior to turn power supply on ...............74 malfunction of capacity determination device ...... 153
compressor motor lock .........................................168 malfunction of discharge pipe thermistor (r2t) ..... 175
contents of control modes ....................................102 malfunction of drain level control system (s1l) .... 144
how to select operation mode ........................103 malfunction of high pressure sensor ................... 180
cooling operation fan control ..................................52 malfunction of humidity sensor system ............... 161
malfunction of inverter radiating fin temperature rise
D 183
display “under host computer integrate control” blinks malfunction of low pressure sensor ..................... 181
(repeats double blink) ...................................216 malfunction of moving part of electronic expansion
display “under host computer integrate control” blinks valve (20e) ................................................... 150
(repeats single blink) .....................................213 malfunction of moving part of electronic expansion
display of sensor and address data .....................134 valve (y1e, y3e) ............................................ 170
drain level above limit ...........................................152 malfunction of outdoor unit fan motor .................. 169
drain pump control .................................................65 malfunction of swing flap motor (ma) .................. 147
when the float switch is tripped and “af” is dis- malfunction of system, refrigerant system address un-
played on the remote control ..............66 defined ......................................................... 204
when the float switch is tripped during heating op- malfunction of thermistor (r1t) for outdoor air ...... 174
eration .................................................66 malfunction of thermistor (r1t) for suction air ....... 159
when the float switch is tripped while the cooling malfunction of thermistor (r2t) for heat exchanger ....
thermostat is off ..................................65 156
when the float switch is tripped while the cooling malfunction of thermistor (r3t) for gas pipes ........ 157
thermostat is on ..................................65 malfunction of thermistor (r3t, r5t) for suction pipe 1, 2
...................................................................... 176
E malfunction of thermistor (r4t) ............................. 179
error of external protection device ........................142 malfunction of thermistor (r6t) ............................. 177
excessive number of indoor units .........................200 malfunction of thermistor (r7t) for outdoor unit liquid
pipe .............................................................. 178
F malfunction of thermistor for discharge air .......... 160
failure of combination (between indoor unit pc board malfunction of thermostat sensor in remote control ..
and fan pc board) ..........................................158 162
failure of transmission (between indoor unit pc board malfunction of transmission between central remote
and fan pc board) ..........................................154 control and indoor unit .................................. 202
fan motor (m1f) lock, overload .............................146 malfunction of transmission between centralized re-
freeze prevention ...................................................70 mote control and indoor unit ......................... 205
functional parts layout ............................................44 malfunction of transmission between indoor and out-
door units in the same system ..................... 198
Drawings & Flow Charts iii

SiENBE34-802
malfunction of transmission between indoor units and

outdoor units .................................................194
malfunction of transmission between inverter and con-
trol pc board ..................................................187
malfunction of transmission between main and sub re-
mote controls ................................................197
malfunction of transmission between optional control-
lers for centralized control .............................207
malfunction of transmission between remote control
and indoor unit ..............................................196
method of replacing the inverter’s power transistors
modules ........................................................254
O
operation lamp blinks ...........................................211
operation mode ......................................................48
operation of the remote control’s inspection / test op-
eration button ................................................132
outdoor unit pc board layout ...................................86
P
pc board defect ....................................143, 163, 206
piping diagrams ....................................................222
power supply insufficient or instantaneous failure 191
pressure sensor ...................................................253
R
refrigerant circuit ....................................................40
refrigerant overcharged ........................................173
remote control self-diagnosis function ..................135
remote control service mode ................................133
S
self-diagnosis by wired remote control .................129
self-diagnosis by wireless remote control ............130
setting of low noise operation and demand operation
115
image of operation .........................................116
setting of refrigerant additional charging operation ....
119
check operation .............................................121
simplified remote control ........................................90
brc2c51 ............................................................90
system is not set yet .............................................203
T
thermostat sensor in remote control .......................68
cooling .............................................................68
heating .............................................................69
torque wrench ......................................................263
troubleshooting by remote control ........................128
turn power on .........................................................74
W
weigher for refrigerant charge ..............................266
wired remote control ...............................................87
wireless remote control - indoor unit ......................89
brc4 type ..........................................................89
brc7 type ..........................................................89
wiring diagrams ....................................................227
iv Drawings & Flow Charts

Daikin’s unique position as a manufacturer of air Daikin Europe N.V. is approved by LRQA for its Quality The present publication is drawn up by way of information only and does not
conditioning equipment, compressors and Management System in accordance with the ISO9001 constitute an offer binding upon Daikin Europe N.V.. Daikin Europe N.V. has
refrigerants has led to its close involvement in standard. ISO9001 pertains to quality assurance regarding compiled the content of this publication to the best of its knowledge. No
environmental issues. For several years Daikin has design, development, manufacturing as well as to services express or implied warranty is given for the completeness, accuracy,
had the intension to become a leader in the provision related to the product. reliability or fitness for particular purpose of its content and the products and
of products that have limited impact on the services presented therein. Specifications are subject to change without
environment. This challenge demands the eco design prior notice. Daikin Europe N.V. explicitly rejects any liability for any direct or
and development of a wide range of products and an indirect damage, in the broadest sense, arising from or related to the use
energy management system, resulting in energy and/or interpretation of this publication. All content is copyrighted by Daikin
conservation and a reduction of waste. Europe N.V..
Prepared in Belgium by Lannoo (www.lannooprint.be), a company whose concern for
ISO14001 assures an effective environmental

Responsible Editor: Daikin Europe N.V., Zandvoordestraat 300, B- 8400 Oostende
management system in order to help protect human health

and the environment from the potential impact of our
activities, products and services and to assist in
maintaining and improving the quality of the environment.
the environmont is set in the EMAS and ISO 14001 systems.
Daikin units comply with the European regulations that

guarantee the safety of the product.
SiENBE34-802 • 04/2009 • Copyright © Daikin
Naamloze Vennootschap
Zandvoordestraat 300 VRV products are not within the scope of the Eurovent
certification programme.
B-8400 Oostende - Belgium
www.daikin.eu
BTW: BE 0412 120 336
RPR Oostende
ÉSiENBE34-802iËÍ

VRV Iiis Minivrv Sibe34 802

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

VRV Iiis Minivrv Sibe34 802

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

VRV Iiis Minivrv Sibe34 802

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

SiENBE34-802

Part 1 General Information ........................................................... 1

Part 2 Specifications .................................................................... 5

Part 3 List of Electrical and Functional Parts............................ 29

Part 4 Refrigerant Circuit ........................................................... 39

3.5 Restart Standby......................................................................................58

Part 6 Test Operation ................................................................. 73

Part 7 Troubleshooting ............................................................. 123

Table of Contents iii

4. Troubleshooting by Indication on the Centralized Remote Control ...............205

Part 8 Appendix......................................................................... 221

Part 9 Precautions for New Refrigerant (R-410A) .................... 257

Drawings & Flow Charts ............................................................... iii

When disconnecting the suction or discharge pipe of the compressor at the

The step-up capacitor supplies high-voltage electricity to the electrical

Do not clean the air conditioner by splashing water.

Be sure to provide the grounding when repairing the equipment in a humid or

Do not tilt the unit when removing it.

1.1.2 Cautions Regarding Products after Repair

1.1.3 Inspection after Repair

1.1.4 Using Icons

1.1.5 Using Icons List

Warning A “warning” is used when there is danger of personal injury.

Reference A “reference” guides the reader to other places in this binder or

After Sales Service Division

1. Model Names of Indoor/Outdoor Units....................................................2

1. Model Names of Indoor/Outdoor Units

Ceiling Mounted FXMQ — — — 40P 50P 63P 80P 100P 125P

Ceiling Suspended FXHQ — — 32MA — — 63MA — 100MA —

Wall Mounted FXAQ 20MA 25MA 32MA 40MA 50MA 63MA — — — VE

Floor Standing FXLQ 20MA 25MA 32MA 40MA 50MA 63MA — — —

Concealed Floor FXNQ 20MA 25MA 32MA 40MA 50MA 63MA — — —

Inverter Heat Pump RXYSQ 4PA 5PA 6PA Y1, V1

Y1 :3φ, 380~415V, 50Hz

Ceiling Mounted Cassette Corner Type Floor Standing Type

Slim Ceiling Mounted Duct Type Concealed Floor Standing Type

Ceiling Concealed Type (small) Ceiling Suspended Cassette Type

FXDQ 20P 25P 32P 40NA 50NA 63NA — — —

1-1 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS RXYSQ4PA7Y1B RXYSQ5PA7Y1B RXYSQ6PA7Y1B

Heat pump 50Hz <RXYSQ-PA7V1B>

1-1 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS RXYSQ4PA7V1B RXYSQ5PA7V1B RXYSQ6PA7V1B

Type Flare connection Flare connection Braze connection

1.2 Indoor Units

1-1 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FXCQ20M8V3B FXCQ25M8V3B FXCQ32M8V3B FXCQ40M8V3B FXCQ50M8V3B

Ceiling Mounted Cassette Type (Double Flow)

Dimensions Nr of Passes 6×2 5×2 6

Drive Direct drive

Ceiling Mounted Cassette Type (Round-flow)

Fan Motor Steps 2 2 2 2 2

Ceiling Mounted Cassette Type (Round-flow)

600×600 Ceiling Mounted Cassette Type (Multi Flow)

Ceiling Mounted Cassette Corner Type

Slim Ceiling Mounted Duct Type

Slim Ceiling Mounted Duct Type (with Drain Pump)

Ceiling Mounted Built-in Type

Ceiling Mounted Built-in Type

Ceiling Mounted Duct Type

Ceiling Suspended Type

Wall Mounted Type